Preface

Thank you for choosing GTAKE GK620 Series General Purpose AC Motor Drives. This user
manual presents a detailed description of GK620 series with respect to product features,
structural characteristics, functions, installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting,
commissioning and daily maintenance, etc. Be sure to carefully read through the safety
precautions before use, and use this product on the premise that personnel and equipment
safety is ensured.

IMPORTANT NOTES

 Please assure the intactness of product enclosure and all safety covers before
installation .Operation must conform to the requirements of this manual and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
 Contents of this manual may be subject to appropriate modification as a result of product
upgrade, specification change and update of the manual.
 In the event of damage or loss of user manual, users may ask local distributors, offices or
our Technical Service Department for a new one.
 If any item as stated in this manual is not clear, please contact our Technical Service
Department.
 If any anomaly occurs after power up or during the operation, it is essential to stop the
machine and identify the fault or seek technical services as soon as possible.
 Telephone number of our Technical Service Department: (+86) 0755-86392601.

 Table of Contents

Preface .............................................................................................................................. - 1 -

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions .......................................................................................... - 1 -

1.1 Safety Considerations ...................................................................................... - 1 -

1.2 Other Considerations ....................................................................................... - 5 -

Chapter 2 Product Information ........................................................................................ - 7 -

2.1 Model Explanation............................................................................................ - 7 -

2.2 Nameplate Information ..................................................................................... - 7 -

2.3 Information of Product Model ........................................................................... - 8 -

2.4 Technical Features of GK620 .......................................................................... - 11 -

2.5 Parts Drawing ................................................................................................ - 14 -

2.6 Appearance, Mounting Dimensions and Weight ............................................. - 16 -

2.7 External Dimensions of Control Panel ............................................................ - 22 -

2.8 External Dimensions of Control Panel Bracket ............................................... - 22 -

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring .................................................................................. - 23 -

3.1 Installation Environment ................................................................................. - 23 -

3.2 Minimum Mounting Clearances ...................................................................... - 23 -

3.3 Remove & Mount Control Panel and Cover .................................................... - 25 -

3.4 Configuration of Peripheral Devices ............................................................... - 30 -

3.5 Terminal Configuration ................................................................................... - 34 -

3.6 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring .................................................................. - 34 -

 

3.7 Control Terminal Wiring .................................................................................. - 41 -

3.8 Control Terminal Specification ........................................................................ - 44 -

3.9 Control Terminal Usage .................................................................................. - 45 -

3.10 Instruction of Signal Switches ......................................................................... - 52 -

3.11 EMI Solutions ................................................................................................. - 52 -

Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions ................................................................... - 55 -

4.1 Operation of Control Panel ............................................................................. - 55 -

4.2 First-time Power up ........................................................................................ - 71 -

Chapter 5 List of Parameters ......................................................................................... - 73 -

Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ........................................................................- 120 -

Group A System Parameters and Parameter Management.......................................- 120 -

Group A0 System Parameters .............................................................................- 120 -
Group A1 User-defined Display Parameters.........................................................- 123 -

Group b Run Parameter Setting ...............................................................................- 126 -

Group b0 Frequency Setting ................................................................................- 126 -
Group b1 Start/Stop Control.................................................................................- 139 -
Group b2 Accel/Decel Parameters .......................................................................- 145 -

Group C Input and Output Terminals ........................................................................- 151 -

Group C0 Digital Input .........................................................................................- 151 -
Group C1 Digital Output.......................................................................................- 164 -
Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input........................................................................- 171 -
Group C3 Analog and Pulse Output .....................................................................- 176 -
Group C4 Automatic Correction of Analog Input...................................................- 181 -

Group d Motor and Control Parameters ....................................................................- 182 -

Group d0 Parameters of Motor 1..........................................................................- 182 -
Group d1 V/f Control Parameters of Motor 1 ........................................................- 187 -
Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1 ..................................................- 194 -
 Group d3 Parameters of Motor 2..........................................................................- 198 -
Group d4 V/f Control Parameters of Motor 2 ........................................................- 199 -
Group d5 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 2 ..................................................- 200 -

Group E Enhanced Function and Protection Parameters..........................................- 202 -

Group E0 Enhanced Function ..............................................................................- 202 -
Group E1 Protection Parameters .........................................................................- 206 -

Group F Application..................................................................................................- 210 -

Group F0 Process PID .........................................................................................- 210 -
Group F1 Multi-step Frequency............................................................................- 216 -
Group F2 Simple PLC ..........................................................................................- 219 -
Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count ........................................- 228 -

Group H Communication Parameters .......................................................................- 234 -

Group H0 MODBUS Communication Parameters ................................................- 234 -
Group H1 Profibus-DP communication parameters ..............................................- 236 -

Group L Keys and Display of Control Panel ..............................................................- 236 -

Group L0 Keys of Control Panel...........................................................................- 236 -
Group L1 Control Panel Display Setting ...............................................................- 238 -

Group U Monitoring ..................................................................................................- 240 -

Group U0 Status Monitoring.................................................................................- 240 -
Group U1 History Fault ........................................................................................- 244 -

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................- 246 -

7.1 Fault Causes and Troubleshooting ................................................................- 246 -

Chapter 8 Maintenance .................................................................................................- 254 -

8.1 Routine Inspection ........................................................................................- 254 -

8.2 Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................- 255 -

8.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Parts ..................................................................- 257 -

8.4 Storage .........................................................................................................- 258 -

 

Appendix Communication Protocol .............................................................................- 259 -

1. Networking Mode ...............................................................................................- 259 -

2. Interface Mode...................................................................................................- 259 -

3. Communication Mode ........................................................................................- 259 -

4. Protocol Format .................................................................................................- 260 -

5. Protocol Function...............................................................................................- 262 -

6. Operation Instructions ........................................................................................- 275 -

7. LRC/CRC Generation ........................................................................................- 279 -

GK620 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions
Safety signs in this manual:

WARNING: indicates the situation in which the failure to follow operating requirements
may result in fire or serious personal injury or even death.

ATTENTION: indicates the situation in which the failure to follow operating requirements
may cause moderate or slight injury and damage to equipment.

Users are requested to read this chapter carefully when installing, commissioning and repairing
this product and perform the operation according to safety precautions as set forth in this
chapter without violation. GTAKE bears no responsibility for any injury and loss as a result of
any violation operation.

1.1 Safety Considerations

1.1.1 Prior to Installation

WARNING
 Do not touch control terminals, circuit boards and any other electronic parts and
components with bare hands.
 Do not use the drive whose component(s) is/are missing or damaged. Failure to comply
may result in more faults and/or personal injury even death.

ATTENTION

 Check if the product information indicated on the nameplate is consistent with the order
requirements. If not, do not install it.
 Do not install the drive in the event that the packing list does not match the real
equipment.

1.1.2 Installation

WARNING

 Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated
machinery should plan or implement the installation. Failure to comply may result in
equipment damage and/or personnel injury even death.

-1-
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK620 User Manual

 This equipment must be mounted on metal or other flame retardant objects. Failure to
comply may result in fire.
 This equipment must be mounted in an area which is away from combustibles and heat
sources. Failure to comply may result in fire.
 This equipment must in no case be mounted in the environment exposed to explosive gases.
Failure to comply may result in explosion.
 Never adjust mounting bolts of this equipment, especially the ones with red marks. Failure to
comply may result in equipment damage.

ATTENTION

 Handle the equipment gently and take hold of its sole plate so as to avoid foot injury or
equipment damage.
 Mount the equipment where its weight can be withstood. Failure to comply may result in
equipment damage and/or personnel injury if falling happens.
 Make sure the installation environment conforms to the requirements as stated in
Section 2.4. If not, de-rating is necessary. Failure to comply may result in equipment
damage.
 Prevent drilling residues, wire ends and screws from falling into the equipment during
installation. Failure to comply may result in faults or equipment damage.
 When mounted in a cabinet, this equipment should be provided with appropriate heat
dissipation. Failure to comply may result in faults or equipment damage.

1.1.3 Wiring

WARNING

 Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated
machinery should plan or implement the wiring. Failure to comply may result in personnel
injury and/or equipment damage.
 Wiring must strictly conform to this manual. Failure to comply may result in personnel
injury and/or equipment damage.
 Make sure the input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring.
Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and/or equipment damage.
 All wiring operations must comply with EMC and safety regulations and/or electrical
codes, and the conductor diameter should conform to recommendations of this manual.
Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and/or equipment damage.
 Since overall leakage current of this equipment may be bigger than 3.5mA, for safety's
sake, this equipment and its associated motor must be well grounded so as to avoid risk
of electric shock.

-2-
GK620 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions

 Be sure to implement wiring in strict accordance with the marks on this equipment’s
terminals. Never connect three-phase power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and
W/T3. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
 Install braking resistors at terminals + ( + 1) and B2 (BR) only. Failure to comply may
result in equipment damage.
 Wiring screws and bolts for main circuit terminals must be screwed tightly. Failure to
comply may result in equipment damage.
 AC 220V signal is prohibited from connecting to other terminals than control terminals
RA, RB and RC. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

ATTENTION
 Since all adjustable frequency AC drives from GTAKE have been subjected to hi-pot
test before delivery, users are prohibited from implementing such a test on this
equipment. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
 Signal wires should be away from main power lines to the best of the possibility. If this
cannot be ensured, vertical cross-arrangement shall be implemented, otherwise
interference noise to control signal may occur.
 If motor cables are longer than 100m, it is recommended output AC reactor be used.
Failure to comply may result in faults.
 The coder must be provided with shielded cables whose shielded layer must be well
grounded.

1.1.4 Run

WARNING
 Drives which have been stored for more than 2 years should be used with voltage
regulator to gradually boost the voltage when applying power to the drives. Failure to
comply may result in equipment damage.
 Be sure to implement the wiring as per Section 3.4 before applying power to the drive.
Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or electric shock hazard.
 Be sure to confirm the completion and correctness of the drive wiring and close the
cover before applying power to the drive. Do not open the cover after applying power.
Failure to comply may result in electric shock hazard.
 After applying the power, never touch the drive and peripheral circuits no matter what
state the drive is under, otherwise there will be electric shock hazard.
 Prior to running the drive, make sure there is no person in surrounding area who can
reach the motor so as to prevent personal injury.
 When the drive is running, foreign bodies should be prevented falling into the
equipment. Failure to comply may result in faults and/or equipment damage.

-3-
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK620 User Manual

 Only qualified technicians familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives are allowed to
perform signal test during operation. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage
and/or personal injury.
 Never change the drive parameters at will. Failure to comply may result in equipment
damage.

ATTENTION

 Make sure the number of phases of power supply and rated voltage are consistent with
product nameplate. If not, contact the seller or GTAKE.
 Check there are no short circuits in peripheral circuits connected with the drive, and
make sure the connection is tight. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
 Make sure the motor and associated machinery are within allowable range of service
prior to operation. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
 Never touch fans, heat sink and braking resistor with bare hands. Failure to comply may
result in equipment damage and/or personal injury.
 It is not allowed to start & stop the drive frequently via direct switching power on or off.
Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
 Make sure the drive is in a non-output status before switch-on/switch-off of the drive
output and/or contactor. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.

1.1.5 Maintenance

WARNING

 Only qualified technicians are allowed to implement the maintenance, and

troubleshooting.
 Never implement the maintenance, and troubleshooting before power supply has been
turned off and discharged completely. Failure to comply may result in equipment
damage and/or personal injury.
 To avoid an electric shock hazard, wait at least 10 minutes after the power has been
turned off and make sure the residual voltage of the bus capacitors has discharged to
0V before performing any work on the drive.
 After the replacement of the drive, be sure to perform the same procedures in strict
accordance with the above-noted rules.

ATTENTION

 Do not touch the electric components with bare hands during maintenance, and
troubleshooting. Failure to comply may result in component damage due to ESD.
 All pluggable components can be inserted or pulled out only when power has been
turned off.

-4-
GK620 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions

1.2 Other Considerations

1.2.1 Input Power Supply

This series of drives are not applicable to applications out the range of operating voltage as set
forth in this manual. If necessary, please use booster to rise or drop the voltage to regulated
voltage range.

This series of drives support common DC bus input. Users are suggested to consult GTAKE
technical personnel before use.

1.2.2 Surge Protection

This series of drives are furnished with surge suppressor that has certain resistance to lightning
induction. However, users in areas where lightning occurs frequently need to mount an external
surge suppressor in front of power input side of the drive.

1.2.3 Operation of Contactor

As to the configuration of peripheral devices recommended by this manual, it is necessary to

mount a contactor between the power supply and input side of the drive. Such a contactor
should not be used as a control device to start and stop the drive, as frequent charging &
discharging shall reduce the service life of internal electrolytic capacitors.

When it is necessary to mount a contactor between the drive output and the motor, it should be
ensured the drive is in a non-output status before switch-on/switch-off of such a contactor.
Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive.

1.2.4 Output Filter

Since the drive output is PWM high frequency chopping voltage, mounting filter devices such
as an output filter and an output AC reactor between the motor and the drive shall effectively
reduce output noise, avoiding interference to other surrounding equipment.

If the length of cable between the drive and the motor exceeds 100m, an output AC reactor is
recommended to use with the purpose of preventing drive fault as a result of overcurrent
caused by excessive distributed capacitance. An output filter is optional depending on the field
requirements.

Be sure not to mount phase-shifting capacitor or surge absorber at output side of the drive
since this may cause damage to the drive as a result of over-temperature.

-5-
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK620 User Manual

1.2.5 Insulation of the Motor

In view of the fact that the drive output is PWM high frequency chopping voltage accompanied
by higher harmonics, the noise, temperature rise and vibration of the motor is higher compared
with sinusoidal voltage. Particularly this debases motor insulation. Therefore, the motor should
be subjected to insulation inspection before initial use or reuse after being stored for a long
period of time. The motor in regular service should also be subjected to regular insulation
inspection so as to avoid damage to the drive as a result of motor insulation damage. A 500V
voltage mode mega-ohmmeter is recommended to use for the measurement of the motor
insulation, during which, it is essential to disconnect the motor from the drive. Normally, the
insulation resistance of the motor should be bigger than 5MΩ.

1.2.6 Derating

Due to the thin air in high-altitude areas, the radiating performance of the drive with forced air
cooling may degrade while the electrolyte of electrolytic capacitors is more volatile, which can
result in reduction in product life. Drive should be derated when used in an area at the altitude
above 1000 meters. It is recommended to derate 1% for every 100m when the altitude is above
1000 meters.

-6-
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 Model Explanation

Model shown on product nameplate indicates the series name, applicable type of power supply,
power class and the version of software and hardware, etc. via the combination of numbers,
symbols and letters.

GK620 S - 4 T 7.5G/11L B- XX - XX

A0-Z9:
A0~Z9：customized hardware code
code of customized

Master series code of product

产品大系列代号 01~99：软件非标代号
01-99: customized software code

Default: without inbuilt brake chopper

缺省：无内置制动单元
B:Bwith inbuilt brake chopper
：内置制动单元
Industry-specific series code
行业专用系列代号
7.5G: 7.5kW (constant torque/heavy
Default: general-purpose series duty) /重载）
7.5G：7.5kW（恒转矩
缺省：通用系列 11L:
11L11kW
：11kW(variable
（变转矩torque/light
/轻载） duty)
S: for drawing machine
B：供水专用系列
S：拉丝机专用系列
I: for injection molding machine S：单相
S: Single-phase
T：三相
M：机床专用系列 T: three-phase
…
W ：纺织专用系列 2：200V level
4：400V level
5：460V level
6：690V level

Fig. 2-1 Product model explanation

2.2 Nameplate Information

Fig. 2-2 Nameplate information

-7-
 Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

2.3 Information of Product Model

Table 2-1 Product model and technical data

■ GK620-4T□□□G/□□□L□, three-phase 400V input, heavy duty/ light duty

Rated Rated Applic
Power
output input able Brake
Drive model rating DC reactor
current current motor chopper
(kW)
(A) (A) (kW)
0.75G 0.75 2.5 3.5 0.75
GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB
1.5L 1.5 3.8 5.0 1.5
1.5G 1.5 3.8 5.0 1.5
GK620-4T1.5G/2.2LB
2.2L 2.2 4.8 5.5 2.2
2.2G 2.2 5.5 6.0 2.2
GK620-4T2.2G/3.7LB
3.7L 3.7 8.0 10 3.7
3.7G 3.7 9.0 10.5 3.7
GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB
5.5L 5.5 11 14 5.5
5.5G 5.5 13 14.6 5.5
GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB
7.5L 7.5 16 20 7.5
Inbuilt /
7.5G 7.5 17 20.5 7.5
GK620-4T7.5G/11LB
11L 11 21 25 11
11G 11 24 29 11
GK620-4T11G/15LB
15L 15 30 35 15
15G 15 30 35 15
GK620-4T15G/18.5LB
18.5L 18.5 36 40 18.5
18.5G 18.5 39 44 18.5
GK620-4T18.5G/22LB
22L 22 45 50 22
22G 22 45 50 22
GK620-4T22G/30LB
30L 30 56 60 30
30G 30 60 65 30
GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H)*
37L 37 72 76 37 Inbuilt
37G 37 75 80 37 Inbuilt optional
GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H)*
45L 45 91 95 45 optional
45G 45 91 95 45
GK620-4T45G/55LD(H)** Inbuilt
55L 55 112 118 55

-8-
 GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Rated Rated Applic

Power
output input able Brake
Drive model rating DC reactor
current current motor chopper
(kW)
(A) (A) (kW)
55G 55 112 118 55
GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)**
75L 75 142 148 75
75G 75 150 157 75
GK620-4T75G/90L(B)* /
90L 90 176 180 90
90G 90 176 160*** 90
GK620-4T90G/110L
110L 110 210 192*** 110
110G 110 210 192*** 110
GK620-4T110G/132L
132L 132 250 230*** 132
132G 132 253 232*** 132
GK620-4T132G/160L
160L 160 304 280*** 160
160G 160 310 285*** 160
GK620-4T160G/185L
185L 185 350 326*** 185
185G 185 350 326*** 185
GK620-4T185G/200L
200L 200 380 354*** 200
200G 200 380 354*** 200
GK620-4T200G/220L
220L 220 430 403*** 220
External
220G 220 430 403*** 220
GK620-4T220G/250L External when
250L 250 470 441*** 250
when needed
250G 250 470 441*** 250 needed
GK620-4T250G/280L
280L 280 520 489*** 280
280G 280 520 489*** 280
GK620-4T280G/315L
315L 315 590 571*** 315
315G 315 590 571*** 315
GK620-4T315G/355L
355L 355 650 624*** 355
355G 355 650 624*** 355
GK620-4T355G/400L
400L 400 725 699*** 400
400G 400 725 699*** 400
GK620-4T400G/450L
450L 450 820 790*** 450
450G 450 820 790*** 450
GK620-4T450G/500L
500L 500 860 835*** 500
GK620-4T500G 500G 500 860 835*** 500
GK620-4T560G 560G 560 950 920*** 560
Inbuilt
GK620-4T630G 630G 630 1100 1050*** 630

-9-
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

* means brake chopper and DC reactor are optionally inbuilt (for GK620-4T75G/90L(B), only bake chopper is
optionally inbuilt). Take 30G/37L for example: the model without brake chopper and DC reactor is GK620-4T30G/37L,
the model with brake chopper is GK620-4T30G/37LB, the model with DC reactor is GK620-4T30G/37LD, and the
model with brake chopper and DC reactor is GK620-4T30G/37LH. Braking resistor needs to be mounted externally
with reference to 3.4.3.

** means DC reactor is inbuilt, and brake chopper is optionally inbuilt. Take 45G/55L for example: the model with DC
reactor is GK620-4T45G/55LD, and the model with DC reactor and brake chopper is GK620-4T45G/55LH. Braking
resistor needs to be mounted externally with reference to 3.4.3

*** means the rated input current configured a DC reactor. The drive GK620-4T90G/110L - GK620-4T500G is
provided with an external-mounted DC reactor in shipment as default. Be sure to connect the DC reactor. Failure to
comply may result in drive abnormal run. GK620-4T560G and GK620-4T630G are cabinet type, whose DC reactor
and output AC reactor are inbuilt as default

- 10 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.4 Technical Features of GK620

Table 2-2 Technical Features of GK620

Rated input 200V level: single/three phase 220V~240V
voltage 400V level: three phase 380V~440V
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz, tolerance ±5%
Continuous voltage fluctuation ±10%, short fluctuation
-15%~+10%, i.e. 200V: 170V~264V, 400V: 323V~484V
Power input Voltage
range Voltage out-of-balance rate <3%, distortion rate as per the
requirements of IEC61800-2

Rated input
See Section 2.3
current
Applicable
See Section 2.3
motor (kW)
Rated
See Section 2.3
current (A)
Output
3-phase: 0~ rated input voltage, error < ±3%
voltage (V)
Power output
Output
frequency 0.00~ 600.00Hz; unit: 0.01Hz
(Hz)
Overload
150% - 1min, 180% - 10s, 200% - 0.5s every 10 min
capacity
V/f control
Sensor-less vector control 1
V/f patterns
Sensor-less vector control 2
Synchronous motor sensor-less vector control
Range of 1:100 (V/f control, sensor-less vector control 1)
speed 1:200 (sensor-less vector control 2, synchronous motor
regulation sensor-less vector control)
±0.5% (V/f control)
Control Speed
±0.2% (sensor-less vector control 1 & 2, synchronous
characteristics accuracy
motor sensor-less vector control)
Speed ±0.3% (sensor-less vector control 1 & 2, synchronous
fluctuation motor sensor-less vector control)
Torque < 10ms (sensor-less vector control 1 & 2, synchronous
response motor sensor-less vector control)
0.5Hz: 180% (V/f control, sensor-less vector control 1)
Starting
0.25Hz: 180% (sensor-less vector control 2, synchronous
torque
motor sensor-less vector control)

- 11 -
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

Start
0.00~ 600.00Hz
frequency
Accel/
0.00~60000s
Decel time
Switching
0.7kHz~16kHz
frequency
Digital setting + control panel ∧/∨
Digital setting + terminal UP/DOWN
Frequency
Communication
setting
Analog setting (AI1/AI2/EAI)
Terminal pulse setting
Motor Started from starting frequency
start-up DC brake start-up
methods Flying start
Ramp to stop
Motor stop
Coast to stop
methods
Ramp stop + DC brake
Brake chopper working voltage:
Dynamic 400V level: 650V-750V
braking Service time: 0-100.0s; brake chopper for
capacity GK620-4T55G/75L and below are inbuilt or can be inbuilt
Basic
optionally. See table 2-1
functions
DC brake start frequency: 0.00~600.00Hz
DC brake
DC brake current: 0.0~100.0%
capacity
DC brake time: 0.0~30.00s

6 digital inputs, one of which can be used for high-speed

pulse input, and compatible with active open collectors
NPN, PNP and dry contact input. Digital inputs can be
Input extended to 7
terminals 2 analog inputs, one of which is voltage/current
programmable, and the other supports voltage only.
Analog inputs can be extended to 3, and the extended one
is voltage/current programmable

1 high-speed pulse output, 0~50kHz square wave signal

output. It can output signals such as frequency setting, or
output frequency, etc.
1 digital output
Output 1 relay output (can be extended to 2)
terminals
1 analog output (can be extended to 2), voltage/current
output programmable; can output signals such as
frequency setting, or output frequency, etc.

- 12 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Parameter copy, parameter backup, common DC bus, free switchover

between two motors’ parameters, flexible parameter displayed & hidden,
various master & auxiliary setting and switchover, flying start, a variety of
Accel/Decel curves optional, automatic correction of analog, brake
control, 16-step speed control programmable (2-step speed supports
flexible frequency command), wobble frequency control, fixed length
Featured
control, count function, three history faults, over excitation brake, over
functions
voltage stall protection, under voltage stall protection, restart on power
loss, skip frequency, frequency binding, four kinds of Accel/Decel time,
motor thermal protection, flexible fan control, process PID control, simple
PLC, multi-functional key programmable, droop control, autotuning,
field-weakening control, high-precision torque restraint, V/f separated
control
Protection
Refer to Chapter 7- Troubleshooting
functions
Indoors, no direct sunlight, free from dust, corrosive
Place of
gases, flammable gases, oil mist, water vapor, water drop
operation
or salt, etc.
0-2000m. De-rate 1% for every 100m when the altitude is
Altitude
above 1000 meters
Ambient -10℃-40℃. The rated output current should be derated
Environment
temperature 1% for every 1℃ when the ambient is 40℃-50℃
Relative
0~95%, no condensation
humidity
Vibration Less than 5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
Storage
-40℃~+70℃
temperature
Rated power
Efficiency at 7.5kW and below: ≥93%
rated Amps 11~ 45kW: ≥ 95%
Others 55kW and above: ≥98%
Installation Wall-mounted
IP grade IP20
Cooling
Forced air cooling
method

- 13 -
 Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

2.5 Parts Drawing

Base plate Base plate

底板 底板
Fan cover
风扇罩
Mounting
Mounting
安装孔 Fan 风扇罩
cover 安装孔
Dust防尘盖板
cover holes holes

Lower
下壳体 Lower
下壳体 casing
casing Control
操作面板
panel
操作面板
Nameplate
铭牌
Control 铭牌
panel Nameplate
Dust cover
防尘盖板

Cover
盖板 盖板
Cover

中壳体
Middle casing
Middle
中壳体 casing

a) GK620-4T22G/30LB and below b) GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H)

GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H)

Mounting
安装孔 风扇
Fan 安装孔
holes Mounting
风扇Fan
holes
Upper Upper
上盖板
cover 上盖板
cover
Control
托板
Control panel 机箱
Enclosure
托板
panel 机箱
Enclosure bracket
bracket 操作面板
Control
操作面板
Control panel
panel
铭牌
Nameplate
铭牌
Nameplate

Lower
下盖板 Lower
下盖板
cover cover

c) GK620-4T45G/55LD(H)~ d) GK620-4T75G/90L(B)
GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)

- 14 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

风扇 Mounting holes
Fan 安装孔

上盖板
Upper cover

Enclosure
机箱
托板
Panel bracket

操作面板
Control panel

Nameplate
铭牌

下盖板
Lower cover

e) GK620-4T90G/110L~ GK620-4T500G

Control托板
panel
bracket
Control 机柜
Cabinet
操作面板
panel

Front前门
door

底座
Cabinet
base

f) GK620-4T560G and GK620-4T630G

Fig. 2-3 Parts drawing

- 15 -
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

2.6 Appearance, Mounting Dimensions and Weight

a) GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB ~ GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB

b) GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB ~ GK620-4T22G/30LB

- 16 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

H1
H

W1 D
4-
d

c) GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H) ~ GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H)
H1
H2

4-
W1 d D

d) GK620-4T45G/55LD(H) ~ GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)

- 17 -
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

e) GK620-4T75G/90L(B)

f) GK620-4T90 ~ GK620-4T160G/185L

- 18 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

g) GK620-4T185G/200L ~ GK620-4T500G

- 19 -
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

h) GK620-4T560G ~ GK620-4T630G

Fig. 2-4 External dimensions

- 20 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Table 2-3 Appearance, mounting dimensions and weight

External and installation dimensions (mm)
Weight
Model Mounting
W H D W1 H1 H2 (kg)
hole dia.
GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB
GK620-4T1.5G/2.2LB
93 190 152 70 180 172 4.5 1.4
GK620-4T2.2G/3.7LB
GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB
GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB
120 245 169 80 233 220 5.5 2.9
GK620-4T7.5G/11LB
GK620-4T11G/15LB 145 280 179 105 268 255 5.5 3.9
GK620-4T15G/18.5LB
GK620-4T18.5G/22LB 190 365 187 120 353 335 6 6.2
GK620-4T22G/30LB
GK620-4T30G/37L(B)
250 400 235 230 380 / 6.8 13.1
GK620-4T37G/45L(B)
GK620-4T30G/37LD(H)
250 400 235 230 380 / 6.8 17.5
GK620-4T37G/45LD(H)
GK620-4T45G/55LD(H)
300 545 255 245 523 510 10 34
GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)
GK620-4T75G/90L(B) 385 670 261 260 640 600 12 37
GK620-4T90G/110L
395 785 291 260 750 705 12 50
GK620-4T110G/132L
GK620-4T132G/160L
440 900 356 300 865 820 14 66
GK620-4T160G/185L
GK620-4T185G/200L
GK620-4T200G/220L 500 990 368 360 950 900 14 88
GK620-4T220G/250L
GK620-4T250G/280L
650 1040 406 400 1000 950 14 123
GK620-4T280G/315L
GK620-4T315G/355L
GK620-4T355G/400L
GK620-4T400G/450L 815 1300 428 600 1252 1200 14 165
GK620-4T450G/500L
GK620-4T500G
GK620-4T560G
1100 2000 550 / / / / 515
GK620-4T630G

- 21 -
Chapter 2 Product Information GK620 User Manual

2.7 External Dimensions of Control Panel

Control panel model of GK620 series general purpose AC motor drive is KBU-BX1 whose
appearance and external dimensions are shown in Fig. 2-5.

Fig. 2-5 External dimensions of KBU-BX1

2.8 External Dimensions of Control Panel Bracket

A bracket should be provided to support the panel and a hole in the cabinet needs to be opened
when the control panel KBU-BX1 needs to be remotely used. Bracket model is KBU-DZ1
whose external dimensions are shown in Fig. 2-6 a). Fig. 2-6 b) shows applicable hole
dimensions in the cabinet.

Panel TH Hole WTH

1.2mm 73.2mm

1.5mm 74.4mm

2mm 75.5mm

a) External dimensions of KBU-DZ1 b) Hole dimensions in the cabinet

Fig. 2-6 External dimensions of KBU-DZ1 and cabinet hole dimensions

- 22 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.1 Installation Environment

1） Ambient temperature is in the range of -10℃ to 40℃.

2） Drive should be installed on surface of flame retardant object, with adequate surrounding
space for heat dissipation.
3） Installation should be performed where vibration is less than 5.9m/s2 (0.6g).
4） Protect from moisture and direct sunlight.
5） Protect the cooling fan by avoiding oil, dust and metal particles.
6） Do not expose to an atmosphere with flammable gases, corrosive gases, explosive gases
or other harmful gases.
7） Prevent drilling residues, wire ends and screws falling into drive.
8） Ventilation part of the drive should be installed outside from harsh environment (e.g. textile
facilities with fiber particles and chemical facilities filled with corrosive gases).

3.2 Minimum Mounting Clearances

To ensure favorable heat dissipation, mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface
as per Fig. 3.1. For installation inside cabinet, the product shall be mounted side by side to the
greatest extent while adequate surrounding space shall be preserved for favorable heat
dissipation.

空气流通位置
Vent clearance 100mm

Vent clearance
空气流通位置 100mm
30mm 30mm

Fig. 3-1 Minimum mounting clearances of GK620-4T22G/30LB and below

- 23 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

 ATTENTION:
Remove dust covers when mounting a drive GK620-4T22G/30LB or below. If several drives
are mounted in one cabinet, parallel side-by-side mounting is recommended.

空气流通位置
Vent clearance

B
Vent 空气流通位置
clearance

B
A A

Fig. 3-2 Minimum mounting clearances of GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H)~ 4T37G/45L(B/D/H)

Vent
空气 clearance
流通位置

Vent
空气 clearance
流通位置
B

A A

Fig. 3-3 Minimum mounting clearances of GK620-4T45G/55LD(H)~ GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)

- 24 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

 ATTENTION:
When mounting a drive GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H) or above, the minimum mounting
clearances as set forth in Table 3-1 should be assured. In case several drives are mounted
in one cabinet, parallel side-by-side mounting is recommended.

Table 3-1 Requirement of minimum mounting clearances

Mounting clearances (mm)

Drive model
A B

GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H) ~ GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H) ≥50 ≥200

GK620-4T45G/55LD(H) ~ GK620-4T500G ≥50 ≥300

3.3 Remove & Mount Control Panel and Cover

3.3.1 Remove and Mount Control Panel

 Remove control panel

Press the buckle of control panel as indicated by number "1" in Fig. 3-4, then pull the panel
out to release as indicated by "2".
 Mount control panel
Slightly slant the panel in the direction as indicated by number "1" in Fig. 3-5 and align it to
clamping port at lower part of panel bracket, then press it in as indicated by "2". When a
"click" sound heard, it indicates clamping has been properly made.

1 2
2

Fig. 3-4 Remove the control panel Fig. 3-5 Mount the control panel

3.3.2 Open & Mount the Covers of GK620-4T22G/30LB and below

 Remove the control panel
Use the remove method as stated in Section 3.3.1.

- 25 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

 Open the cover

Method 1: loosen the captive cover screws as shown in Fig. 3-6 a) (provided only for
15/18.5/22kW model), hold the left and front sides of middle housing with left hand, put the
right thumb into the buckle and press tightly on cover with the other four fingers, pull the
lower part of the cover out to release, as indicated by number "2".
Method 2: loosen the captive cover screws, as indicated by number "1" in Fig. 3-6 b)
(provided only for 15/18.5/22kW model), use a sizeable slotted screwdriver to push the
buckle slightly at the lower part of the cover to make buckle naturally off the groove, as
indicated by "2", pull the cover out to release, as indicated by number "3".

螺丝刀
Screwdriver
1 1

a) Method 1 b) Method 2

Fig. 3-6 Open the cover

 Mount the cover

On the completion of wiring, insert the buckle at higher part of the cover into the grooves at
middle housing as indicated by number "1" in Fig. 3-7, then push in the lower part of the
cover as indicated by "2". When a "click" sound heard, it indicates clamping has been
properly made. Tighten the screws (provided only for 15/18.5/22kW model) in buckle
grooves as finish.

Fig. 3-7 Mount the cover

- 26 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

 Mount the control panel

Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3.3.1.

 ATTENTION:
Be sure to remove the control panel before opening the cover and mount the cover before
mounting the control panel.

3.3.3 Open & Mount the Covers of GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H)~

GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H)
 Remove the control panel
Use the remove method as stated in Section 3.3.1.
 Open cover
Use a sizeable slotted screwdriver to push the buckle(on both sides) slightly at the lower
part of the cover to make buckle naturally off the groove, as indicated by "2" in Fig. 3-8, pull
the cover out to release, as indicated by number "3"..

Fig. 3-8 Open cover

 Mount cover
On the completion of wiring, insert the buckle at higher part of the cover into the grooves at
middle housing as indicated by number "1" in Fig. 3-9, then push in the lower part of the
cover as indicated by "2". When a "click" sound heard, it indicates clamping has been
properly made, as cover mounting finish.

Fig. 3-9 Mount cover

- 27 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

 Mount the control panel

Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3.3.1.

 ATTENTION:
Be sure to remove the control panel before opening the cover and mount the cover before
mounting the control panel.

3.3.4 Open & Mount the Covers of GK620-4T45G/55LD(H) and above

 Remove the control panel
Use the remove method as stated in Section 3.3.1.
 Open the lower cover
Loosen the two captive cover screws at lower part of the lower cover by using cross
screwdriver, as indicated by number "1" as shown in Fig. 3-10 (left), then pull the cover out
and up as indicated by number "2".
 Open the upper cover
Loosen the two captive cover screws at lower part of the lower cover by using cross
screwdriver, as indicated by number "3" and “4” as shown in Fig. 3-10 (right), then pull the
cover out and up as indicated by number "5".

4
4

3
5 3

1
2
1

Fig. 3-10 Open the lower and upper cover

- 28 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

 Mount the upper cover

Insert the upper part of the cover into mounting groove as shown in Fig. 3-11 (left), close
the upper cover, use cross screwdriver to tighten the four captive screws, as indicated by
number “1” and "2".
 Mount the lower cover
Insert the lower cover into upper cover in the direction as indicated by number 3 in Fig.
3-11 (right), close the lower cover and tighten the two captive screws, as indicated by
number "4".

2
2

1
1

4
4

Fig. 3-11 Mount the upper and lower covers

 Mount the control panel

Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3.3.1.

 ATTENTION:
Be sure to remove the control panel before opening the cover and mount the cover before
mounting the control panel.

- 29 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.4 Configuration of Peripheral Devices

3.4.1 Standard Configuration of Peripheral Devices

Power Supply

Circuit Breaker or RCD

Contactor

Input AC Reactor

Input Filter
DC Choke

AC Motor Drive

PE

Output Filter
Braking Resistor

Output AC Reactor

Motor
PE

Fig. 3-12 Standard configuration of peripheral devices

- 30 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.4.2 Instructions for Peripheral Devices

Table 3-2 Instructions for peripheral devices

Name Instructions
Power Input three-phase AC power supply should be in the range as specified in
supply this manual
Purpose: disconnect power supply and protect the equipment in case of
abnormal overcurrent occurs
Circuit Type selection: breaking current of circuit breaker is defined to be 1.5~2
breaker times the rated current of the drive
Breaking time characteristic of circuit breaker should be selected based on
overload protection time characteristic of the drive
Purpose: since the drive outputs PWM HF chopping voltage, HF leakage
RCD current is inevitable
Type selection: type B dedicated RCD is recommended
For safety's sake, do not frequently close and break the contactor since this
may bring about equipment faults
Contactor
Do not control the start & stop of the drive directly through switch on and off
the contactor since this will result in a reduction on the product life
Improve power factor
Reduce the impact of imbalanced three-phase input AC power supply on
Input AC
the system
reactor or
Suppress higher harmonics and reduce the conducted and radiated
DC choke
interference to peripheral devices
Restrict the impact of impulse current on rectifier bridges
Reduce conducted interference from power supply to the drive, improve the
immunity of the drive from noise
Input filter
Reduce conducted and radiated interference of the drive to peripheral
devices
Brake unit Purpose: consume motor feedback energy to attain quick brake
and Type selection: Contact GTAKE technical personnel for type selection of
braking brake unit. Refer to type selection of braking resistor in Table 3-3 Type
resistor Selection of Peripheral Devices.
Reduce conducted and radiated interference of the drive to peripheral
Output filter
devices
Avoid the motor insulation damage result from harmonic voltage
Output AC Reduce frequent protection from the drive caused by leakage current
reactor In case the cable connecting drive and motor is over 100 meters, output AC
reactor recommended
Motor Should match the drive

- 31 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.4.3 Selection of Peripheral Devices

Table 3-3 Selection of peripheral devices

■GK620-4TG/L, Three phase 400V input

Circuit Brake resistor /Brake chopper*

Contactor
Drive model breaker
(A) Power (W) Resistance (Ω)
(A)
0.75G 10 9
GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB 150 ≥135
1.5L 10 9
1.5G 10 9
GK620-4T1.5G/2.2LB 300 ≥135
2.2L 10 9
2.2G 10 9
GK620-4T2.2G/3.7LB 400 ≥100
3.7L 16 12
3.7G 16 12
GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB 500 ≥67
5.5L 20 18
5.5G 20 18
GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB 550 ≥67
7.5L 32 25
7.5G 32 25
GK620-4T7.5G/11LB 550 ≥67
11L 40 32
11G 40 32
GK620-4T11G/15LB 800 ≥40
15L 50 40
15G 50 40
GK620-4T15G/18.5LB 1100 ≥23
18.5L 63 50
18.5G 63 50
GK620-4T18.5G/22LB 1300 ≥20
22L 63 50
22G 63 50
GK620-4T22G/30LB 1500 ≥20
30L 100 65
30G 100 65
GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H) 2500 ≥12
37L 100 80
37G 100 80
GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H) 2800 ≥12
45L 125 95
45G 125 95
GK620-4T45G/55LD(H) 3000 ≥10
55L 160 150
55G 160 150
GK620-4T55G/75LD(H) 3600 ≥10
75L 225 185
55G 160 150
GK620-4T55G/75L(B) 3600 ≥8
75L 225 185
75G 225 185
GK620-4T75G/90L(B) 5000 ≥5
90L 250 225

- 32 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

90G 250 225

GK620-4T90G/110L
110L 315 265
110G 315 265
GK620-4T110G/132L
132L 350 330
132G 350 330
GK620-4T132G/160L
160L 400 330
160G 400 330
GK620-4T160G/185L
185L 500 400
185G 500 400
GK620-4T185G/200L
200L 500 400
200G 500 400
GK620-4T200G/220L
220L 630 500
220G 630 500
GK620-4T220G/250L Brake chopper should be
250L 630 500
250G 630 500 externally mounted when
GK620-4T250G/280L
280L 800 630
needed
280G 800 630
GK620-4T280G/315L
315L 800 630
315G 800 630
GK620-4T315G/355L
355L 1000 800
355G 1000 800
GK620-4T355G/400L
400L 1250 800
400G 1250 800
GK620-4T400G/450L
450L 1250 1000
450G 1250 1000
GK620-4T450G/500L
500L 1600 1000
GK620-4T500G 1600 1000
GK620-4T560G 1600 1250
GK620-4T630G 2000 1600

* When brake chopper is built in, the power and resistance value of brake resistor should meet the requirement as
stated in the table. When brake chopper is mounted externally, the power and resistance value of brake resistor
should be in accordance with brake chopper.

** On the premise of fulfilling brake requirement, brake resistance value might be bigger than the minimum value as
stated in the table. Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive. Brake resistors are not built in and need
to be sourced additionally.

- 33 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.5 Terminal Configuration

Control
控制回路端子 circuit terminals

Main circuit
主回路端子 terminals

Grounding
接地端子 terminals

Fig. 3-13 Terminal configuration

3.6 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring

WARNING
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to implement wiring.
Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or personnel injury even death.
 Wiring should be in strict accordance with this manual, otherwise hazard of electric
shock or equipment damage exists.
 Make sure input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring
operation. Failure to comply will result in personnel injury even death.
 All wiring operations and lines should comply with EMC and national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The conductor diameter should be in
accordance with recommendations of this manual. Otherwise, hazard of equipment
damage, fire, and/or personnel injury exists.
 Since leakage current of the drive may exceed 3.5mA, for safety's sake, the drive and
the motor must be grounded so as to avoid hazard of electric shock.
 Be sure to perform wiring in strict accordance with the drive terminal marks. Never
connect three-phase power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3. Failure to
comply will result in equipment damage.
 Only mount braking resistors at terminals + ( + 1) and B2 (BR) when needed. Failure to
comply will result in equipment damage.
 Wiring screws and bolts for main circuit terminals must be screwed tightly. Failure to
comply may result in faults and/or equipment damage.

- 34 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

ATTENTION

 Signal wires should be away from main power lines to the best of possibility. In the
event that this cannot be ensured, vertical cross arrangement should be adopted,
reducing EMI interference to the signal wires as much as possible.
 In case the motor cable exceeds 100m, an appropriate output reactor should be
mounted.

3.6.1 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB~GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

Single / Three-phase AC input terminals (Connect L1/L, L3/N
L1/L、L2、L3/N
when use single phase input)
+ /B1、B2 Braking resistor connection terminals when brake unit is inbuilt
+ /B1、 - DC input terminals
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals
Ground terminal PE

3.6.2 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB~GK620-4T22G/30LB

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals

, B2 Braking resistor connection terminals when brake unit is inbuilt*

, DC power supply input terminals**

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals

Ground terminal PE

* For GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB and GK620-4T7.5G/11LB terminal is deleted, brake resistor connection terminals
are + 2 and B2.
** For GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB and GK620-4T7.5G/11LB, DC power supply input terminals are + 2 and - .

- 35 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.6.3 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H)~

GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H)

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals

BR, + Braking resistor connection terminals when brake unit is inbuilt*
+, - DC power supply input terminals

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals

Ground terminal PE

* For 30kW～37kW drives without “B” or “H” in the model number, there is no built-in brake unit as factory default,

brake resistor connected between BR and + terminals is invalid.

3.6.4 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T45G/55LD(H)~GK620-4T55G/75LD(H)

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals

BR, + Braking resistor connection terminals when brake unit is inbuilt*
+, - DC power supply input terminals

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals

Ground terminal PE

* For 45kW～55kW drives without “H” in the model number, there is no built-in brake unit as factory default, brake

resistor connected between BR and + terminals is invalid.

- 36 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.6.5 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T75G/90L(B)

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

R/L1、S/L2、T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals
DC reactor connection terminals. Connected with a jumper as
+ 1、+ 2/B1
factory default *
+ 2/B1、B2 Braking resistor connection terminals when brake unit is inbuilt*
+ 2/B1、 - DC input terminals of external- mounted brake unit
+ 1、 - DC power supply input terminals
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals
Ground terminal PE

* For 75kW drives without “B” in the model number, there is no built-in brake unit as factory default, brake resistor
connected between B1 and B2 terminals is invalid.

3.6.6 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T90G/110L ~ GK620-4T500G

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminal

R/L1、S/L2、T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals

, DC reactor connection terminals *

, DC input terminals of external- mounted brake unit

, DC power supply input terminals

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals
Ground terminal PE

* GK620-4T90G/110L~GK620-4T500G have external-mounted DC reactor in shipment as default. Be sure to connect

the DC reactor between terminals and , or there will be no display when applying power on the drives.

- 37 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.6.7 Main Circuit Terminals of GK620-4T560G ~ GK620-4T630G

Terminals are copper bar for GK620-4T560G ~ GK620-4T630G as following:

Terminal marks Designation and function of terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Three-phase AC input terminals

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Three-phase AC output terminals

Ground terminal PE

- 38 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.6.8 Terminal Screw and Wiring Requirement

Table 3-4 Terminal screw and wiring requirement

■GK620-4TG/L Three-phase 400V input
Power terminal Ground terminal
Drive model Cable Torque Cable Torque
Screw Screw
(mm2) (kgf.cm) (mm2) (kgf.cm)
0.75G 2.5 2.5
GK620-4T0.75G/1.5LB M3.5 10±0.5 M3.5 10±0.5
1.5L 2.5 2.5
1.5G 2.5 2.5
GK620-4T1.5G/2.2LB M3.5 10±0.5 M3.5 10±0.5
2.2L 2.5 2.5
2.2G 2.5 M3. 2.5
GK620-4T2.2G/3.7LB 10±0.5 M3.5 10±0.5
3.7L 2.5 5 2.5
3.7G 2.5 M3. 2.5
GK620-4T3.7G/5.5LB 10±0.5 M3.5 10±0.5
5.5L 2.5 5 2.5
5.5G 2.5 2.5
GK620-4T5.5G/7.5LB M4 14±0.5 M4 14±0.5
7.5L 4 4
7.5G 4 4
GK620-4T7.5G/11LB M4 14±0.5 M4 14±0.5
11L 4 4
11G 4 4
GK620-4T11G/15LB M4 14±0.5 M4 14±0.5
15L 6 6
15G 6 6
GK620-4T15G/18.5LB M5 28±0.5 M4 14±0.5
18.5L 10 10
18.5G 10 10
GK620-4T18.5G/22LB M5 28±0.5 M4 14±0.5
22L 10 10
22G 10 10
GK620-4T22G/30LB M5 28±0.5 M4 14±0.5
30L 16 16
30G 16 16
GK620-4T30G/37L(B/D/H) M6 48±0.5 M6 48±0.5
37L 25 16
37G 25 16
GK620-4T37G/45L(B/D/H) M6 48±0.5 M6 48±0.5
45L 35 16
45G 35 16
GK620-4T45G/55LD(H) M8 120±0.5 M8 120±0.5
55L 50 25
55G 50 25
GK620-4T55G/75LD(H) M8 120±0.5 M8 120±0.5
75L 70 35
75G 70 35
GK620-4T75G/90L(B) M10 250±0.5 M8 120±0.5
90L 95 50

- 39 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

Power terminal Ground terminal

Drive model Cable Torque Cable Torque
Screw Screw
(mm2) (kgf.cm) (mm2) (kgf.cm)
90G 95 50
GK620-4T90G/110L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
110L 120 70
110G 120 70
GK620-4T110G/132L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
132L 120 70
132G 120 70
GK620-4T132G/160L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
160L 150 95
160G 150 95
GK620-4T160G/185L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
185L 185 95
185G 185 95
GK620-4T185G/200L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
200L 185 95
200G 185 95
GK620-4T200G/220L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
220L 240 120
220G 240 120
GK620-4T220G/250L M12 440±0.5 M12 440±0.5
250L 120x2 120
250G 120x2 120
GK620-4T250G/280L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
280L 120x2 120
280G 120x2 120
GK620-4T280G/315L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
315L 150x2 150
315G 150x2 150
GK620-4T315G/355L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
355L 185x2 95x2
355G 185x2 95x2
GK620-4T355G/400L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
400L 240x2 120x2
400G 240x2 120x2
GK620-4T400G/450L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
450L 240x2 120x2
450G 240x2 120x2
GK620-4T450G/500L M16 690±0.5 M16 690±0.5
500L 240x2 120x2
GK620-4T500G 240x2 M16 690±0.5 120x2 M16 690±0.5
GK620-4T560G 300x2 M16 690±0.5 150x2 M16 690±0.5
GK620-4T630G 300x2 M16 690±0.5 150x2 M16 690±0.5

- 40 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.7 Control Terminal Wiring

WARNING
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to implement wiring.
Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or personnel injury even death.
 Wiring should be in strict accordance with this manual, otherwise hazard of electric
shock or equipment damage exists.
 Make sure input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring
operation. Failure to comply will result in personnel injury even death.
 All wiring operations and lines should comply with EMC and national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The conductor diameter should be in
accordance with recommendations of this manual. Otherwise, hazard of equipment
damage, fire, and/or personnel injury exists.
 Screws or bolts for terminal wiring must be screwed tightly.
 AC 220V signal is prohibited from connecting to terminals other than control terminals
RA, RB and RC.

ATTENTION
 Signal wires should be away from main power lines to the best of possibility. If this
cannot be ensured, vertical cross arrangement should be adopted, reducing EMI
interference to the signal wires as much as possible.
 The encoder must be provided with shielded cables whose shielded layer must be
properly grounded.

- 41 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.7.1 Control Board Diagram

Control panel 485

操作面板interface
485接口 扩展卡接口
Option board interface

Main主信号接口
signal
interface

端 模 模
S1:
子 Terminal
拟 拟 resistor selection for terminal communication
通 量 量
输 输 input 1 voltage/current option
讯 Analog
S2:
终 入 出
端 1 1
S3:
电 Analog
电 电 output 1 voltage/current option
阻 压 压
选 电 电
择 流 流
选 选
择 择

S1 S2 S3
485 AI1 AO1
ON I I

OFF V V

User signal
用户信号端子
terminal

Fig. 3-14 Control board diagram

- 42 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.7.2 Wiring Diagram

Braking
DC Reactor Resistor

Circuit
Braker Contactor
+ 1Jumper + 2/B1 B2 -
R/L1 U/T1
AC Power Supply
50/60Hz S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

Power Motor
Supply Ground
Ground

+24V
Jumper
PLC
COM
Digital In 1
X1
Digital In 2
X2
Digital In 3
X3 CN2
Digital In 4
X4 Option Board Interface
Digital In 5
X5
Digital In 6
X6/DI (Compatible for Pulse In)

485+ 485 MODBUS

485- 485 Communication
MODBUS
GND Communication
Analog In +10V Analog In Reference
AI1 Voltage
DC: 0~10V/0~20mA POT
GND

RA Relay Output
RB 250V AC/3A
Analog In RC 30V DC/3A
AI2
DC:-10V~10V
GND

+24V Open Collector Output 1

Y1
Analog Out
AO1 Open Collector Output 2
DC:0~10V/0~20mA
GND Y2/DO High-speed Pulse Output
COM

Paired Shielded
Cable Cable

Fig. 3-15 Wiring diagram

- 43 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.8 Control Terminal Specification

Table 3-5 Control terminal specification

Category Terminal Terminal Specification
designation
10.3V ±3%
Analog input
+10V reference Maximum output current 25mA
voltage The resistance of external potentiometer
should be larger than 400Ω
GND Analog ground Isolated from COM interiorly
0~20mA: input impedance - 500Ω, maximum
Analog
input current - 25mA
input
0~10V: input impedance - 22kΩ,
AI1 Analog input 1
maximum input voltage - 12.5V
Switch S2 on control board for jumping from
0~20mA and 0~10V, factory default: 0~10V
-10V~10V: input impedance - 25kΩ
AI2 Analog input 2
Range: -12.5V~+ 12.5V
0~20mA: impedance - 200Ω~500Ω
0~10V: impedance ≥ 10k
Analog AO1 Analog output 1 Switch S3 on control board for jumping
output between 0~20mA and 0~10V, factory default:
0~10V
GND Analog ground Isolated from COM interiorly
24V±10%, Isolated from GND interiorly
+24V +24V
Maximum load - 200mA
Used for switching between high and low
Digital input levels, short-circuited with +24V when
PLC Common delivery, i.e. low value of digital input valid
terminal
External power input
Digital COM +24V ground Isolated from GND interiorly
input
Input: 24VDC, 5mA
Digital input
X1~X5 Range of frequency: 0~200Hz
Terminals 1~5
Range of voltage: 10V~30V
Digital input: same as X1~X5
Digital
X6/DI Pulse input: 0.1Hz~50kHz; range of voltage:
input/pulse input
10-30V
Digital Open collector Range of voltage: 0~24V
Y1
output output Range of current: 0~50mA

- 44 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Category Terminal Terminal Specification

designation
Digital Open collector Open collector output: same as Y1
Y2/DO
output out / Pulse out Pulse output: 0~50kHz;
Relay Control board RA-RB: NC; RA-RC: NO
RA/RB/RC
output relay output Contact capacity: 250VAC/3A, 30VDC/3A
485 differential Rate:
485+
signal + 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps
Terminal 485 differential Maximum distance - 500m (standard network
485−
485 signal - cable used)
Interface 485
GND communication Isolated from COM interiorly
shield grounding
Control
Maximum communication distance is 15m
panel CN4 Control panel
when connected to Control panel
485 (CN12) 485 interface
Use standard network cable
interface

3.9 Control Terminal Usage

3.9.1 Lay-out of Control Terminals

Fig. 3-16 Lay-out of control terminals

3.9.2 Control Terminal Screw and Wiring Requirement

Table 3-6 Terminal screw and wiring specification

Cable type Cable requirement (mm2) Screw Torque (kgf.cm)

Shielded cable 1.0 M3 5±0.5

3.9.3 Instructions of Analog Input/Output Terminals

Being particularly vulnerable to noise, analog input & output signal cables should be as short as
possible, shielded, and their shielded layers should be properly grounded close to the side of
drive. The cables should not exceed 20m.

- 45 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

Control cables shall be kept no less than 20cm away from main circuit and strong current lines
(e.g. power lines, motor lines, relay lines and contactor lines) and should not be arranged in
parallel with strong current lines. In case it is inevitable to intersect strong current line, vertical
wiring is recommended to avoid drive faults as a result of noise.

Where analog input & output signals are severely interfered, the side of analog signal source
should be provided with filter capacitor or ferrite core.

3.9.4 Instructions of Digital Input/Output Terminals

Digital input & output signal cables should be as short as possible, shielded, and their shielded
layers should be properly grounded close to the side of drive. The cables should not exceed
20m. When active drive is selected, take necessary filtering measures against power crosstalk,
for which dry contact control is recommended.

Control cables shall be kept no less than 20cm away from main circuit and strong current lines
(e.g. power lines, motor lines, relay lines and contactor lines) and should not be arranged in
parallel with strong current lines. In case it is inevitable to intersect strong current line, vertical
wiring is recommended to avoid drive faults as a result of noise. Operating instructions for
switching value input terminal

 Instructions of digital input terminal

 Dry contact
24V
+24V
External Drive +3.3V
Controller Jumper
PLC
COM - +
OC
1 X1

GND
+3.3V

- +
OC
6 X6/DI

GND

Shielded
Cable
Near-end
Ground

Fig. 3-17 Internal power supply dry contact

- 46 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Fig. 3-18 External power supply dry contact

 ATTENTION:
 When external power supply is used, the jumper between +24V and PLC must be removed.
Otherwise, it may result in equipment damage.
 The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20~30V. Otherwise, normal
operation could not be assured and/or result in equipment damage.

- 47 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

 Open collector NPN connection

Fig. 3-19 Internal power supply open collector NPN connection

Fig. 3-20 External power supply open collector NPN connection

 ATTENTION:
When external power supply is used, the jumper between +24V and PLC must be removed.
The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20~30V, otherwise normal
operation could not be assured and/or hazard of equipment damage exists.

- 48 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

 Open collector PNP connection

External 24V
Controller +24V
Drive +3.3V
PLC
Jumper

COM - +
OC
1 X1

GND
+3.3V

- +
OC
6 X6/DI

GND

Shielded
Cable
Near-end
Ground

Fig. 3-21 Internal power supply open collector PNP connection

 ATTENTION:
When PNP connection is adopted, it is necessary to remove the jumper between +24V and
PLC, and connect the jumper to PLC and COM.

Fig. 3-22 External power supply open collector PNP connection

 ATTENTION:
When external power supply is used, the jumper between +24V and PLC must be removed.
The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20~30V. Otherwise, normal
operation could not be assured and/or hazard of equipment damage exists.

- 49 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

 Instructions of digital output terminal

 Instructions of Y1 and Y2/DO output terminals

24V 24V
+24V +24V

+5V +5V
Y1、Y2/DO Y1、Y2/DO
=30V
OC Pull-up OC Pull-up
Resistor Resistor

COM COM
Drive Drive

a) Internal power supply b) External power supply

Fig. 3-23 Wiring when Y1 and Y2/DO output with pull-up resistor

 ATTENTION:
When set to be pulse output, Y2/DO terminal shall output 0~50kHz pulse signal.

24V 24V
+24V +24V

+5V +5V
Y1、Y2/DO Y1、Y2/DO
=30V
OC Relay OC Relay

COM COM
Drive Drive

a) Internal power supply b) External power supply

Fig. 3-24 Wiring when Y1 and Y2/DO drive relay

 ATTENTION:
When relay coil voltage is lower than 24V, a resistor as voltage divider should be mounted
between relay and output terminal, based on coil impedance.
 Wiring instruction of relay output terminal
Control board of GK620 series drive is provided with a group of programmable relay dry
contact outputs. RA/RB/RC are relay contacts. RA and RB are normally closed, while RA
and RC are normally open. See parameter C1-02 for details.

 ATTENTION:
In case inductive load (e.g. electromagnetic relay or contactor) is to be driven, a surge
voltage absorbing circuit such as RC absorbing circuit (note that its leakage current shall be
less than holding current of controlled contactor or relay), piezoresistor or fly-wheel diode
etc. shall be mounted (be sure to pay close attention to polarity in case of DC
electromagnetic circuit). Absorbing devices should be mounted close to the ends of relay or
contactor.

- 50 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.9.5 Instructions of RS485 Communication Terminals

It is recommended to apply chain connection as Fig. 3-25 (“one-to-many” star connection

cannot be applied) between RS485 communication nodes of the drive and host computer etc.
Try to lay 485 communication cables away from power cables and machine cabinets.
There should be at least three cables as RS485 communication bus: two paired cables which
can effectively resist outside noise interference is used to connect 485 signal terminal; the third
cable (also called equipotential cable) is used to connect power supply reference of
communication circuit of each 485 node, thus to prevent communication circuit of each node
from being damaged due to big difference of reference potential. To ensure communication bus
away from noise current loop, equipotential cable cannot be connected to ground or machine
cabinet.
For normal industrial application, generally paired shielded cables are selected as 485
communication bus; the shielded layer can work as equipotential cable, and shall be kept as
intact as possible during cable layout. Multi-cored paired cables (e.g. Ethernet cable) can also
be selected to connect each 485 node; select one pair of paired cables to connect 485 signal
terminals, and wrest other cables together as equipotential connection. For handmade paired
cables, the conducting section area of wire shall be≥0.2mm2, twisted space shall be≤15mm,
conducting section area of equipotential wire shall be ≥1mm2, and be closely laid to paired
cable.

Cable
shielded
Master control board/ layer shall
be used for Try to use
e-potential Control board of drive 1 Control board of drive 2
connection, paired cable
Host computer/PLC
and can’t be for 485
connected
to grid terminals
ground or
cabinet

Fig. 3-25 Wiring diagram of RS485 communication terminal

There may be no lead-out terminals of communication power supply reference for some 485
nodes, then try to find reference ground of 485 communication circuit on board related to the
node, lead out wire for equipotential connection (simply connecting them to ground or other
irrelevant terminals is not allowed). If reference ground of 485 communication circuit cannot be
found, then hang equipotential wire of the node in air, meanwhile connect ground of the 485
node and ground of neighbor 485 node with other grounding wire.
Connect a terminal resistor on end node of 485 communication bus according to requirement.
On one aspect, if high-frequency characteristic impedance determined by paired cable
structure is close to the terminal resistor value, communication signal quality will be promoted
by connecting a terminal resistor; on another aspect, communication loop load will be
increased, and voltage amplitude of signal will be decreased if a terminal resistor is connected.

- 51 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.10 Instruction of Signal Switches

S1 S2 S3
485 AI1 AO1
ON I I

OFF V V

Fig. 3-26 Jumper diagram of signal switching

Default
Designation Function
setting

Selection of 485 termination resistor; ON :100Ω termination

S1 OFF
resistor provided; OFF: no termination resistor
Type Selection of AI1 analog signal:
S2 V: 0~10V
I: current input (0~20mA); V: voltage input (0~10V)
Type Selection of AO1 analog signal:
S3 V: 0~10V
I: current output (0~20mA); V: voltage output (0~10V)

3.11 EMI Solutions

Due to its working principle, the drive will inevitably produce certain noise that may influence
and disturb other equipment. Moreover, since the internal weak electric signal of drive is also
susceptible to the interference of drive itself and other equipment, EMI problems shall be
inevitable. In order to reduce or avoid the interference of drive to external environment and
protect drive against interference from external environment, this section makes a brief
description of noise abatement, ground handling, leakage current suppression and the
application of power line filters.

3.11.1 Noise Abatement

When peripheral equipment and drive share the power supply of one system, noise from the
drive may be transmitted to other equipment in this system via power lines and result in
misoperation and/or faults. In such a case, the following measures could be taken:
 Mount input noise filter at input terminal of the drive;
 Mount power supply filter at power input terminal of affected equipment;
 Use isolation transformer to isolate the noise transmission path between other equipment
and the drive.

As the wiring of peripheral equipment and the drive constitutes a circuit, the unavoidable
earthing leakage current of the drive will cause equipment misoperation and/or faults.
Disconnect the grounding connection of equipment may avoid this misoperation and/or faults

- 52 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

Sensitive equipment and signal lines shall be mounted as far away from the drive as possible.
Signal lines should be provided with shielded layer and reliably grounded. Alternatively, signal
cable could be put into metallic conduits between which the distance shall be no less than
20cm, and shall be kept as far away from the drive, its peripheral devices, and cables as
possible. Never make signal lines in parallel with power lines or bundle them up.

Signal lines must orthogonally cross power lines if this cross is inevitable. Motor cables shall be
placed in thick protective screen like more than 2mm-thick pipelines or buried in cement groove,
also, power lines can be put into metallic conduit and grounded well with shielded cables.

Use 4-core motor cables of which one is grounded at close side of the drive and the other side
is connected to motor enclosure.

Input and output terminals of the drive are respectively equipped with radio noise filter and
linear noise filter. For example, ferrite common mode choke can restrain radiation noise of
power lines.

3.11.2 Grounding

Recommended ground electrode is shown in the figure below:

Drive Motor

Fig. 3-27 Grounding

Use to the fullest extent the maximum standard size of grounding cables to reduce the impedance
of grounding system.

Grounding wires should be as short as possible. Grounding point shall be as close to the drive as
possible.

One wire of 4-core motor cables shall be grounded at the drive side and connected to grounding
terminal of motor at the other side. Better effect will be achieved if motor and drive are provided
with dedicated ground electrodes.

When grounding terminals of various parts of system are linked together, leakage current turns
into a noise source that may influence other equipment in the system, thus, grounding terminals of
the drive and other vulnerable equipment should be separated. Grounding cable shall be kept
away from inlet & output of noise-sensitive equipment.

- 53 -
Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK620 User Manual

3.11.3 Leakage Current Suppression

Leakage current passes through the line-to-line and ground distributed capacitors at input &
output sides of drive, and its size is associated with the capacitance of distributed capacitor and
the switching frequency. Leakage current is classified into ground leakage current and
line-to-line leakage current.

Ground leakage current not only circulates inside drive system, but may also influence other
equipment via ground loop. Such a leakage current may result in malfunction of RCD and other
equipment. The higher the switching frequency of drive is, the bigger the ground leakage current
will be. The longer the motor cables and the bigger the parasitic capacitance are, the bigger the
ground leakage current will be. Therefore, the most immediate and effective method for
suppression of ground leakage current is to reduce the switching frequency and minimize the
length of motor cables.

The higher harmonics of line-to-line leakage current that passes through between cables at output
side of drive will accelerate the aging of cables and may bring about malfunction of other
equipment. The higher the switching frequency of drive is, the bigger the line-to-line leakage
current will be. The longer the motor cables and the bigger the parasitic capacitance are, the
bigger the line-to-line leakage current will be. Therefore, the most immediate and effective method
for suppression of ground leakage current is to reduce the switching frequency and minimize the
length of motor cable. Line-to-line leakage current can also be effectively suppressed by mounting
additional output reactors.

3.11.4 Use of Power Supply Filter

Since AC drives may generate strong interference and are also sensitive to outside
interference, power supply filters are recommended. Pay close attention to the following
instructions during the use:
 Enclosure of the filter needs to be reliably grounded;
 Input lines of the filter shall be kept as far away from output lines as possible so as to avoid
mutual coupling;
 Filter shall be as close to the drive side as possible;
 Filter and drive must be connected to the same common ground.

- 54 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions

Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions

4.1 Operation of Control Panel

As a human-machine interface, control panel is the main part for the drive to receive command
and display parameters.

Fig. 4-1 Control panel

4.1.1 Key Functions on Control Panel

On the control panel there are 8 keys whose functions are as shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Key functions on control panel

Symbol Key name Meaning

1) Parameter edition enter
Enter key 2) Confirmation of parameter settings
3) Confirmation of MF key function
1) Return function
Escape key
2) Invalid parameter edit value
1) Increase of selected bit of parameter value
Increase key 2) Increase of selected bit of parameter value
3) Increase of set frequency
1) Decrease of selected bit of parameter
Decrease key 2) Decrease of selected bit of parameter value
3) Decrease of set frequency
1) Selection of parameter bit
2) Selection of parameter value bit
Shift key
3) Selection of stop/run status display parameter value
4) Fault status switches to parameter value display status
Run key Run

- 55 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Symbol Key name Meaning

1) Stop
Stop/reset key
2) Fault reset
Multi-function
See Table 4-2 " MF key function definition"
key

Table 4-2 MF key function definition

L0-00 set Function of MF key Meaning
value
0 Disabled MF key disabled
1 Forward JOG Forward JOG function
2 Reverse JOG Reverse JOG function
Forward/Reverse Running direction forward and reverse switching
3
switch
Emergency
4 Press to STOP, with ramp-down time b2-09
STOP 1
Emergency Coast to stop, the drive cuts off output
5
STOP 2
Run command Control panel control -> Terminal control ->
6 setting mode Communication control -> Control panel control, press
switch to confirm within 5 seconds

- 56 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

4.1.2 Control Panel Indicators

Control panel is furnished with 7 indicators whose descriptions are as below

Table 4-3 Description of indicators

Indicator Designation Meaning

ON: currently displayed parameter value is
running frequency or the current parameter unit is
Hz Frequency indicator frequency
Flash: currently displayed parameter value is set
frequency
A Current indicator ON: currently displayed parameter value is current
V Voltage indicator ON: currently displayed parameter value is voltage
ON: currently displayed parameter value is
running speed
Hz+A Running speed indicator
Flash: currently displayed parameter value is
setting speed
ON: currently displayed parameter value is a
A+V Percentage indicator
percentage value
All OFF No unit No unit
ON: Control panel
Run command setting
MON OFF: Terminal
mode indicator
Flash: Communication
ON: Run
RUN Run status indicator OFF: Stop
Flash: Stopping
ON: If the drive in stop status, forward command
enabled. If the drive in run status, the drive is
FWD Forward indicator
running forward
Flash: Forward is being transferred to reverse
ON: If the drive in stop status, reverse command
enabled. If the drive in run status, the drive is
REV Reverse indicator
running reversely.
Flash: Reverse is being transferred to forward

4.1.3 Control Panel Display Status

Control panel indicates eight types of status, STOP parameters display, Run parameters
display, Fault display, parameter number edition, parameter setting, Password authentication,
Direct frequency modification and Prompt message. The operation relating to these statuses
and the switching among these statuses is described as follows.

- 57 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4.1.3.1 Display of STOP Parameters

The drive normally gets into STOP parameters display once run has been stopped. By default,
set frequency is displayed in such a status, and other parameters can be displayed through
setting of L1-02 parameters and the key. For example, when users need to check set
frequency as well as the values of bus voltage and AI1 value in stop status, set L1-02=0013
(refer to setting method of parameters) and press the key to display the value of bus
voltage and then press again to display the value of AI1.

Fig. 4-2 Stop parameter display status (Displaying setting frequency – 50.00Hz)

Run status will be enabled immediately upon receipt of run command in stop status. Press
to get into parameter edit status (get into password authentication status if parameter
under password protection). Directly get into frequency modification status when receive
UP/DOWN command from terminal, or and pressing on control panel. Switch
to fault display status once a fault occurs or an alarm is given.

4.1.3.2 Run Parameter Display Status

In case there is no fault, the drive will get into run parameters display status upon receipt of run
command. Default display is run frequency, and other parameters can be displayed through
setting of L1-00 and L1-01 and press to shift. For example, in run status, when users
need to check bus voltage, motor speed, and input terminals status, please set L1-00= 0084
and L1-01= 0004, and press to shift to the display of bus voltage, then press
again to display motor speed, and then press to display input terminals state value.

- 58 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Fig. 4-3 Run parameter display status (Displaying run frequency – 50.00Hz)

Stop status will be enabled immediately upon receipt of stop command in such a status. Press
to get into parameter edit status (get into password authentication status if parameter
under password protection). Directly get into frequency modification status when receiving
UP/DOWN command from terminal, or pressing or . Switch to fault alarm display
status once a fault occurs or an alarm is given.

4.1.3.3 Fault Alarm Display Status

In case a fault occurs or an alarm is given, the drive will get into fault or alarm display status.

Fig. 4-4 Fault or alarm display status (CCL: Contactor act fault)

In such a status, the drive gets into stop status upon receipt of pressing , and would get
into parameter edit status when receiving pressing command again (if parameter is
under password protection, the drive would get into password authentication status). Directly
get into frequency modification status when receiving UP/DOWN command from terminal, or
pressing or .

- 59 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4.1.3.4 Parameter Edit Status

Enter parameter edit status immediately upon pressing in STOP status, run parameters
display status, and direct frequency modification status. This status could also be entered upon
receipt of consecutive twice pressing in fault display status. The drive shall quit current
status and be previous status upon receipt of pressing .

Fig. 4-5 Parameter edit status

4.1.3.5 Parameter Value Setting Status

Enter parameter value setting status upon receipt of pressing when in parameter value
edit status. When pressing or command is received in such a state, escape
parameter edit status.

Fig. 4-6 Parameter value setting status (b0-02 is set to 49.83Hz)

- 60 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

4.1.3.6 Password Authentication Status

On condition that parameters are under password protection, users would have to go through
password authentication when they want to modify function code parameter value. Only A0-00
is visible in such a state.

Under password protection, the password authentication status will be first entered upon the receipt
of pressing in STOP parameter display status, run parameter display status, or direct
frequency modification status (refer to the setting method of parameters). It will enter parameter edit
status upon the completion of password authentication.

4.1.3.7 Direct Frequency Modification Status

In the status of STOP, fault or run, the drive will enter frequency modification status when
terminal UP/DOWN is enabled, or pressing or .

Fig. 4-7 Direct frequency modification status

- 61 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4.1.3.8 Prompt Message Status

Prompt message status shall be displayed upon the completion of some operations. For
instance, the "bASIC" prompt message would be displayed upon the completion of parameter
initialization.

Fig. 4-8 Prompt message status

Prompt message characters and their meanings are shown as specified in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Prompt characters

Prompt Meaning Prompt Meaning

symbol symbol
bASIC When A0-01 is set to 0 CPyb1 Backup parameter value
Parameter upload to
dISP1 When A0-01 is set to 1 LoAd
control panel
Parameter download from
USEr When A0-01 is set to 2 dnLd1 control panel (motor
parameter excluded)
Parameter download from
ndFLt When A0-01 is set to 3 dnLd2 control panel (motor
parameter included)
LoC-1 Control panel locked 1 (full locked) P-SEt Password has been set
Control panel locked 2
LoC-2 (all locked except RUN, P-CLr Password cleared
STOP/RESET)
Control panel locked 3 Motor parameter
LoC-3 TUNE
(all locked except STOP/RESET) identification in process

- 62 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Control panel locked 4

LoC-4 LoU Drive undervoltage
(all locked except shift )
PrtCt Control panel protection CLr-F Clear fault record
Restore to factory default
UnLoC Control panel lock cleared dEFt1 parameters (motor
parameter excluded)
Restore to factory default
Read the backup parameter value to
rECy1 dEFt2 parameters (motor
parameter
parameter included)

Table 4-5 shows meanings of the characters displayed on control panel.

Table 4-5 Meanings of displayed characters

Displayed Character Displayed Character Displayed Character Displayed Character

character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning

0 A I T

1 b J t

2 C L U

3 c N v

4 d n y

5 E o -

6 F P 8．

7 G q ．

8 H r

9 h S

- 63 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4.1.4 Setting Method of Parameters

4.1.4.1 Parameter System

GK620 series drive parameter group: A0~A1, b0~b2, C0~C4, d0~d5, E0~E1, F0~F3, H0~H1,
L0~L1, U0~U1. Each parameter group contains a number of parameters. Parameters are
identified by the combination "parameter group character + parameter subgroup number +
parameter number". For instance, "F3-07" indicates the seventh parameter at subgroup 3,
group F.

4.1.4.2 Parameter Display Structure

Parameters and the parameter values are subject to a two-tier structure. Parameters
correspond to first-tier display, while parameter values correspond to second-tier display.

First-tier display shown in Fig. 4-9:

Fig. 4-9 First-tier display of parameter

- 64 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Second-tier display shown in Fig. 4-10:

Fig. 4-10 Second-tier display of parameter ("3" is the value of b0-00)

4.1.4.3 Example of Setting of Parameter

Parameter values are divided into decimal (DEC) and hexadecimal (HEX) values. When a
parameter value is expressed by a hexadecimal, all its bits are independent of each other
during edition and the range of value would be (0~F). Parameter value is composed of the unit,
tens place, hundreds and kilobit. Shift Key is used to select the bit to be changed, while
and are used to increase or decrease numerical value.
 Example of parameter password setting
 Setting of password (A0-00 is set to 1006)
1) In non-parameter edit status, it displays current parameter A0-00 when
pressing.
2) Press to display parameter value 0000 that belongs to A0-00;
3) Press for six times to change the rightmost digit "0" to "6";
4) Press to move the flashing digit to the leftmost bit;
5) Press once to change "0" in leftmost bit to "1";
6) Press to save the value of A0-00, then Control panel will switch to display the
next parameter A0-01;
7) Press to change A0-01 to A0-00;
8) Repeat steps 2) till 6). A0-01 will be displayed after control panel displaying P-SEt;
9) There are three methods for users to bring the password setting above into effect:
① Press + + simultaneously (PrtCt displayed), ②won’t
operate control panel within 5 minutes, ③ restart the drive.

- 65 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Flow chart of user password setting:

Escape modification

Fig. 4-11 Flow chart of user password setting

 ATTENTION:
User's password is successfully set when step 8 finished, but will not take effect until the
completion of step 9.
 Password authentication
In non-parameter edit status, press to enter first-tier display A0-00, then press
to enter second-tier display 0.0.0.0. Control panel will implement the display of
other parameters only when correct password entered.
 Clear password
After successful password authentication, it will access password setting code A0-00.
Password can be cleared by writing value 0000 into A0-00 twice.
 Example of parameter setting
 Example 1: modify upper limit frequency from 600Hz to 50Hz (change b0-09 from
600.00 to 50.00)
1) In non-parameter edit status, press to display current parameter A0-00;
2) Press to move flashing digit to modification bit (A flashes);
3) Press once to change "A" to "b";
4) Press to move flashing to modification bit (0 in ones place flashing);
5) Press nine times to change "0" to "9";
6) Press to view the parameter value (600.00) of b0-09;
7) Press to move flashing digit to modification digit (6 flashing);
8) Press six times to change "6" to "0";
9) Press once to move flashing digit rightwards by one bit;

- 66 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

10) Press for five times to change "0" to "5";

11) Press to save the value (50.00) of b0-09. Then the control panel will
automatically switch to display the next function code (b0-10);
12) Press to exit parameter edit status.

Flow chart is shown below:

ENT >> ▲
50.00 A0-00 A0-00 b0-00

>>
>> ENT ▲
600.00 600.00 b0-09 b0-00

▼
>> ▲ ENT
000.00 000.00 050.00 b0-10

ESC
ESC Escape
放弃修改 modification

b0-09 50.00

Fig. 4-12 Flow chart of upper limit frequency modification

 Example 2: user parameter initialization
1) In non-parameter edit status, press to display current parameter A0-00;
2) Press three times to change "0" in the rightmost bit of A0-00 to "3";
3) Press to display parameter value 0 of A0-03;
4) Press once to change "0" to "2" or "3" ("2" motor parameter excluded, "3"
means motor parameter included);
5) Press to save the value of A0-03.Then control panel will automatically display
parameter A0-00;
6) Press to escape parameter edit status.

Flow chart is shown below:

2 or 3

Fig. 4-13 Flow chart of user parameter initialization

- 67 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 Example 3: setting method of hexadecimal parameter

Take L1-02 (LED STOP display parameter) for example, if LED control panel is required to
display: setting frequency, bus voltage, AI1, running linear speed, and setting linear speed.
Since all bits are independent of each other, the ones place, tens place, hundreds place and
thousands place should be set separately. Determine the binary numbers of each bit and then
convert the binary numbers into a hexadecimal number. See Table 4-6, the corresponding
relation between binary numbers and a hexadecimal number.

Table 4-6 Corresponding relation between binary and hexadecimal

Binary numbers Hexadecimal

(LED bit display value)
BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 A
1 0 1 1 B
1 1 0 0 C
1 1 0 1 D
1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F

Set the value in the ones place:

As shown in Fig. 4-14, "setting frequency" and "bus voltage" are respectively determined by
BIT0 and BIT1 in ones place of L1-02. If BIT0=1, setting frequency will be displayed. The bits
that correspond to the parameters which are not required to display shall be set to 0. Therefore,
the value in ones place should be 0011, corresponding to 3 in a hexadecimal number. Set the
ones place to 3.

Set the value in tens place:

As shown in Fig. 4-14, since it is required to display "AI1", the binary set value of tens place is
0001, corresponding to 1 in a hexadecimal number. Thus, bit of tens place shall be set to 1.

- 68 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Set the value in hundreds place:

As shown in Fig. 4-14, the parameter required to display does not involve hundreds place, so
the hundreds place shall be set to zero.

Set thousands place:

As shown in Fig. 4-14, since required to display "running linear speed" and "setting linear
speed", the binary set value of thousands place shall be 0011 that corresponds to 3 in a
hexadecimal number.

To sum up, L1-02 should be set to 3013.

Thousands Hundreds
Tens Place Ones Place
Place Place

BIT0͹Running Linear Speed (m/sͨ BIT0͹PID Setting (%ͨ BIT0͹AI1 (V) BIT0͹Set Frequency (Hz)
BIT1͹Set Linear Speed (m/sͨ BIT1͹PID F eedback (%ͨ BIT1͹AI2 (V) BIT1͹Bus Voltage (V)
BIT2͹External Counter Value BIT2͹Set Length (m) BIT2͹AI3 (V) BIT2͹Input Terminal Status
BIT3͹DI BIT3͹Actual Length (m) ԝѹ BIT3͹Reserved Зѹԝѹ Зѹ
BIT3͹Output Terminal ԝѹ
Status

Fig. 4-14 Setting of hexadecimal parameter L1-02

Under parameter setting status, the parameter value cannot be modified if the value has no
flashing digit. Possible causes include:
1) The parameter cannot be modified, such as actual detection parameters, running recording
parameters, etc;
2) This parameter cannot be modified in run status but can be changed when motor stopped;
3) Parameter under protection. When parameter A0-02 is set to 1, parameters cannot be
modified as the parameter protection against misoperation enabled. To edit parameter in
such a circumstance, it is necessary to set A0-02 to 0 as first step.

4.1.4.4 Lock/Unlock Control Panel

 Lock control panel

All or some keys of CONTROL PANEL can be locked by any of the following three
methods. See the definition of parameter L0-01 for further information.
Method 1: set the parameter value of L0-01 to non-zero, then press
+ + simultaneously.
Method 2: do not operate CONTROL PANEL within five minutes after L0-01 is set to
non-zero.
Method 3: cut the power off and then apply power on after L0-01 parameter is set to
non-zero.
Refer to flow chart 4-15 for locking CONTROL PANEL.

- 69 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 Unlock control panel

To unlock the control panel, press + + simultaneously. Unlocking
won’t change the value of parameter L0-01. In other words, the control panel will be locked
again if the condition of locking control panel is fulfilled. To unlock the control panel
completely, L0-01 value must be modified to 0 after unlocking.
Refer to flow chart 4- 16 of unlocking control panel

Fig. 4-15 Flow chart of locking control panel

Fig. 4-16 Flow chart of unlocking control panel

- 70 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

4.2 First-time Power up

Perform wiring in strict accordance with technical requirements as set forth in Chapter 3 -
Installation and Wiring.

4.2.1 Flow chart of first-time power up of asynchronous motor

Ready

Make sure power lines are

connected to R, S, T

Make sure motor lines are

connected with U, V, W

A0-03=3 restored to factory

default

N
Variable frequency
motor? d0-00=0

d0-00=1

Set parameters d0-01~d0-06

according to motor nameplate

Set MF key to JOG forward

L0-00=1

Press MF key to JOG

If motor rotation direction incorrect, turn off the power supply and
exchange any two phases of the motor lines, then apply power again

Static autotuning Rotary autotuning

Static autotuning or rotary
autotuning

d0-22=1 d0-22=2

Press RUN key and wait till the

finish of autotuning

Set preset frequency b0-02

Press RUN key to run

Press STOP key to stop

End

Fig. 4-17 Flow chart of first-time power up for asynchronous motor

- 71 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4.2.2 Flow chart of first-time power up of synchronous motor

Ready

Make sure power lines

are connected to R,S,T

Make sure motor lines are

connected to U,V,W

A0-03=3 restored to factory

default

A0-09=3

d0-00=2

Set parameters d0-01~d0-06

according to motor nameplate

After d0-22 is set to 4, press RUN to

perform autotuning of synchronous motor

Wait till the finish of autotuning

Set preset frequency b0-02

Press RUN

Press STOP

End

Fig. 4-18 Flow chart of first-time power up for synchronous motor

- 72 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Chapter 5 List of Parameters

GK620 parameter groups are listed below:
Category Parameter group Reference page
Group A: system A0: system parameters P74; P120
parameters and parameter A1: user-defined display P75; P123
management parameters
b0: frequency setting P77; P126
Group b: Run parameter
b1: start/stop control P78; P139
setting
b2: Accel/Decel parameters P80; P145
C0: digital input P81; P151
C1: digital output P84; P164
Group C: input and output C2: analog and pulse input P86; P171
terminals C3: analog and pulse output P87; P176
C4: automatic correction of P89; P181
analog input
d0: parameters of motor 1 P89; P182
d1: V/f control parameters of P91; P187
motor 1
d2: vector control parameters of P92; P194
Group d: motor and control motor 1
parameters d3: parameters of motor 2 P93; P198
d4: V/f control parameters of P95; P199
motor 2
d5: vector control parameters of P96; P200
motor 2
Group E: enhanced E0: enhanced function P97; P202
function and protection E1: protection parameters P98; P206
parameters
F0: process PID P101; P210
F1: multi-step frequency P102; P216
F2: simple PLC P104; P219
Group F: application F3: wobble frequency and fixed P107; P228
length count
F5: vector control without PG for P108; P232
synchronous motor
H0: MODBUS communication P109; P234
Group H: communication parameters
parameters H1: Profibus-DP communication P110; P236
parameters
Group L: keys and display L0: keys of control panel P112; P236
of control panel L1: control panel display setting P112; P238
U0: status monitoring P114; P240
Group U: monitoring
U1: history fault P117; P244

- 73 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 ATTENTION:
Change attribute:
"ᶭ" means the value of this parameter can be modified in stop and run status of drive;
"×" means the value of this parameter cannot be modified when drive is running;
"◎" means this parameter is a measured value that cannot be modified;
Factory default: The value when restored to factory default. Neither measured
parameter value nor recorded value will be restored.
Scope: the scope of setting and display of parameter values

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Group A: System Parameters and Parameter Management
Group A0: System Parameters
A0-00 Setting of user password 0~FFFF 0000 ᶭ
0: Display all parameters
1: Only display A0-00 and A0-01
2: Only display A0-00, A0-01 and
A0-01 Parameter display user-defined A1-00~A1-19 0 ᶭ
3: Only display A0-00, A0-01, and the
parameters different from factory
default
0: All parameter programming
allowed
A0-02 Parameter protection 0 ×
1: Only A0-00 and this parameter
programming allowed
0: No operation
1: Clear fault record
2: Restore all parameters to factory
default (excluding motor
parameters)
A0-03 Parameter restoration 0 ×
3: Restore all parameters to factory
default (including motor
parameters)
4: Restore all parameters to backup
parameters
0: No operation
A0-04 Parameter backup 0 ×
1: Backup all parameters
0: No operation
1: Parameter copied to control panel
2: Parameter copied (excluding motor
A0-05 Parameter copy 0 ×
parameters) to control board
3: Parameter copied (including motor
parameters) to control board

- 74 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: Type G (applicable to
constant-torque load)
A0-06 Type of drive 0 ×
1: Type L (applicable to light-duty
load)
0: Supplied by DC bus voltage of
Power supply type of
A0-07 drive main circuit 0 ◎
SMPS
1: Supplied independently
0: Motor 1
A0-08 Motor 1 / motor 2 selection 0 ×
1: Motor 2
Ones place: motor 1 control mode
0: V/f control
1: Sensor-less vector control 1
2: Sensor-less vector control 2
3: SVC control for sync. motor
A0-09 Motor control technique 00 ×
Tens place: motor 2 control mode
0: V/f control
1: Sensor-less vector control 1
2: Sensor-less vector control 2
3: SVC control for sync. motor
Group A1: User-defined Display Parameters
User-defined display
A1-00 A0-00 ×
parameter 1
User-defined display
A1-01 A0-00 ×
parameter 2
User-defined display
A1-02 A0-00 ×
parameter 3
User-defined display
A1-03 A0-00 ×
parameter 4
User-defined display
A1-04 Setting range of thousands place: A0-00 ×
parameter 5
A, b, C, d, E, F, H, L, U
User-defined display
A1-05 Setting range of hundreds place: 0~9 A0-00 ×
parameter 6
Setting range of tens place: 0~9
User-defined display
A1-06 Setting range of ones place: 0~9 A0-00 ×
parameter 7
User-defined display
A1-07 A0-00 ×
parameter 8
User-defined display
A1-08 A0-00 ×
parameter 9
User-defined display
A1-09 A0-00 ×
parameter 10
User-defined display
A1-10 A0-00 ×
parameter 11

- 75 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
User-defined display
A1-11 A0-00 ×
parameter 12
User-defined display
A1-12 A0-00 ×
parameter 13
User-defined display
A1-13 A0-00 ×
parameter 14
User-defined display
A1-14 A0-00 ×
parameter 15
User-defined display
A1-15 A0-00 ×
parameter 16
User-defined display
A1-16 A0-00 ×
parameter 17
User-defined display
A1-17 A0-00 ×
parameter 18
User-defined display
A1-18 A0-00 ×
parameter 19
User-defined display
A1-19 A0-00 ×
parameter 20
Parameter group
A1-20 0000~FFFF FFFF ×
display/hide setting 1
Parameter group
A1-21 0000~FFFF FFFF ×
display/hide setting 2
0～FF
Ones: binary Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0
Bit set 0:unmask; 1: mask
Bit0: GdP fault
Bit1: SP1 fault
Bit2: SP2 fault
Bit3: CPU fault
Tens: binary Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0
A1-22 Fault masking Bit set 0:unmask; 1: mask 08 △
Bit0: AIP fault
Bit1: OL3 fault
Bit2: oCR fault
Bit3: reserved
Example: if faults of GdP, SP1, SP2,
CPU need to be masked, then set
ones as hexadecimal F (set binary
Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0 as 1).
And it is similar meaning for tens.

- 76 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Group b Run Parameter Setting
Group b0 Frequency Setting
0: Master FREQ set
1: Master & auxiliary computation
result
2: Switch between master and
auxiliary set
b0-00 FREQ set mode 3: Switch between master FREQ set, 0 ×
and master & auxiliary computation
result
4: Switch between auxiliary FREQ
set, and master & auxiliary
computation result
0: Digital setting (b0-02) + ∧ / ∨
adjustment on control panel
1: Digital setting (b0-02) + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
2: Analog input AI1
3: Analog input AI2
b0-01 Master FREQ set 0 ×
4: Analog input EAI (on IO option)
5: X6/DI pulse input
6: Process PID output
7: PLC
8: Multi-step speed
9: Communication
b0-02 Master FREQ digital setting Lower limit freq ~ upper limit freq 50.00Hz ᶭ
0: No setting
1: Digital setting (b0-04) + ∧/∨
adjustment on control panel
2: Digital setting (b0-04) + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
3: Analog input AI1
4: Analog input AI2
b0-03 Auxiliary FREQ set 0 ×
5: Analog input EAI (on IO option
board)
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: PLC
9: Multi-step speed
10: Communication
Auxiliary FREQ digital
b0-04 Lower limit FREQ ~ upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ᶭ
setting

- 77 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: Relative to maximum FREQ
b0-05 Auxiliary FREQ range 0 ×
1: Relative to master FREQ
b0-06 Auxiliary FREQ coeff 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ×
0: Master + auxiliary
Computation of master and 1: Master - auxiliary
b0-07 0 ×
auxiliary FREQ 2: Max {master, auxiliary}
3: Min {master, auxiliary}
b0-08 Maximum FREQ Upper limit FREQ ~600.00Hz 50.00Hz ×
b0-09 Upper limit FREQ Lower limit FREQ ~ maximum FREQ 50.00Hz ×
b0-10 Lower limit FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ×
Operation when set FREQ 0: Run at lower limit FREQ
b0-11 lower than lower limit 1: Run at 0 Hz 0 ×
FREQ 2: Stop
Time-delay of stop when
b0-12 set FREQ lower than lower 0.0s ~ 6553.5s 0.0s ×
limit FREQ
Lower limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-13 0.00Hz ×
band 1
Upper limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-14 0.00Hz ×
band 1
Lower limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-15 0.00Hz ×
band 2
Upper limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-16 0.00Hz ×
band 2
Lower limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-17 0.00Hz ×
band 3
Upper limit of skip FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ
b0-18 0.00Hz ×
band 3

b0-19 Jog FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 5.00Hz ᶭ

Zero clearing when master 0~1

b0-20 and auxiliary FREQ is 0: zero clearing 0 ᶭ
switching 1: no zero clearing
Group b1 Start/Stop Control
0: Control panel control
b1-00 Run command 1: Terminal control 0 ×
2: Communication control

- 78 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Ones place: frequency set bundled
under control panel control:
0: No binding
1: Digital setting (b0-02) + ∧/∨
adjustment on control panel
2: Digital setting (b0-02) + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
3: Analog input AI1
4: Analog input AI2
5: Analog input EAI (on IO option
Binding of run command
b1-01 board) 000 ×
and frequency set
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Simple PLC
9: Multi-step FREQ
A: Communication input
Tens place: FREQ set bundled under
terminal control (same as ones place)
Hundreds place: FREQ set bundled
under communication control (same
as ones place)
0: Forward
b1-02 Run direction 0 ᶭ
1: Reverse
0: Reverse enabled
b1-03 Reverse disabled 0 ×
1: Reverse disabled
Dead time between forward
b1-04 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
and reverse
0: From start FREQ
1: DC braking start
2: Flying start 1
3: Flying start 2
4. Flying start 3
b1-05 Start method 0 ×
5. Flying start 4
Note A: need flying start option board
EPC-VD2 for flying start 2
Note B: Normally flying start 4 is used
for SW search at best effect
b1-06 Start FREQ 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ×
b1-07 Holding time of start FREQ 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
b1-08 DC braking current at start 0.0%～200.0% 0.0% ᶭ
b1-09 DC braking time at start 0.00s~30.00s 0.00s ᶭ

- 79 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
b1-10 Flying start 1 current 0.0~200.0% 100.0% ×
b1-11 Flying start 1 Decel time 0.1s~20.0s 2.0s ×
Flying start 1 adjustment
b1-12 0.0～100.0% 1.0% ×
coeff
0: Ramp to stop
b1-13 Stop method 1: Coast to stop 0 ×
2: Ramp to stop + DC brake
Start FREQ of DC brake
b1-14 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ×
stop
b1-15 DC brake current 0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ᶭ
b1-16 DC brake time 0.00s~30.00s 0.00s ᶭ
0: Disabled
b1-17 Overexcitation brake 1 ×
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
b1-18 Dynamic brake 0 ×
1: Enabled
Dynamic brake threshold
b1-19 650V~750V 720V ×
voltage
Auto restart when power up 0: Disabled
b1-20 0 ×
again after power loss 1: Enabled
Time delay of auto restart
b1-21 0.0s~10.0s 0.0s ᶭ
when power up again
Group b2 Accel/Decel Parameters

0:0.01s
Accel/Decel time resolution
b2-00 1:0.1s 1 ×
2:1s

b2-01 Accel time 1 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ

b2-02 Decel time 1 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-03 Accel time 2 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-04 Decel time 2 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-05 Accel time 3 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-06 Decel time 3 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-07 Accel time 4 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-08 Decel time 4 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
Decel time for emergency 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s
b2-09 6.0s ᶭ
stop
b2-10 Jog Accel time 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
b2-11 Jog Decel time 0s~600.00s/6000.0s/60000s 6.0s ᶭ
0: Linear Accel/Decel
b2-12 Accel/Decel curve 1: Broken-line Accel/Decel 0 ×
2: S-curve Accel/Decel A

- 80 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
3: S-curve Accel/Decel B
4: S-curve Accel/Decel C
Accel time switching FREQ
b2-13 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ᶭ
of broken-line Accel/Decel
Decel time switching FREQ
b2-14 0.00Hz~upper limit FREQ 0.00Hz ᶭ
of broken-line Accel/Decel
Time of Accel S-curve first
b2-15 0.00s~60.00s (S-curve A) 0.20s ᶭ
segment
Time of Accel S-curve last
b2-16 0.00s~60.00s (S-curve A) 0.20s ᶭ
segment
Time of Decel S-curve first
b2-17 0.00s~60.00s (S-curve A) 0.20s ᶭ
segment
Time of Decel S-curve last
b2-18 0.00s~60.00s (S-curve A) 0.20s ᶭ
segment
Proportion of Accel S-curve
b2-19 0.0%~100.0% (S-curve B) 20.0% ᶭ
first segment
Proportion of Accel S-curve
b2-20 0.0%~100.0% (S-curve B) 20.0% ᶭ
last segment
Proportion of Decel S-curve
b2-21 0.0%~100.0% (S-curve B) 20.0% ᶭ
first segment
Proportion of Decel S-curve
b2-22 0.0%~100.0% (S-curve B) 20.0% ᶭ
last segment
Group C Input and Output Terminals
Group C0 Digital Input
Enabled condition of run 0: Trigger edge detected + ON
C0-00 command terminals when detected 0 ×
power up 1: ON detected
0: No function
C0-01 Function of terminal X1 3 ×
1: JOG forward
2: JOG reverse
C0-02 Function of terminal X2 4 ×
3: Run forward (FWD)
4: Run reverse (REV)
C0-03 Function of terminal X3 5: Three-wire control 1 ×
6: Run suspended
C0-04 Function of terminal X4 7: External stop 23 ×
8: Emergency stop
C0-05 Function of terminal X5 9: Stop command + DC brake 11 ×
10: DC brake stop
C0-06 Function of terminal X6/DI 11: Coast to stop 0 ×
12: Terminal UP
C0-07 Function of terminal EX 13: Terminal DOWN 0 ×

- 81 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
(on IO option board) 14: Clear UP/DOWN (including ∧/∨
Function of terminal AI1 key) adjustment
C0-08 0 ×
(Digital enabled) 15: Multi-step FREQ terminal 1
16: Multi-step FREQ terminal 2
Function of terminal AI2 17: Multi-step FREQ terminal 3
C0-09 0 ×
(Digital enabled) 18: Multi-step FREQ terminal 4
19: Accel/Decel time determinant 1
20: Accel/Decel time determinant 2
21: Accel/Decel disabled(ramp stop
not inclusive)
22: External fault input
23: Fault reset (RESET)
24: Pulse input (valid only for X6/DI)
25: Motor 1/2 switchover
26: Reserved
27: Run command switched to control
panel control
28: Run command switched to
terminal control
29: Run command switched to
communication control
30: Frequency set mode shift
31: Master FREQ set switched to
Function of terminal EAI digital setting b0-02
C0-10 (Digital enabled) (on IO 32: Auxiliary FREQ set switched to 0 ×
option board) digital setting b0-04
33: PID adjustment direction
34: PID paused
35: PID integration paused
36: PID parameter switch
37: Count input
38: Count clear
39: Length count
40: Length clear
41~62: Reserved
63: Simple PLC paused
64: Simple PLC disabled
65: Simple PLC stop memory clear
66: Start wobble frequency
67: Clear wobble frequency status
68: Run prohibited
69: DC brake in run

- 82 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
70: Analog input curve switching
71~99: Reserved
Filtering time of digital input
C0-11 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s ᶭ
terminal
C0-12 Delay time of terminal X1 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
C0-13 Delay time of terminal X2 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: X1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Digital input terminal Tens place: X2 (same as ones place)
C0-14 0000 ×
enabled status setting 1 Hundreds place: X3 (same as ones
place)
Thousands place: X4 (same as ones
place)
Ones place: X5
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Digital input terminal Tens place: X6 (valid as ordinary
C0-15 0000 ×
enabled status setting 2 terminal, same as ones place)
Hundreds place: (on IO option board,
same as ones place)
Thousands place: reserved
Ones place: AI1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Digital input terminal
C0-16 Tens place: AI2 (same as ones place) 0000 ×
enabled status setting 3
Hundreds place: EAI (on IO option
board, same as ones place)
Thousands place: reserved

Ones place: at stop

0: Cleared
1: Maintained
Tens place: on power loss
0: Cleared
Terminal UP/DOWN FREQ 1: Maintained
C0-17 0000 ᶭ
adjustment action Hundreds place: integral function
0: No integral function
1: Integral function enabled
Thousands place: run direction
0: Changing run direction prohibited
1: Changing run direction allowed

- 83 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default

Terminal UP/DOWN
C0-18 0.00Hz/s~100.00Hz/s 0.03 Hz/s ᶭ
frequency change step size

0: Two-wire mode 1
FWD/REV terminal control 1: Two-wire mode 2
C0-19 0 ×
mode 2: Three-wire mode 1
3: Three-wire mode 2
000~77F
0: Actual terminal in effect
1: Virtual terminal in effect
Option of virtual input Ones place: BIT0~BIT3: X1~X4
C0-20 000 ×
terminal Tens place: BIT4~BIT6: X5~X6, EX
Hundreds place: BIT8~BIT10:
AI1~AI2, EAI (EX and EAI located at
IO option board)
Enabled condition of run 0: Trigger edge detected + ON
C0-21 command terminal after detected 0 ᶭ
fault reset (RESET) 1: ON detected
Group C1 Digital Output
C1-00 Y1 output function 0: No output 0 ᶭ
Y2/DO output function 1: Drive undervoltage
C1-01 0 ᶭ
(when used as Y2) 2: Drive run preparation completed
Control board relay output 3: Drive is running
C1-02 14 ᶭ
function 4: Drive running at 0Hz (there is no
output at stop)
5: Drive running at 0Hz (there is
output at stop)
6: Run direction
7: FREQ attained
8: Upper limit FREQ attained
9: Lower limit FREQ attained
10: Frequency detection FDT1
Option board relay output 11: Frequency detection FDT2
C1-03 15 ᶭ
function 12: Reserved
13: Torque limited
14: Fault output
15: Alarm output
16: Drive (motor) overloaded alarm
17: Drive overheat alarm
18: Zero current detection
19: X1
20: X2

- 84 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
21: Motor 1/ 2 indication
22: Set count value attained
23: Designated count value attained
24: Length attained
25: Consecutive run time attained
26: Accumulative run time attained
27: Brake control
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: PLC step completed
31: PLC cycle completed
32: Wobble frequency attains to
upper or lower limit frequency
33: Upper/lower limit of set FREQ
attained
34: Target FREQ attained (set by
C2-29)
35~99: Reserved
C1-04 Y1 output time delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
C1-05 Y2 output time delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
Control board relay output
C1-06 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
time delay
Option board relay output
C1-07 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
time delay
Ones place: Y1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Enabled state of digital Tens place: Y2 (same as ones place)
C1-08 0000 ×
output Hundreds place: control board relay
output (same as ones place)
Thousands place: option board relay
output (same as ones place)
Ones place: FDT1 detected object
0: Speed set value (FREQ after
Accel/Decel)
Detected object of FREQ 1: Detected speed value
C1-09 00 ᶭ
detection (FDT) Tens place: FDT2 detected object
0: Speed set value (FREQ after
Accel/Decel)
1: Detected speed value
C1-10 FDT1 upper value 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 50.00Hz ᶭ
C1-11 FDT1 lower value 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 49.00Hz ᶭ

- 85 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
C1-12 FDT2 upper value 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 25.00Hz ᶭ
C1-13 FDT2 lower value 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 24.00Hz ᶭ
Detection width of FREQ
C1-14 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 2.50Hz ᶭ
attained
Zero current detection
C1-15 0.0%~50.0% 5.0% ᶭ
value
C1-16 Zero current detection time 0.01s~50.00s 0.50s ᶭ
Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input
Ones place: AI1 input curve
0: Curve 1 (2 points)
1: Curve 2 (4 points)
2: Curve 3 (4 points)
3: Curve 2 and curve 3 switchover
C2-00 Analog input curve 0210 ×
Tens place: AI2 input curve
(same as ones place)
Hundreds place: EAI input curve
(same as ones place)
Thousands place: reserved
C2-01 Curve 1 maximum input Curve 1 minimum input ~ 110.0% 100.0% ᶭ
Corresponding set value of
C2-02 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ᶭ
curve 1 maximum input
C2-03 Curve 1 minimum input -110.0% ~ curve 1 maximum input 0.0% ᶭ
Corresponding set value of ᶭ
C2-04 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
curve 1 minimum input
Range: input of curve 2 inflection ᶭ
C2-05 Curve 2 maximum input 100.0%
point A~110.0%
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-06 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 100.0%
curve 2 maximum input
Input of curve 2 inflection Input of curve 2 inflection point B ~
C2-07 0.0% ᶭ
point A curve 2 maximum input

Set value Cor. to input of

C2-08 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
curve 2 inflection point A
Input of curve 2 inflection Range: Curve 2 minimum input ~ ᶭ
C2-09 0.0%
point B Input of curve 2 inflection point A
ᶭ
Set value corresponding to
C2-10 input of curve 2 inflection Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
point B

- 86 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Range: -110.0%~ input of curve 2 ᶭ
C2-11 Curve 2 minimum input -100.0%
inflection point B
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-12 Range: -100.0%~100.0% -100.0%
curve 2 minimum input
Range: input of curve 3 inflection ᶭ
C2-13 Curve 3 maximum input 100.0%
point A ~110.0%
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-14 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 100.0%
curve 3 maximum input
Input of curve 3 inflection Range: input of curve 3 inflection ᶭ
C2-15 0.0%
point A point B ~ curve 3 maximum input
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-16 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
input of curve 3 inflection point A
Input of curve 3 inflection Range: curve 3 minimum input~ input ᶭ
C2-17 0.0%
point B of curve 3 inflection point A
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-18 input of curve 3 inflection point Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
B
Range: -110.0%~ input of curve 3 ᶭ
C2-19 Curve 3 minimum input 0.0%
inflection point B
Set value corresponding to ᶭ
C2-20 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
curve 3 minimum input
C2-21 AI1 terminal filtering time 0.000s~10.000s 0.1s ᶭ
C2-22 AI2 terminal filtering time 0.000s~10.000s 0.1s ᶭ
EAI terminal filtering time
C2-23 0.000s~10.000s 0.1s ᶭ
(on IO option board)
C2-24 DI maximum input Range: C2-26~50.0kHz 50.0kHz ᶭ
Set value corresponding to
C2-25 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ᶭ
DI maximum input
C2-26 DI minimum input Range: 0.0kHz~C2-24 0.0kHz ᶭ
Set value corresponding to
C2-27 Range: -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
DI minimum input
C2-28 DI filtering time 0.000s~1.000s 0.001s ᶭ
0.00Hz～upper limit FREQ
C2-29 Target FREQ (enabled when C1-00 ~C1-03 is set 0.00Hz ᶭ
to 34 )
Group C3 Analog and Pulse Output
C3-00 AO1 output function 0: No output 2 ᶭ
EAO output function 1: Set FREQ
C3-01 1 ᶭ
(on IO option) 2: Output FREQ

- 87 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
3: Output current (to drive rated)
4: Output torque (absolute value)
5: Output voltage
6: Output power
7: Bus voltage
8: Reserved
9: Torque current
10: Magnetic flux current
11:AI1
12:AI2
Y2/DO output function 13:EAI
C3-02 0 ᶭ
(when used as DO) 14: Reserved
15:DI
16:Communication input percentage
17: Output FREQ before
compensation
18:Output current (relative to motor
rated current)
19:Output torque (direction hinted)
20:Set torque (direction hinted)
21~99: Reserved

C3-03 AO1 offset -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×

C3-04 AO1 gain -2.000~2.000 1.000 ×
C3-05 AO1 filtering time 0.0s~10.0s 0.0s ᶭ
C3-06 EAO offset -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
C3-07 EAO gain -2.000~2.000 1.000 ×
C3-08 EAO filtering time 0.0s~10.0s 0.0s ᶭ
DO maximum output pulse
C3-09 0.1kHz~50.0kHz 50.0kHz ᶭ
FREQ

0: No center point
1: Center point is (C3-09)/2, and the
corresponding parameter value is
positive when FREQ is higher than
C3-10 DO output center point center point 0 ×
2: Center point is (C3-09)/2, and the
corresponding parameter value is
positive when FREQ is lower than
center point

C3-11 DO output filtering time 0.00s~10.00s 0.00s ᶭ

- 88 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Group C4 Automatic Correction of Analog Input
0: No correction
1:Correct AI1
C4-00 Analog correction 0 ×
2:Correct AI2
3:Correct EAI
Sampling value of AI1
C4-01 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 1.00V ◎
calibration point 1
Input value of AI1
C4-02 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 1.00V ×
calibration point 1
Sampling value of AI1
C4-03 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 9.00V ◎
calibration point 2
Input value of AI1
C4-04 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 9.00V ×
calibration point 2
Sampling value of AI2
C4-05 Range: -10.00V~10.00V 1.00V ◎
calibration point 1
Input value of AI2
C4-06 Range: -10.00V~10.00V 1.00V ×
calibration point 1
Sampling value of AI2
C4-07 Range: -10.00V~10.00V 9.00V ◎
calibration point 2
Input value of AI2
C4-08 Range: -10.00V~10.00V 9.00V ×
calibration point 2
Sampling value of EAI
C4-09 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 1.00V ◎
calibration point 1
Input value of EAI
C4-10 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 1.00V ×
calibration point 1
Sampling value of EAI
C4-11 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 9.00V ◎
calibration point 2
Input value of EAI
C4-12 Range: 0.00V~10.00V 9.00V ×
calibration point 2
Group d Motor and Control Parameters
Group d0 Parameters of Motor 1
0: Ordinary asyn. motor
d0-00 Type of motor 1 1: Variable frequency asyn. motor 1 ×
2: Synchronous motor
Model
d0-01 Power rating of motor 1 0.4kW~6553.5kW ×
dependent
d0-02 Rated voltage of motor 1 0V~480V (for drives 380V level) 380V ×
Model
d0-03 Rated current of motor 1 0.0A~6553.5A ×
dependent

- 89 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
d0-04 Rated frequency of motor 1 0.00Hz~upper limit frequency 50.00Hz ×
d0-05 Pole number of motor 1 1~80 4 ×
Model
d0-06 Rated speed of motor 1 0~65535r/min ×
dependent
Stator resistance R1 of Model
d0-07 0.001Ω~65.535Ω ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Leakage inductance L1 of Model
d0-08 0.1mH~6553.5mH ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Rotor resistance R2 of Model
d0-09 0.001Ω~65.535Ω ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Mutual inductance L2 of Model
d0-10 0.1mH~6553.5mH ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
No-load current of asyn. Model
d0-11 0.0A~6553.5A ×
motor 1 dependent
Flux weakening coeff 1 of Model
d0-12 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Flux weakening coeff 2 of Model
d0-13 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Flux weakening coeff 3 of Model
d0-14 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 1 dependent
Stator resistance of syn.
d0-15 0.001Ω～65.535Ω 0.500Ω ×
motor 1
D-axis inductance of syn.
d0-16 0.01mH～655.35mH 9.00 mH ×
motor 1
Q-axis inductance of syn.
d0-17 0.01mH～655.35mH 9.00 mH ×
motor 1
Back EMF voltage of syn.
d0-18 0.0V～1000.0V 380.0V ×
motor 1
Autotuning current of syn. 0.0%～100.0%
d0-19 35.0% ×
motor 1 100% is rated current of motor
d0-20 Reserved Reserved Reserved ×
d0-21 Reserved Reserved Reserved ×
0: Disabled
1: Static autotuning of asyn. motor
2: Rotary autotuning of asyn. motor
d0-22 Autotuning of motor 1 3: Reserved 0 ×
4: Static autotuning of syn. motor
5: No-load rotary autotuning of syn.
motor

- 90 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: No protection
Overload protection of
d0-23 1: Judged by motor current 1 ×
motor 1
2: Judged by temperature transducer
Overload protection
d0-24 0.1min~15.0min 5.0min ×
detection time of motor 1
0: AI1
Temperature transducer
d0-25 1: AI2 1 ×
signal input of motor 1
2: EAI (on IO optional board)
Thermal protection
d0-26 threshold of motor 1 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ×
temperature transducer
d0-27 SW rotary speed track Kp 0.00~655.35 0.00 ×
d0-28 SW rotary speed track Ki 0.00~655.35 2.00 ×
Group d1 V/f Control Parameters of Motor 1
0: Linear V/f
1: Multi-stage V/f (d1-01~d1-08)
2: 1.2nd power
3: 1.4th power
d1-00 V/f curve setting 4: 1.6th power 0 ×
5: 1.8th power
6: 2.0nd power
7: V/f separated mode 1
8: V/f separated mode 2
d1-01 V/f FREQ value f3 0.00Hz~motor rated FREQ 50.00Hz ×
d1-02 V/f voltage value V3 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ×
d1-03 V/f FREQ value f2 d1-05~d1-01 0.00Hz ×
d1-04 V/f voltage value V2 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d1-05 V/f FREQ value f1 d1-07~d1-03 0.00Hz ×
d1-06 V/f voltage value V1 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d1-07 V/f FREQ value f0 0.00Hz~d1-05 0.00Hz ×
d1-08 V/f voltage value V0 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d1-09 Torque boost 0.0%~30.0% 0.0% ᶭ
d1-10 Slip compensation gain 0.0%~400.0% 100.0% ᶭ
d1-11 Droop control 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 0.00Hz ᶭ
0: Disabled
1: Set by d1-13
2: Set by AI1
d1-12 Current limitation mode 1 ×
3: Set by AI2
4: Set by EAI
5: Set by X6/DI

- 91 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Digital setting of current
d1-13 20.0%~200.0% 160.0% ×
limit value
Current limit coeff on flux
d1-14 0.001~1.000 0.500 ᶭ
weakening
d1-15 Energy saving percentage 0%~40.0% 0.0% ᶭ
V/f oscillation suppression
d1-16 0~3000 38 ᶭ
gain 1
V/f oscillation suppression
d1-17 0~3000 0 ᶭ
gain 2
0: d1-19 digital setting
1: Set by AI1
Voltage setting on V/f 2: Set by AI2
d1-18 0 ×
separated pattern 3: Set by EAI
4: Process PID output
5: AI1 + process PID output
Digital set voltage on V/f
d1-19 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
separated pattern
Voltage variation time on
d1-20 0.00s~600.00s 0.01s ᶭ
V/f separated pattern
Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1
d2-00 Reserved Reserved 0 ×
ASR high-speed
d2-01 0.0~20.0 2.0 ᶭ
proportional gain Kp1
ASR high-speed integration
d2-02 0.000s~8.000s 0.200 ᶭ
time Ti1
ASR low-speed
d2-03 0.0~20.0 2.0 ᶭ
proportional gain Kp2
ASR low-speed integration
d2-04 0.000s~8.000s 0.200 ᶭ
time Ti2
d2-05 ASR switching FREQ 1 0.00Hz~d2-06 5.00Hz ᶭ
d2-06 ASR switching FREQ 2 d2-05~upper limit FREQ 10.00Hz ᶭ
d2-07 ASR input filtering time 0.0ms~500.0ms 5.0ms ᶭ
d2-08 ASR output filtering time 0.0ms~500.0ms 0.3ms ᶭ
d2-09 ACR proportion coeff Kp 0.000~4.000 1.000 ᶭ
d2-10 ACR integration coeff Ki 0.000~4.000 1.000 ᶭ
d2-11 Pre-excitation time 0.000s~5.000s 0.200s ᶭ

- 92 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: d2-14 digital setting
1: AI1
Driven torque restriction 2: AI2
d2-12 0 ×
source 3: EAI (on IO option board)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication
0: d2-15 digital setting
1: AI1
Braking torque restriction 2: AI2
d2-13 0 ×
source 3: EAI (on IO option board)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication
d2-14 Digital set of driven torque 0.0%~200.0% 180.0% ᶭ
d2-15 Digital set of braking torque 0.0%~200.0% 180.0% ᶭ
Torque limit coefficient in
d2-16 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ᶭ
flux weakening
Driven slip compensation
d2-17 10.0%~300.0% 100.0% ᶭ
gain
Brake slip compensation
d2-18 10.0%~300.0% 100.0% ᶭ
gain
d2-30 Bandwidth of current loop 0.0Hz~3200.0Hz 200.0Hz ×
Group d3 Parameters of Motor 2
0: Ordinary asyn. motor
d3-00 Type of motor 2 1: Variable-frequency asyn. motor 0 ×
2: Synchronous motor
Model
d3-01 Power rating of motor 2 0.4kW~6553.5kW ×
dependent
d3-02 Rated voltage of motor 2 0V~480V (for drives 400V level) 380V ×
Model
d3-03 Rated current of motor 2 0.0A~6553.5A ×
dependent
d3-04 Rated frequency of motor 2 0.00Hz~upper limit frequency 50.00Hz ×
d3-05 Pole number of motor 2 1~80 4 ×
Model
d3-06 Rated speed of motor 2 0~65535r/min ×
dependent
Stator resistance R1 of Model
d3-07 0.001Ω~65.535Ω ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent
Leakage inductance L1 of Model
d3-08 0.1mH~6553.5mH ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent
Rotor resistance R2 of Model
d3-09 0.001Ω~65.535Ω ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent

- 93 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Mutual inductance L2 of Model
d3-10 0.1mH~6553.5mH ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent
No-load current of asyn. Model
d3-11 0.0A~6553.5A ×
motor 2 dependent
Flux weakening coeff 1 of Model
d3-12 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent

Flux weakening coeff 2 of Model

d3-13 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent

Flux weakening coeff 3 of Model

d3-14 0.0000~1.0000 ×
asyn. motor 2 dependent
Stator resistance of syn.
d3-15 0.001Ω～65.535Ω 0.500Ω ×
motor 2
D-axis inductance of syn.
d3-16 0.01mH～655.35mH 9.00 mH ×
motor 2
Q-axis inductance of syn.
d3-17 0.01mH～655.35mH 9.00 mH ×
motor 2
Back EMF voltage of syn.
d3-18 0.0V～1000.0V 380.0V ×
motor 2
Autotuning current of syn.0.0%～100.0%
d3-19 35.0% ×
motor 2 100% is rated current of motor
d3-20 Reserved Reserved Reserved ×
d3-21 Reserved Reserved Reserved ×
0: Disabled
1: Static autotuning of asyn. motor
2: Rotary autotuning of asyn. motor
d3-22 Autotuning of motor 2 3: Reserved 0 ×
4: Static autotuning of sync. motor
5: No-load rotary autotuning of sync.
motor
0: No action
Overload protection mode
d3-23 1: Judged by motor current 1 ×
of motor 2
2: Judged by temperature transducer
Overload protection
d3-24 0.1min~15.0min 5.0min ×
detection time of motor 2
Input channel of motor 2 0: AI1
d3-25 temperature transducer 1: AI2 0 ×
signal 2: EAI (on IO optional board)
Thermal protection
d3-26 threshold of motor 2 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ×
temperature transducer

- 94 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Single phase current
d3-27 0.0%~400.0% 150.0% ᶭ
overload point
Single phase current
d3-28 0.001~50.000s 1.000s ᶭ
overload time
Group d4 V/f Control Parameter of Motor 2
0: Linear V/f
1: Various segments V/f
(d4-01~d4-08)
2: 1.2nd power
3: 1.4th power
d4-00 V/f curve setting 0 ×
4: 1.6th power
5: 1.8th power
6: 2.0nd power
7: V/f separated mode 1
8: V/f separated mode 2
d4-01 V/f FREQ value f3 0.00Hz~rated FREQ of motor 50.00Hz ×
d4-02 V/f voltage value V3 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ×
d4-03 V/f FREQ value f2 d4-05~d4-01 0.00Hz ×
d4-04 V/f voltage value V2 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d4-05 V/f FREQ value f1 d4-07~d4-03 0.00Hz ×
d4-06 V/f voltage value V1 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d4-07 V/f FREQ value f0 0.00Hz~d4-05 0.00Hz ×
d4-08 V/f voltage value V0 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
d4-09 Torque boost 0.0%~30.0% 0.0% ᶭ
d4-10 Slip compensation gain 0.0%~300.0% 100.0% ᶭ
Drooping FREQ of droop
d4-11 0.00Hz~maximum frequency 0.00Hz ᶭ
control
0: Disabled
1: Set by d4-13
2: Set by AI1
d4-12 Current limitation source 1 ×
3: Set by AI2
4: Set by EAI
5: Set by X6/DI
Digital setting of current
d4-13 20.0%~200.0% 160.0% ×
limit value
Flux weakening current
d4-14 0.001~1.000 0.500 ᶭ
limit coeff
d4-15 Energy saving percentage 0.0%~40.0% 0.0% ᶭ
V/f oscillation suppression
d4-16 0~3000 38 ᶭ
gain 1

- 95 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
V/f oscillation suppression
d4-17 0~3000 0 ᶭ
gain 2
0: d1-19 digital setting
1: Set by AI1
Voltage setting on V/f 2: Set by AI2
d4-18 0 ᶭ
separated pattern 3: Set by EAI
4: Process PID output
5: AI1 + process PID output
Digital voltage setting on ᶭ
d4-19 0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
V/f separation pattern
Voltage variation time on ᶭ
d4-20 0.00s~600.00s 0.01s
V/f separated pattern
Group d5 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 2
d5-00 Reserved Reserved Reserve ×
ASR Hi-speed proportional
d5-01 0.0~20.0 2.0 ᶭ
gain Kp1
ASR Hi-speed integration ᶭ
d5-02 0.000s~8.000s 0.200
time Ti1
ASR low-speed
d5-03 0.0~20.0 2.0 ᶭ
proportional gain Kp2
ASR low-speed integration ᶭ
d5-04 0.000s~8.000s 0.200
time Ti2
d5-05 ASR switching FREQ 1 0.00Hz~d5-06 5.00Hz ᶭ
d5-06 ASR switching FREQ 2 D5-05~upper limit FREQ 10.00Hz ᶭ
d5-07 ASR input filtering time 0.0ms~500.0ms 5.0ms ᶭ
d5-08 ASR output filtering time 0.0ms~500.0ms 0.3ms ᶭ
d5-09 ACR proportion coeff Kp 0.000~4.000 1.000 ᶭ
d5-10 ACR integration coeff Ki 0.000~4.000 1.000 ᶭ
d5-11 Pre-excitation time 0.000s~5.000s 0.200s ᶭ
0: d5-14 digital setting
1: AI1
Driven torque restriction 2: AI2
d5-12 0 ×
source 3: EAI (on IO option)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication
0: d5-15 digital setting
1: AI1
Braking torque restriction 2: AI2
d5-13 0 ×
source 3: EAI (on IO option)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication

- 96 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Digital setting of driven
d5-14 0.0%~200.0% 180.0% ᶭ
torque limit value
Digital setting of braking ᶭ
d5-15 0.0%~200.0% 180.0%
torque limit value
Flux weakening torque limit
d5-16 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ᶭ
coeff
Driven slip compensation
d5-17 10.0%~300.0% 100.0% ᶭ
gain
Brake slip compensation ᶭ
d5-18 10.0%~300.0% 100.0%
gain
Group E Enhanced Function and Protection Parameters
Group E0 Enhanced Function
≤15kW:
0.7kHz~16.0kHz, factory default:
8.0 kHz
18.5kW~45kW:
0.7kHz~10.0kHz, factory default:
4.0 kHz Model
E0-00 Switching FREQ ᶭ
55kW~75kW: dependent
0.7kHz~16.0kHz, factory default:
3.0 kHz
≥90kW:
0.7kHz~3.0kHz, factory default:
2.0 kHz
Ones place: switching FREQ relation
with temperature
0: Self-adaption
1: No adaption
Tens place: PWM modulation mode
0: Five-segment and seven-segment
self-switchover
1: Five-segment mode
E0-01 PWM optimization 2: Seven-segment mode 0100 ×
Hundreds place: over-modulation
adaption
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands place: PWM switching
FREQ relation with output frequency
0: Self-adaption
1: No adaption

- 97 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default

Ones place: action when consecutive

run time attained:
0: Run continued
1: Stop and fault reported
Tens place: action when
Action when run time
E0-02 accumulative run time attained: 000 ×
attained
0: Run continued
1: Stop and fault reported
Hundreds place: unit of run time
0: Second
1: Hour

Consecutive run time

E0-03 0.0s(h)~6000.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ×
setting
Accumulative run time
E0-04 0.0s(h)~6000.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ×
setting
0: Disabled
E0-05 Mechanical brake control 0 ×
1: Enabled
Mechanical brake open
E0-06 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 2.50Hz ×
frequency
Mechanical brake open
E0-07 0.0%~200.0% 120.0% ×
current
Accel delay time after brake
E0-08 0.0s~10.0s 1.0s ×
open
Mechanical brake
E0-09 0.00Hz~10.00Hz 2.00Hz ×
FREQ
Mechanical brake close
E0-10 0.0s~10.0s 0.0s ×
waiting time
Mechanical brake close
E0-11 0.0s~10.0s 1.0s ×
holding time
Group E1 Protection Parameters

0: Invalid in all process

E1-00 Overvoltage stall 1: Valid in all process 1 ×
2. Valid only for decelerating

Overvoltage stall protection

E1-01 120%~150% 130% ×
voltage
0: Disabled
E1-02 Undervoltage stall 0 ×
1: Enabled

- 98 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default

Ones place: detection option:

0: Always detect
1: Detect at constant speed only
Tens place: compared with:
E1-03 Overload alarm 0: Motor rated current 000 ×
1: Drive rated current
Hundreds place: drive action
0: Alarm but run continued
1: Alarm and coast to stop

E1-04 Overload alarm threshold 20.0%~200.0% 130.0% ᶭ

Overload alarm activation
E1-05 0.1s~60.0s 5.0s ᶭ
time

Ones place: reserved

Tens place: action at IGBT
temperature measurement circuit
fault (OH3):
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
Hundreds place: abnormal EEPROM
E1-06 Protection action 1 0000 ×
(EPr) :
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
Thousands place: abnormal terminal
communication (TrC):
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued

- 99 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default

Ones place: abnormal power supply

when running (SUE):
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
Tens place: current detection circuit
failed (CtC)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
Hundreds place: abnormal contactor
(CCL):
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
E1-07 Protection action 2 3001 ×
Thousands place: input supply fault
/output phase loss (ISF, oPL):
0: Protection for neither input supply
fault nor output phase loss
1: No protection for input supply fault,
protection enabled for output phase
loss
2: Protection enabled for input supply
fault, no protection for output phase
loss
3: Protection enabled both for input
supply fault and output phase loss

Fault memory after power 0: Not memorized after power loss

E1-08 0 ×
loss 1: Memorized after power loss
E1-09 Fault auto-reset times 0~20 0 ×
E1-10 Auto-reset interval 2.0s~20.0s 2.0s ×
Ones place: when undervoltage fault
occurs
0: No action
1: Action enabled
Tens place: when fault locked
E1-11 Relay action on drive fault 0: No action 010 ×
1: Action enabled
Hundreds place: at interval of auto-
reset
0: No action
1: Action enabled
0: Auto run
E1-12 Cooling fan control 0 ᶭ
1: Always run after power up

- 100 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Drive overheat alarm
E1-13 0.0℃~100.0℃ 80.0℃ ᶭ
threshold
Group F Application
Group F0 Process PID
0: F0-01 digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
F0-00 PID setting 0 ×
3: EAI (on IO option)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication
F0-01 PID digital setting 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ᶭ
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: EAI (on IO option)
3: AI1+AI2
F0-02 PID feedback 4: AI1-AI2 0 ×
5: Max {AI1, AI2}
6: Min {AI1, AI2}
7: X6/DI pulse input
8: Communication

Ones place: output FREQ

0: Must be the same direction as the
set run direction
1: Opposite direction allowed
F0-03 PID adjustment Tens place: integration selection 11 ×
0: Integral continued when FREQ
attains upper/lower limit
1: Integral stopped when FREQ
attains upper/lower limit

PID positive and negative 0: Positive adjustment

F0-04 0 ×
adjustment 1: Negative adjustment
F0-05 Filtering time of PID setting 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ᶭ
Filtering time of PID
F0-06 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ᶭ
feedback
F0-07 Filtering time of PID output 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ᶭ
F0-08 Proportional gain Kp1 0.0~200.0 50.0 ᶭ
F0-09 Integration time Ti1 0.000s~50.000s 0.500s ᶭ
F0-10 Derivative time Td1 0.000s~50.000s 0.000s ᶭ
F0-11 Proportional gain Kp2 0.0~200.0 50.0 ᶭ
F0-12 Integration time Ti2 0.000s~50.000s 0.500s ᶭ
F0-13 Derivative time Td2 0.000s~50.000s 0.000s ᶭ

- 101 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: No switch, determined by parameters
Kp1, Ti1 and Td1
F0-14 PID parameter switch 1: Auto-switched on the basis of input 0 ×
offset
2: Switched by terminal
Input offset under PID
F0-15 0.0%~100.0% 20.0% ᶭ
auto-switch
F0-16 Sampling period T 0.001s~50.000s 0.002s ᶭ
F0-17 PID offset limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F0-18 PID derivative limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ᶭ
F0-19 PID initial value 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ×
PID initial value holding
F0-20 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
time
PID feedback loss
F0-21 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
detection value
PID feedback loss
F0-22 0.0s~30.0s 1.0s ᶭ
detection time
Cutoff FREQ when opposite
F0-23 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ 50.00Hz ᶭ
to rotary set direction
0: No computation in stop status
F0-24 PID computation option 0 ᶭ
1: Computation continued in stop status
Group F1 Multi-step frequency
0: Digital setting F1-02
1: Digital setting b0-02 + control panel
∧/∨ adjustment
2: Digital setting b0-02 + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
FREQ set source of
F1-00 3: AI1 0 ×
multi-step 0
4: AI2
5: EAI (on IO option)
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Communication
0: Digital setting F1-03
1: Digital setting b0-04 + control panel
∧/∨ adjustment
FREQ set source of 2: Digital setting b0-04 + terminal
F1-01 0 ×
multi-step 1 UP/DOWN
3: AI1
4: AI2
5: EAI (on IO option)

- 102 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Communication
-100.0%~100.0%
Note: percentage against upper limit
F1-02 Multi-step FREQ 0 0.0% ᶭ
FREQ b0-09. Meaning of
F1-03~F1-17 is the same with F1-02
F1-03 Multi-step FREQ 1 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-04 Multi-step FREQ 2 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-05 Multi-step FREQ 3 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-06 Multi-step FREQ 4 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-07 Multi-step FREQ 5 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-08 Multi-step FREQ 6 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-09 Multi-step FREQ 7 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-10 Multi-step FREQ 8 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-11 Multi-step FREQ 9 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-12 Multi-step FREQ 10 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-13 Multi-step FREQ 11 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-14 Multi-step FREQ 12 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-15 Multi-step FREQ 13 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-16 Multi-step FREQ 14 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F1-17 Multi-step FREQ 15 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ᶭ

- 103 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Group F2 Simple PLC

Ones place: PLC run mode

0: Stop after a single cycle
1: Continue to run in the last FREQ after
a single cycle
2: Cycle repeated
Tens place: power loss memory
0: No memory on power loss
1: Memorized on power loss
Hundreds place: starting mode
0: Run from the first step “multi-step
F2-00 Simple PLC run mode 0000 ×
frequency 0”
1: Continue to run from the step of stop
(or fault)
2: Continue to run from the step and
FREQ at which run stopped (or fault
occurred)
Thousands place: unit of simple PLC
run time
0: Second (s)
1: Minute (min)

Ones place: FREQ setting

0: Multi-step FREQ 0 (F1-02)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: EAI (on IO option)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Process PID output
6: Multi-step FREQ
7: Communication
F2-01 Setting of multi-step 0 000 ×
Tens place: run direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
2: Determined by run command
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
0: Accel/Decel time 1
1: Accel/Decel time 2
2: Accel/Decel time 3
3: Accel/Decel time 4

F2-02 Run time of step 0 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ

- 104 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 1 (F1-03)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-03 Setting of step 1 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-04 Run time of step 1 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 2 (F1-04)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-05 Setting of step 2 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-06 Run time of step 2 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 3 (F1-05)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-07 Setting of step 3 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-08 Run time of step 3 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 4 (F1-06)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-09 Setting of step 4 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-10 Run time of step 4 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 5 (F1-07)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-11 Setting of step 5 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-12 Run time of step 5 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
F2-13 Setting of step 6 000 ×
0: Multi-step FREQ 6 (F1-08)

- 105 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
1~7: Same as F2-01
Tens place: run direction (same as
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-14 Run time of step 6 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 7 (F1-09)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-15 Setting of step 7 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-16 Run time of step 7 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 8 (F1-10)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-17 Setting of step 8 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-18 Run time of step 8 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 9 (F1-11)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-19 Setting of step 9 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: ACC/DEC time option
(same as F2-01)
F2-20 Run time of step 9 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: multi-step FREQ 10 (F1-12)
1~7: same as F2-01
F2-21 Setting of step 10 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-22 Run time of step 10 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 11 (F1-13)
F2-23 Setting of step 11 000 ×
1~7: Same as F2-01
Tens place: run direction (same as

- 106 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-24 Run time of step 11 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 12 (F1-14)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-25 Setting of step 12 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-26 Run time of step 12 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 13 (F1-15)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-27 Setting of step 13 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-28 Run time of step 13 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 14 (F1-16)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-29 Setting of step 14 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-30 Run time of step 14 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Ones place: FREQ setting
0: Multi-step FREQ 15 (F1-17)
1~7: Same as F2-01
F2-31 Setting of step 15 Tens place: run direction (same as 000 ×
F2-01)
Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time
option (same as F2-01)
F2-32 Run time of step 15 0.0s(min)~6000.0s(min) 0.0s ᶭ
Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count
Wobble FREQ function 0: Wobble FREQ function disabled
F3-00 0 ×
setting 1: Wobble FREQ function enabled
Ones place: started method
F3-01 Wobble FREQ run setting 0: Automatically 0000 ×
1: Started by terminal

- 107 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Tens place: amplitude control
0: Relative to center FREQ
1: Relative to maximum FREQ
Hundreds place: wobble FREQ
memorized when stop
0: Memory enabled
1: Memory disabled
Thousands place: wobble FREQ
memorized on power loss
0: Memory enabled
1: Memory disabled
F3-02 Pre-wobble FREQ 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ᶭ
Pre-wobble FREQ holding
F3-03 0.0s~3600.0s 0.0s ᶭ
time
F3-04 Wobble FREQ amplitude 0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ᶭ
F3-05 Hop FREQ 0.0%~50.0% (relative to F3-04) 0.0% ᶭ
F3-06 Cycle of wobble FREQ 0.1s~999.9s 0.0s ᶭ
Triangular wave ramp-up 0.0%~100.0% (of wobble FREQ
F3-07 0.0% ᶭ
time cycle)
0: m
F3-08 Length unit 0 ᶭ
1: 10m
F3-09 Length setting 0~65535 1000 ᶭ
F3-10 Pulse number per meter 0.1~6553.5 100.0 ᶭ
Action when the length 0: Not stop
F3-11 0 ᶭ
attained 1: Stop
F3-12 Set count value 1~65535 1000 ᶭ
F3-13 Designated count value 1~65535 1000 ᶭ
Group F5 Vector control without PG for synchronous motor
0~2
0: Detecting forbidden
Recognition of rotor initial
F5-00 1: Recongnition of pulse injection 0 ᶭ
magnetic pole position
initial position
2: Reserved
F5-04 Initial pull-in current 0%~200.0% 50.0% ᶭ
Cut-off FREQ of pull-in ᶭ
F5-05 0~b0-09 0.00Hz
current
0: forbid MTPA control ᶭ
Max. torque current ratio
F5-09 Not 0: MTPA coefficient 0.000
coefficient
Note: generally 0, no need to modify
Speed observer bandwidth ᶭ
F5-12 0.000~32.000 4.000
coefficient

- 108 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
F5-13 Speed observer filter coeff. 0.000~32.000 0.200 ᶭ
0000~1111 ᶭ
Ones: dead-time compensating
enabled
Open-loop vector mode Tens: feedforward control enabled
F5-17 0011
selection Hundreds: start step-out self-recovery
enabled
Thousands: speed loop integral
separating enabled
Max. flux weakening ᶭ
F5-20 -8000~8000 -6000
current allowed
F5-21 Max voltage utilization ratio 0~65535 31767 ᶭ
Flux weakening loop ᶭ
F5-24 0~65535 0
proportional gain
Flux weakening loop ᶭ
F5-25 0~65535 800
integral gain
Group H Communication Parameters
Group H0 MODBUS Communication Parameters
0: Local 485 port
H0-00 SCI port selection 0 ×
1: Optional 232 port
Ones place: baud rate
0: 4800bps
1: 9600bps
2: 19200bps
3: 38400bps
4: 57600bps
5: 115200bps
Tens place: data format
0: 1-8-2-N format, RTU
1: 1-8-1-E format, RTU
SCI port communication
H0-01 2: 1-8-1-O Format, RTU 0001 ×
configuration
3: 1-7-2-N format, ASCII
4: 1-7-1-E format, ASCII
5: 1-7-1-O format, ASCII
Hundreds place: connection type
0: Direct cable connection (232/485)
1: MODEM (232)
Thousands place: communication
data handling at power loss
0: Not saved at power loss
1: Saved at power loss

- 109 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Local address of SCI port
H0-02 0~247, 0 is broadcast address 5 ×
communication
Time out detection of SCI
H0-03 0.0s~1000.0s 0.0s ×
port communication
Time delay of SCI port
H0-04 0ms~1000ms 0ms ×
communication
0: PC controls this drive
H0-05 Master/Slave option 1: As master 0 ×
2: As slave
Parameter store address
0:b0-02
H0-06 when this drive working as 0 ×
1:F0-01
master
Proportional factor of
H0-07 0.0～1000.0% 100.0% ᶭ
received FREQ
Group H1 Profibus-DP Communication Parameters
H1-00 Local address 1~126; 127 is broadcast address 4 ᶭ
0: Profibus disabled
1: PPO1
2: PPO2
H1-01 PPO type 0 ᶭ
3: PPO3
4: PPO4
5: PPO5
PZD2_OUT(the master → 0: none
H1-02 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD3_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-03 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD4_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-04 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD5_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-05 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD6_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-06 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD7_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-07 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD8_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-08 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

- 110 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
PZD9_OUT(the master → 0: none
H1-09 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the passive)

PZD10_OUT(the master → 0: none

H1-10 0x6200~0x6214 0 ᶭ
the slave)

PZD2_IN(the slave → the 0: none

H1-11 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD3_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-12 A0-00~U2-xx； 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD4_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-13 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD5_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-14 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD6_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-15 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD7_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-16 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD8_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-17 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD9_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-18 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
PZD10_IN(the slave → the 0: none
H1-19 A0-00~U2-xx 0 ᶭ
master) 0x6200~0x6214；0x6300~0x6323
0: No action
H1-20 Operation at bus fault 0 ᶭ
1: Stop

- 111 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
Group L Keys and Display of Control panel
Group L0 Keys of Control panel
0: No function
1: Forward jog
2: Reverse jog
3: Forward/reverse switchover
L0-00 MF key setting 0 ᶭ
4: Emergency stop 1 (set Decel time
by b2-09)
5: Emergency stop 2 (coast to stop)
6: Run command sources shifted
0: Not locked
1: All locked
2: Keys locked except RUN,
L0-01 Keys locked option 0 ᶭ
STOP/RESET
3: Keys locked except STOP/RESET
4: Keys locked other than >>
0: STOP key active only at control
panel control
L0-02 Function of STOP key 0 ᶭ
1: STOP key deactivated under any
command source
Ones place: option at stop
0: Clear at stop
1: Holding at stop
Tens place: option at power loss
0: Clear at power loss
FREQ adjustment through 1: Holding at power loss
L0-03 0100 ᶭ
keys ∧/∨ Hundreds place: integrating option
0: Integrating disabled
1: Integrating enabled
Thousands place: run direction
0: Direction changing prohibited
1: Direction changing permitted
Step size of FREQ
L0-04 adjustment through keys 0.00Hz/s~10.00Hz/s 0.03 Hz/s ᶭ
∧/∨
Group L1 Control Panel Display Setting
Binary system setting:
0: No display
Display parameter setting 1 1: Display
L1-00 ᶭ
on run status Ones place:
BIT0: Run FREQ (Hz)
BIT1: Set FREQ (Hz)

- 112 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
BIT2: Bus voltage (V)
BIT3: Output current (A)
Tens place:
BIT0: Output torque (%) 080F
BIT1: Output power (kW)
BIT2: Output voltage (V)
BIT3: Motor speed (r/min)
Hundreds place:
BIT0: AI1 (V)
BIT1: AI2 (V)
BIT2: EAI (V)
BIT3: Output sync FREQ (Hz)
Thousands place:
BIT0: DI
BIT1: External count value
BIT2: Reserved
BIT3: Reserved
Note: when this parameter value is
set to 0000, run FREQ (Hz) would be
displayed as default
Binary system setting:
0: No display
1: Display
Ones place:
BIT0: Run linear speed (m/s)
BIT1: Set linear speed (m/s)
BIT2: Input terminal status
Display parameter setting 2
L1-01 BIT3: Output terminal status 0000 ᶭ
on run status
Tens place:
BIT0: PID setting (%)
BIT1: PID feedback (%)
BIT2: Set length (m)
BIT3: Actual length (m)
Hundreds place: reserved
Thousands place: reserved
Binary system setting:
0: No display
1: Display
Display parameter setting
L1-02 Ones place: 0003 ᶭ
on stop status
BIT0: FREQ setting (Hz)
BIT1: Bus voltage (V)
BIT2: Input terminal status

- 113 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
BIT3: Output terminal status
Tens place:
BIT0: AI1 (V)
BIT1: AI2 (V)
BIT2: EAI (V)
BIT3: Reserved
Hundreds place:
BIT0: PID setting (%)
BIT1: PID feedback (%)
BIT2: Set length (m)
BIT3: Actual length (m)
Thousands place:
BIT0: Run linear speed (m/s)
BIT1: Set linear speed (m/s)
BIT2: External count value
BIT3: DI
Note: when this parameter value is
set to 0000, the set FREQ would be
displayed as default (Hz)
L1-03 Linear speed COEFF 0.1%~999.9% 100.0% ᶭ
Group U Monitoring
Group U0 Status Monitoring
U0-00 Run FREQ 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U0-01 Set FREQ 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U0-02 Bus voltage 0V~65535V 0V ◎
U0-03 Output voltage 0V~65535V 0V ◎
U0-04 Output current 0.0A~6553.5A 0.0A ◎
U0-05 Output torque -300.0%~300.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-06 Output power 0.0%~300.0% 0.0% ◎
0: Digital setting + adjustment through
∧/∨ on control panel
1: Digital setting + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
2: Analog input AI1
3: Analog input AI2
U0-07 Master FREQ set source 0 ◎
4: Analog input EAI
5: X6/DI pulse input
6: Process PID output
7: PLC
8: Multi-step FREQ
9: Communication

- 114 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
0: No set
1: Digital setting + adjustment through
∧/∨ on control panel
2: Digital setting + terminal
UP/DOWN adjustment
3: Analog input AI1
U0-08 Auxiliary FREQ set source 4: Analog input AI2 0 ◎
5: Analog input EAI
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: PLC
9: Multi-step FREQ
10: Communication
U0-09 Master FREQ setting 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U0-10 Auxiliary FREQ setting 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
Ones place: run status
0: Accelerating
1: Decelerating
2: Constant speed run
U0-11 Drive status 00 ◎
Tens place: drive status
0: Stop
1: Running
2: Autotuning
U0-12 AI1 input voltage 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ◎
U0-13 AI2 input voltage -10.00V~10.00V 0.00V ◎
U0-14 EAI input voltage 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ◎
U0-15 AO1 output 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-16 EAO output 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-17 X6/DI HF pulse FREQ 0.0kHz~50.0kHz 0.0kHz ◎
U0-18 Digital input terminal status 00~7F 00 ◎
Digital output terminal
U0-19 0~7 0 ◎
status
U0-20 PID set 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-21 PID feedback 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-22 PID input offset -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
U0-23 PLC step 0~15 0 ◎
U0-24 V/f separated target voltage 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
V/f separated actual output
U0-25 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ◎
voltage
U0-26 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-27 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎

- 115 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
U0-28 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-29 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-30 Cumulative power-up time 0h~65535h 0h ◎
U0-31 Cumulative run time 0h~65535h 0h ◎
U0-32 Heat sink temperature 1 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
U0-33 Heat sink temperature 2 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
0: No fault
1: IGBT overcurrent
2: Reserved
U0-34 FAL fault source 3: Output grounding fault 0 ◎
4: Output overcurrent
5: DC bus overvoltage
6: Other sources
U0-35 Terminal count value 0~65535 0 ◎
U0-36 Run command log at LoU 0~1 0 ◎
U0-37 Fault code log at LoU 0~100 0 ◎
U0-38 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
0: No fault
1: U-phase current detection circuit
fault
U0-39 CtC fault source 2: V-phase current detection circuit 0 ◎
fault
3: W-phase current detection circuit
fault
Higher-bit numbers of
U0-40 0~65 0 ◎
actual length
Lower-bit numbers of actual
U0-41 0~65535 0 ◎
length
Higher-bit numbers of
U0-42 control panel ∧/∨ stored -1~1 0 ◎
value
Lower-bit numbers of
U0-43 control panel ∧/∨ stored 0.00~655.35 Hz 0.00Hz ◎
value
Higher-bit numbers of
U0-44 terminal UP/DOWN stored -1~1 0 ◎
value
Lower-bit numbers of
U0-45 terminal UP/DOWN stored 0.00~655.35 Hz 0.00Hz ◎
value
U0-46 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-47 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎

- 116 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
U0-48 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-49 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-50 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-51 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
Center FREQ of wobble
U0-52 0~600.00 Hz 0.00 Hz ◎
FREQ
U0-53 Initial position angle 0.0~6000.0 0.0 ◎
U0-54 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
U0-55 Reserved Reserved Reserved ◎
Group U1 History Fault
0: No fault
1: Accel overcurrent (oC1)
2: Constant-speed overcurrent (oC2)
3: Decel overcurrent (oC3)
4: Accel overvoltage (ov1)
5: Constant-speed overvoltage (ov2)
6: Decel overvoltage (ov3)
7: Module protection (FAL)
8: Autotuning failed (tUN)
9: Drive overloaded (oL1)
10: Motor overloaded (oL2)
11: Current detection abnormal (CtC)
12: Ground short-circuit protection at
output side (GdP)
13: Input power supply fault (ISF)
14: Phase loss at output side (oPL)
U1-00 History fault 1 (latest) 0 ◎
15: Inverter module overloaded (oL3)
16: Module overheated (oH1)
17: Motor overheated (PTC) (oH2)
18: Module temperature detection
disconnection (oH3)
19: Reserved
20: Abnormal option board
connection (EC1)
21: Reserved
22: Control board flat cable
connection abnormal (dLC)
23: Analog terminal functional mutex
(TEr)
24: External equipment malfunction
(PEr)
25: Reserved

- 117 -
Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
26: Continuous run time attained (to2)
27: Accumulative run time attained
(to3)
28: Power supply abnormal in running
(SUE)
29: EEPROM read/write fault (EPr)
30: Contactor close fault (CCL)
31: Port communication abnormal
(TrC)
32: Control panel communication
abnormal (PdC)
33: Parameter copy fault (CPy)
34: Reserved
35: Software version compatibility
fault (SFt)
36: CPU interference as a fault (CPU)
37: Overcurrent reference fault (oCr)
38: 5V power supply out-of-limit
(SP1)
39: 10V power supply out-of-limit
(SP1)
40: AI input out-of-limit (AIP)
41: Undervoltage protection (LoU)
42-44: Reserved
45: PID feedback loss (PIo)
46: Profibus communication
abnormal (PFS)
47: Syn. motor back EMF abnormal
(bEF)
U1-01 Run frequency at fault 1 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U1-02 Output current at fault 1 0.0A~6553.5A 0.0A ◎
U1-03 Bus voltage at fault 1 0V~1000V 0V ◎
Temperature 1 of heat sink
U1-04 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
at fault 1
Temperature 2 of heat sink
U1-05 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
at fault 1
Input terminal status at fault
U1-06 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
1
Output terminal status at
U1-07 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
fault 1
Cumulative run time at fault
U1-08 0h~65535h 0h ◎
1

- 118 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters

Factory
Parameter Designation Scope Attr
default
U1-09 Code of fault 2 Same as U1-00 0 ◎
U1-10 Run frequency at fault 2 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U1-11 Output current at fault 2 0.0A~6553.5A 0.0A ◎
U1-12 Bus voltage at fault 2 0V~1000V 0V ◎
Temperature 1 of heat
U1-13 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
sink at fault 2
Temperature 2 of heat
U1-14 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
sink at fault 2
Input terminal status at fault
U1-15 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
2
Output terminal status at
U1-16 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
fault 2
Cumulative run time at fault
U1-17 0h~65535h 0h ◎
2
U1-18 Code of fault 3 Same as U1-00 0 ◎
U1-19 Run frequency at fault 3 0.00Hz~600.00Hz 0.00Hz ◎
U1-20 Output current at fault 3 0.0A~6553.5A 0.0A ◎
U1-21 Bus voltage at fault 3 0V~1000V 0V ◎
Temperature 1 of heat
U1-22 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
sink at fault 3
Temperature 2 of heat
U1-23 -40.0℃~100.0℃ 0.0℃ ◎
sink at fault 3
Input terminal status at fault
U1-24 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
3
Output terminal status at
U1-25 0~FFFF 0000 ◎
fault 3
Cumulative run time at fault
U1-26 0h~65535h 0h ◎
3

- 119 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Group A System Parameters and Parameter Management

Group A0 System Parameters

Factory default:
A0-00 Setting of user password Range: 0~FFFF
0000

Setting of password:
A non-zero four-digital number could be set as a user password by entering this password into
A0-00 and pressing ENT key to confirm once, then reenter and reconfirm it once again within
10 seconds. Once this password has been successfully set, the word "P-SEt" would be
displayed. The password setting will take effect as long as there is no operation on control
panel within 5 minutes, or cutting the power off and power up again.
Change password:
Access A0-00 after entering the original four-digit password (at this point, A0-00 displays 0000)
and set the new password following the above-noted procedure.
Password clearance:
Access A0-00 after entering the original four-digit password (at this point, A0-00 displays 0000),
enter 0000 twice and press ENT key to make confirmation. In this way, password is
successfully cleared and the word "P-CLr" is displayed.

Factory default:
A0-01 Parameter display Range: 0~3
0

This parameter sets the display/hide of parameters.

0: Display all parameters (A1-20~A1-21 parameter display/hide is valid)
1: Only display A0-00 and A0-01
2: Only display A0-00, A0-01 and user-defined A1-00~A1-19
3: Only display A0-00, A0-01, and the parameters different from factory default

Factory default:
A0-02 Parameter protection Range: 0~1
0

0: All parameter programming allowed

1: Only A0-00 and this parameter programming allowed
When this parameter is set to 1, all parameters other than A0-00 and A0-02 are not allowed to
modify. Set A0-02 to 0 before the modification of other parameters.

- 120 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
A0-03 Parameter restoration Range: 0~4
0

0: No operation
1: Clear fault record
When this parameter is set to 1, all fault record of Group U1 will be cleared.
2: Restore all parameters to factory default (excluding motor parameters)
3: Restore all parameters to factory default (including motor parameters)
4: Restore all parameters to backup parameters

Factory default:
A0-04 Parameter backup Range: 0~1
0

0: No operation
1: Backup all parameters

Factory default:
A0-05 Parameter copy Range: 0~3
0

0: No operation
1: Upload all parameters other than Group U to control panel
2: Download all parameters of control panel other than d0-01~d0-18 and d3-01~d3-18 to drive
3: Download all parameters of control panel to drive

Factory default:
A0-06 Type of drive Range: 0~1
0

0: Type G (applicable to constant-torque load)

1: Type L (applicable to light-duty load like fan or pump)

Power supply type of Factory default:

A0-07 Range: 0~1
SMPS 0

0: Supplied by DC bus voltage of drive main circuit

The switching power supply inside the drive is supplied by DC bus voltage.
1: Supplied independently
The switching power supply inside the drive is not supplied by DC bus voltage, while it is
supplied by independent rectifier circuit or battery, and in such circumstance, option board
EPC-VD2 is required for detecting the DC bus voltage of main circuit. This setting is usually
for occasions that the work of drive control circuit cannot be stopped at power loss.

Motor 1 / motor 2 Factory default:

A0-08 Range: 0~1
selection 0

0: Motor 1
Selects the current loaded motor as motor 1. Set the parameters of motor 1 in parameter

- 121 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

groups d0~d2.
1: Motor 2
Selects the current loaded motor as motor 2. Set the parameters of motor 1 in parameter
groups d3~d5. The current loaded motor can also be selected through digital input terminal
"motor 1/2 switchover" as shown in Table 6-1:

Table 6-1
Motor 1/2 switchover
A0-08 Motor selection
terminal
0 OFF Motor 1
0 ON Motor 2
1 OFF Motor 2
1 ON Motor 1

Factory default:
A0-09 Motor control technique Range: 00~33
00

 Ones place: motor 1 control technique

0: V/f control
Constant Volt/Hertz ratio control: Applicable to such cases in which the performance
requirement to the drive is not rigorous, or using one drive to drive several motors, or it is
difficult to identify motor parameters correctly, etc. When motor 1 under V/f control is selected,
need to set related parameters group d1 well.
1: Sensor-less vector control 1
This helps achieve high-performance control without encoder and provides strong
adaptability of load. Under this selection, please correctly set motor parameters of Group d0
and vector control parameters of Group d2. Sensor-less vector control 1 is robust vector
control. If motor rotary autotuning is not able to be performed or permitted, sensor-less vector
control 1 performance would be relatively ideal than sensor-less vector control 2.
2: Sensor-less vector control 2
This helps achieve high-performance control without encoder. This control technique is
superior to sensor-less vector control 1. Under this selection, please correctly set motor
parameters of Group d0 and vector control parameters of Group d2. Sensor-less vector
control 2 is precise vector control and it requires motor rotary autotuning.
3: Synchronous motor sensor-less vector control
This helps achieve high-performance control of PMSM without encoder and provides strong
adaptability of load. Under this selection, please correctly set motor parameter of Group d0,
vector control parameter of Group d2 and PMSM sensor-less vector control auxiliary
parameter of Group F5.

- 122 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 Tens place: motor 2 control technique

0: V/f control
Constant Volt/Hertz ratio control: Applicable to such cases in which the performance
requirement to the drive is not rigorous, or using one drive to drive several motors, or it is
difficult to identify motor parameters correctly, etc. When motor 1 under V/f control is selected,
need to set related parameters group d4 well.
1: sensor-less vector control 1
This helps achieve high-performance control without encoder and provides strong
adaptability of load. Under this selection, please correctly set motor parameters of Group d3
and vector control parameters of Group d5. Sensor-less vector control 1 is robust vector
control. If motor rotary autotuning is not able to be performed or permitted, sensor-less vector
control 1 performance would be relatively ideal than sensor-less vector control 2.
2: Sensor-less vector control 2
This helps achieve high-performance control without encoder. This control technique is
superior to sensor-less vector control 1. Under this selection, please correctly set motor
parameters of Group d3 and vector control parameters of Group d5. Under this selection,
please correctly set motor parameters of Group d0 and vector control parameters of Group
d2. Sensor-less vector control 2 is precise vector control and it requires motor rotary
autotuning.
3: Synchronous motor sensor-less vector control
This helps achieve high-performance control of PMSM without encoder and provides strong
adaptability of load. Under this selection, please correctly set motor parameter of Group d3,
vector control parameter of Group d5 and PMSM sensor-less vector control auxiliary
parameter of Group F5.

 ATTENTION:
When vector control mode is selected, it is necessary to perform motor parameter
identification in order to obtain correct motor parameters before initial running. Upon the
completion of normal process of motor parameter identification, automatically acquired
motor parameters will be stored into drive for control operation during running.

It should be noted when vector control is selected that one drive can only be used to drive
one motor. The capacity gap between the drive and the motor should not be excessively big.
Added to this, the power of motor could be two classes lower or one class higher than its
matching drive. Failure to comply will be most likely to result in performance degradation or
abnormal working.

Group A1 User-defined Display Parameters

User-defined display Factory default:

A1-00 Range: A0-00~U1-26
parameter 1 A0-00

- 123 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:

A1-01
parameter 2 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-02
parameter 3 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-03
parameter 4 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-04
parameter 5 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-05
parameter 6 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-06
parameter 7 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-07
parameter 8 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-08
parameter 9 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-09
parameter 10 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-10
parameter 11 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-11
parameter 12 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-12
parameter 13 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-13
parameter 14 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-14
parameter 15 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-15
parameter 16 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-16
parameter 17 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-17
parameter 18 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-18
parameter 19 A0-00
User-defined display Range: A0-00~U1-26 Factory default:
A1-19
parameter 20 A0-00

A1-00~A1-19 set values would not take effect unless A0-01 is set to 2
Setting range of thousands place: A, b, C, d, E, F, H, L, U

- 124 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Setting range of hundreds place: 0~9;

Setting range of tens place: 0~9;
Setting range of ones place: 0~9.

Example:
To exclusively display parameters A0-00, A0-01, b0-01, E0-01 and F0-01, it is merely
necessary to set A1-00 to b0-01, A1-01 to E0-01, A1-02 to F0-01 and A1-03~A1-19 to A0-00
and then set A0-01 to 2.

Parameter group Factory default:

A1-20 Range: 0000~FFFF
display/hide setting 1 FFFF
Parameter group Factory default:
A1-21 Range: 0000~FFFF
display/hide setting 2 FFFF

When A0-01 is set to ‘0’ to display all parameters, only the parameters whose bit corresponding
to A1-20 and A1-21 is 1 can be displayed.

The parameters that correspond to bit 15 (the highest bit of binary system) ~ bit 0 (the lowest
bit of binary system) of A1-20 are shown as table 6-2.

Table 6-2
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
E0 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 b2 b1 b0

The parameters that correspond to bit 15 (the highest bit of binary system) ~ bit 0 (the lowest
bit of binary system) of A1-21 are shown as follows:

Table 6-3
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
U2 U1 U0 L1 L0 H2 H1 H0
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0 E1

 ATTENTION:
Parameters of Groups A0 and A1 are always displayed and are not subject to A1-20 and
A1-21 show/hide control.

Example:
Besides parameter Groups A0 and A1, the groups b0, b1, b2, C0, C1, C2, C3, d0, d1 and E1
are also requested to display, just set:

- 125 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

A1-20 to 037F (A1-20 is 0000 0011 0111 1111 in binary)

A1-21 to 0001 (A1-21 is 0000 0000 0000 0001 in binary)
Factory default:
A1-22 Fault masking Range: 00~FF
08
0～FF
Ones place: binary Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0
Set Bit place to 0 is to unmask, while set it to 1 is to mask
Bit0: GdP fault , Bit1: SP1 fault , Bit2: SP2 fault, Bit3: CPU fault
Tens place: binary Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0
Set Bit place to 0 is to unmask, while set it to 1 is to mask
Bit0: AIP fault, Bit1: OL3 fault, Bit2: oCR fault, Bit3: reserved

 ATTENTION:
For example: if GdP, SP1, SP2, and CPU faults need to be masked, then set ones place as
hexadecimal F (set binary Bit3Bit2Bit1Bit0 to 1), meaning of tens place is similar.

Group b Run Parameter Setting

Group b0 Frequency Setting

Frequency setting is set by parameter Group b0. See Fig. 6-1 for logical relation of FREQ set.

- 126 -
 b0-01 = ?
Digital setting (b0-02)+ control panel ∧/∨ 0
adjustment

Digital setting (b0-02)+ terminal UP/DOWN 1

adjustment
2
Analog input AI1

3
Analog input AI2
Computation option b0-07=? Freq setting b0-00=?
4 b0-02
GK620 User Manual

Analog input EAI 1

+ 0 0
5 Freq master
0
X6/DI pulse input setting
+
6 “Master freq setting switched to digital setting b0-
Process PID control PID output 02”terminal
1
7
PLC freq control PLC output

Multi-step speed 8
Multi-step freq control Freq setting switch terminal
output
9 0
Communication + 1 Xi 2
-
1
b0-03 = ?

- 127 -
“Auxiliary freq setting switched to digital setting b0-
No setting，output is 0 04”terminal 0
Xi 3
Digital setting (b0-04)+control panel ∧/∨ 1 0
adjustment Auxiliary freq
2 b0-04 setting 1
Digital command (b0-04)+ terminal UP/DOWN 1 2
adjustment Max{master freq setting，auxiliary freq
setting}
3
Analog input AI1 b0-08 maximum
freq 0
4 0 1 Xi 4
Analog input AI2 b0-05 = ? AuxFreqMax
5 ×b0-06
Analog input EAI Y axis 1
6 AuxFreqMax
X6/DI pulse input Jog freq
X
axis 3
7 Min{master freq setting，auxiliary freq
Process PID control PID output setting} Jog
8 - AuxFreqMax enabled/disabled

PLC freq setting Linear computation of X

PLC output axis and Y axis. Y axis
9 outputs auxiliary freq 1 0
Multi-step speed setting
Multi-step freq control
output
10
Communication

Freq final setting

Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Fig. 6-1
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory default:
b0-00 Frequency set mode Range: 0~4
0

0: Master FREQ set

Output frequency of drive is determined by master frequency set source b0-01. Refer to
parameters b0-01 and b0-02 for further information.
1: Master & auxiliary computation result
Frequency set is the result of master & auxiliary computation. The master & auxiliary
computation relation is determined by b0-07. Master frequency is set by b0-01, while
auxiliary is set by b0-03.
2: Switch between master and auxiliary set
When b0-00 is set to 2, the switch between master frequency set, and auxiliary frequency set
can be realized through digital input terminal "frequency set switchover". When terminal
"frequency set switchover" is invalid, frequency set of the drive will be determined by b0-01.
When terminal "frequency set switchover" is valid, frequency set of the drive will be
determined by b0-03 (Auxiliary frequency set source).
3: Switch between master FREQ set, and master & auxiliary computation result
When b0-00 is set to 3, frequency is determined by master frequency set, or master &
auxiliary computation result through digital input terminal "frequency set switchover". When
terminal "frequency set switchover" is invalid, frequency is determined by b0-01 (master
frequency set source). When terminal "frequency set switchover" is valid, frequency is
determined by master & auxiliary computation result. The master & auxiliary computation
relation is determined by b0-07.
4: Switch between auxiliary FREQ set, and master & auxiliary computation result
When b0-00 is set to 4, frequency is determined by auxiliary frequency set, or master &
auxiliary computation result through digital input terminal “frequency set switchover”. When
terminal "frequency set switchover" is invalid, frequency is determined by b0-03 (auxiliary
frequency set source). When terminal "frequency set switchover" is valid, frequency is
determined by master & auxiliary computation result. The master & auxiliary computation
relation is determined by b0-07.

Factory default:
b0-01 Master frequency set Range: 0~9
0

0: Digital setting (b0-02) + ∧/∨ adjustment on control panel

When the drive is powered up, the value of b0-02 is taken as the master frequency set which
can be adjusted through ∧/∨ keys on control panel no matter the drive is running or in
stop.

- 128 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
Frequency adjustment via ∧/∨ on control panel can be cleared through terminal "UP/DOWN
(including ∧/∨ key) adjustment clear " . Refer to C0-01~C0-10 for details.

1: Digital setting (b0-02) + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment

When the drive is powered up, the value of b0-02 is taken as the master frequency set. This
frequency can be adjusted via “terminal UP” and “terminal DOWN” no matter the drive is
running or in stop.

When this parameter value is selected, following parameter setting should be performed:
1) Set the two digital input terminals to "terminal UP" and "terminal DOWN" respectively.
Refer to C0-01~C0-10 for further information.
2) Set terminal UP/DOWN frequency change step size (C0-18).
3) Set C0-17 (terminal UP/DOWN frequency adjustment treatment).

 ATTENTION:
Frequency adjustment via terminal UP and DOWN can be cleared through terminal "UP/DOWN
(including ∧/∨ key) adjustment clear" . Refer to C0-01~C0-10 for details.

2: Analog input AI1

(0~10V) voltage input and (0~20mA) current input are optional for AI1, which can be selected
using jumper switch S2 on control board. It is shown as Figure 6-2.

S1 S2 S3
485 AI1 AO1
ON I I

OFF V V

Fig. 6-2
Refer to specification of C2-00~C2-20 for corresponding relation between analog input and
output frequency. See parameter Group C4 for automatic correction of analog input.
3: Analog input AI2
AI2 input is the -10V~+10V voltage input, and the plus/minus of voltage determines the motor
running direction. Refer to detailed description of C2-00~C2-20 for corresponding relation
between analog value and frequency value. See parameters of Group C4 for automatic
correction of analog input.
4: Analog input EAI (on IO option board)
Terminal EAI is located at IO option board, supporting 0~10V voltage input and 0~20mA
current input. It can be used with the same way as AI1. When using external voltage/current
analog input to the drive, the connection diagram is shown as Fig. 6-3:

- 129 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

AI1 Input
`
AI1
AI2 Input
Drive AI2

GND

Fig. 6-3

If 10V power supply inside the drive is used with potentiometer, the connection diagram is
shown as Fig. 6-4. Note that the jumper switch should be switched to voltage input side.

+10V
Drive Adjustable
AI (i) Resistor
（i=1,2）
GND

Fig. 6-4

5: X6/DI pulse input

If this parameter value is selected, frequency is determined by pulse frequency input via
terminal X6/DI only. In such a case, C0-06 should be set to 24. Corresponding relation
between pulse frequency and frequency set is specified in C2-24~C2-27.
6: Process PID output
Frequency is set by process closed-loop PID computation result. See parameter Group F0
for details.
7: PLC
Frequency is set by simple PLC. See parameter Group F2 for details.
8: Multi-step speed
A total of 16-step speed settings can be realized through status combination of "multi-step
frequency terminal 1~4". See the table below for details. Frequency can be switched via
different combination of multi-step frequency terminals no matter in running or in stop.

- 130 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Table 6-4

Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step

frequency frequency frequency frequency Frequency Setting
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
Multi-step frequency 0
OFF OFF OFF OFF
(F1-00)
Multi-step frequency 1
OFF OFF OFF ON
(F1-01)
Multi-step frequency 2
OFF OFF ON OFF
(F1-04)
Multi-step frequency 3
OFF OFF ON ON
(F1-05)
Multi-step frequency 4
OFF ON OFF OFF
(F1-06)
Multi-step frequency 5
OFF ON OFF ON
(F1-07)
Multi-step frequency 6
OFF ON ON OFF
(F1-08)
Multi-step frequency 7
OFF ON ON ON
(F1-09)
Multi-step frequency 8
ON OFF OFF OFF
(F1-10)
Multi-step frequency 9
ON OFF OFF ON
(F1-11)
Multi-step frequency 10
ON OFF ON OFF
(F1-12)
Multi-step frequency 11
ON OFF ON ON
(F1-13)
Multi-step frequency 12
ON ON OFF OFF
(F1-14)
Multi-step frequency 13
ON ON OFF ON
(F1-15)
Multi-step frequency 14
ON ON ON OFF
(F1-16)
Multi-step frequency 15
ON ON ON ON
(F1-17)

9: Communication
Upper computer/device is the master frequency set source of the drive through standard
RS485 communication interface on the drive.

refer to Group H0 and appendix on this manual for further information about communication
protocol, and programming, etc.

- 131 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 ATTENTION:
Master frequency can be forcibly switched to b0-02 via terminal "master frequency switched
to digital setting b0-02". When this terminal is disabled, master frequency is determined by
b0-01. When terminal is enabled, master frequency shall be the value of b0-02.

Master FREQ digital Range: lower limit frequency ~ Factory default:

b0-02
setting upper limit frequency 50.00Hz

When master frequency setting b0-01 value is set to either 0 or 1, this parameter value will be
the initial value of master frequency setting.

Factory default:
b0-03 Auxiliary FREQ set Range: 0~10
0

0: No setting
Auxiliary frequency command is disabled, and auxiliary frequency is 0.
1: Digital setting (b0-04) + ∧/∨ adjustment on control panel
When the drive is powered up, the value of b0-04 is auxiliary frequency command, also can
be adjusted through ∧/∨ on control panel no matter the drive is running or in stop status.

 ATTENTION:
When master frequency command involves ∧/∨ adjustment on control panel, ∧/∨
involving auxiliary frequency command shall be disabled.

2: digital setting (b0-04) + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment

When the drive is powered up, the value of b0-04 is current auxiliary frequency command.
Whether the drive is running or stopped, current auxiliary frequency setting can be adjusted
through digital input terminals "UP" and "DOWN”. Just set “terminal UP/DOWN frequency
adjustment treatment” and “terminal UP/DOWN frequency change step size” through C0-17
and C0-18.

 ATTENTION:
When master frequency setting involves terminal UP/DOWN adjustment, UP/DOWN adjustment
involving auxiliary frequency setting shall be disabled.

3: Analog input AI1

4: Analog input AI2
5: Analog input EAI (on IO option board)
AI1 and EAI can be either (0~10V) voltage input or (0~20mA) current input which can be
switched by the jumper switch on control board or IO option board. AI2 input is -10V~+10V
input only, and the plus/minus of the voltage determines the motor running direction.

- 132 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
When analog input channel of auxiliary frequency set is the same with that of master
frequency set, analog input channel of auxiliary frequency set would be disabled. See b0-05
and b0-06 for information, about frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of
analog input of auxiliary frequency .

6: X6/DI pulse input

Auxiliary frequency command is determined by pulse frequency via terminal X6/DI only. In
such a case, set X6/DI terminal to "pulse input"(set C0-06 to 24). Refer to C2-24~C2-27 for
corresponding relationship between pulse frequency and command frequency.

 ATTENTION:
In case X6/DI pulse input is also set for master frequency command source, the pulse input
for auxiliary frequency command shall be disabled. See b0-05 and b0-06 for information
about frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of pulse input for auxiliary
frequency command.

7: Process PID output

Auxiliary frequency setting is determined by process PID computation result. See parameter
Group F0 for details.

 ATTENTION:
In case PID output is also set for master frequency setting, the process PID output for
auxiliary frequency setting would be disabled. See b0-05 and b0-06 for information about
frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of process PID output for auxiliary
frequency setting.

8: PLC
Auxiliary frequency setting is determined by simple PLC. See parameter Group F2 for
details.

 ATTENTION:
In case simple PLC program output is also set for master frequency setting, the PLC for
auxiliary frequency setting would be disabled.

9: Multi-step speed
A total of 16-step speed settings can be realized through status combination of "multi-step
frequency terminal 1~4". Frequency setting can be switched via different combination of
multi-step frequency terminals no matter in running or in stop.

 ATTENTION:
In case master frequency setting is also set to multi-step speed, the multi-step speed output
for auxiliary frequency setting would be disabled.

- 133 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

10: Communication
Upper computer is the auxiliary frequency set source of the drive through standard RS485
communication interface on the drive. Refer to Group H0 and appendix on this manual for
further information about communication protocol, and programming, etc.

 ATTENTION:
Auxiliary frequency setting can be forcibly switched to b0-04 via terminal "auxiliary
frequency setting switched to digital setting b0-04". When this terminal is disabled, master
frequency setting is determined by b0-03. When terminal is enabled, master frequency
setting shall be the value of b0-04.

Auxiliary FREQ digital Range: lower limit frequency ~ Factory default:

b0-04
setting upper limit frequency 0.00Hz

When auxiliary frequency command is set to either 1 or 2, this parameter value should be the
initial value of auxiliary frequency command.

b0-05 Auxiliary FREQ range Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Relative to maximum frequency

1: Relative to master frequency
See b0-06 specification for details.

Factory default:
b0-06 Auxiliary FREQ coeff Range: 0.0%~100.0%
100.0%

When b0-03 selects AI1, AI2, EAI, X6/DI pulse input, or process PID output as auxiliary
frequency command sources, b0-05 and b0-06 will determine the final output value of auxiliary
frequency command.

When b0-05 is set to 0 (relative to maximum frequency): When AI1, AI2, EAI, X6/DI pulse input
is selected for auxiliary frequency command, the frequency that corresponds to maximum
value of the source should be (b0-08×b0-06).

Example:
Select AI1 as auxiliary frequency command source (set b0-03 to 3) and set AI1 to curve 1
(Ones place of C2-00 is 0) as shown in Fig. 6-5. In such a case, the frequency that corresponds
to the maximum input of curve 1 should be: (C2-02) × [(b0-08) × (b0-06)].

- 134 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Corresponding
对应设定值set value

Set value that corresponds to

曲线1最大输入对应
maximum input of curve 1
设定值（C2-02）
(C2-02)

Set value that corresponds to

minimum input of curve 1
曲线1最小输入对应
(C2-04)
设定值（C2-04）
AI analog
AI模拟量
Minimum
曲线1最小输入input of Maximum
曲线1最大输入
curve 1 (C2-03)
（C2-03） input of curve
（C2-01）
1 (C2-01)
Fig. 6-5
When X6/DI pulse input is selected as auxiliary frequency command (set b0-03 to 6), the
frequency that corresponds to maximum DI input should be: (C2-25) × [(b0-08) × (b0-06)].
When PID is selected for auxiliary frequency command, the frequency that corresponds to
maximum value of PID output should be (b0-08) × (b0-06). PID output diagrammatic sketch is
as shown in Fig. 6-6.
Frequency output

PID output
Maximum value

Fig. 6-6

When b0-05 is set to 1 (relative to master frequency): When AI1, AI2, EAI, or X6/DI pulse input
is selected for auxiliary frequency command source, the frequency that corresponds to
maximum value of these sources should be: [master frequency × (b0-06)].

Example:
When selecting AI1 as auxiliary frequency command source (set b0-03 to 3) and setting AI1 to
curve 1 (Ones place of C2-00 is 0), the frequency that corresponds to maximum input of curve
1 should be: (C2-02) × [master frequency × (b0-06)].

When X6/DI pulse input is selected as auxiliary frequency command source (set b0-03 to 6),
the frequency that corresponds to maximum DI input should be: (C2-25) × [master frequency ×
(b0-06)].

When PID is selected for auxiliary frequency command, the frequency that corresponds to
maximum value of PID output should be [master frequency × (b0-06)]. PID output diagram is as
shown in Fig. 6-7.

- 135 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Frequency output
Master command
value × (b0-06)

PID output
Maximum value

Fig. 6-7

Computation of master
b0-07 Range: 0~3 Factory default: 0
and auxiliary FREQ

0: Master + auxiliary
The sum of master and auxiliary frequency is taken as frequency command. Output result is
subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency.
1: Master - auxiliary
The difference between master and auxiliary frequency is taken as frequency command.
Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency.
2: Max {master, auxiliary}
Master frequency or auxiliary frequency (whichever has a larger absolute value) is taken as
frequency command. Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency.
3: Min {master, auxiliary}
Master frequency or auxiliary frequency (whichever has a smaller absolute value) is taken as
frequency command. Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency.

Range: Upper limit frequency Factory default:

b0-08 Maximum frequency
~600.00Hz 50.00Hz
Range: Lower limit frequency ~ Factory default:
b0-09 Upper limit frequency
maximum frequency 50.00Hz
Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-10 Lower limit frequency
frequency 0.00Hz

Maximum frequency of b0-08 is the maximum allowable output frequency of drive and is
indicated by fmax in the figure.

B0-09 upper limit frequency is the user-defined maximum allowable run frequency and
represented by fH in Fig. 6-8.

B0-10 lower limit frequency is user-defined minimum allowable run frequency and marked with
fL in Fig. 6-8. In Fig. 6-8, fN represents rated frequency of motor while VN means the rated
voltage of motor.

- 136 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Output voltage

Output frequency

Fig. 6-8

 ATTENTION:
 Maximum frequency, upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency should be set with care
in accordance with nameplate parameters of motor and operation requirements.
 Jog and motor parameter identification is free from limitations of upper and lower limit frequency.
 In addition to limitation of upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency, the output frequency is
also subject to limitations of starting frequency, stop DC brake initial frequency, skip frequency
and other parameter settings.
 The rank relation between maximum frequency, upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency
is shown as Fig. 6-8.
 Upper and lower limit frequencies restrict actual output frequency to motor. If command
frequency is higher than upper limit frequency, the running would be at upper limit frequency. In
case command frequency is lower than lower limit frequency, the running should be in
accordance with the setting of b0-11.

Operation when set FREQ lower

b0-11 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0
than lower limit FREQ

0: Run at lower limit frequency

In case frequency setting is lower than lower limit frequency, the run should be at lower limit
frequency.
1: Run at 0Hz
In case the frequency setting is lower than lower limit frequency, the run should be at 0Hz.
2: Stop
If frequency setting is lower than lower limit frequency, stop would be activated after the time
delay set by b0-12. When lower limit frequency is 0, this limitation is invalid.

 ATTENTION:
This parameter is disabled under PID control mode.

- 137 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Time-delay of stop when set

Factory default:
b0-12 FREQ lower than lower limit Range: 0.0s~6553.5s
0.0s
FREQ

When b0-11 is set to 2, and frequency setting is lower than lower limit frequency, the drive will
stop running after this parameter value.

Lower limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-13
band 1 frequency 0.00Hz
Upper limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-14
band 1 frequency 0.00Hz
Lower limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-15
band 2 frequency 0.00Hz
Upper limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-16
band 2 frequency 0.00Hz
Lower limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-17
band 3 frequency 0.00Hz
Upper limit of skip FREQ Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:
b0-18
band 3 frequency 0.00Hz

Skip frequency is a function designed to prevent the drive run at resonance zone of mechanical
system. At most 3 skip zones can be defined. See Fig. 6-9.
Frequency after adjustment

Skip frequency band 3

Skip frequency band 2

Skip frequency band 1

Frequency setting

Fig. 6-9

Once parameters of skip zones are set, the output frequency of the drive would automatically
get out of these skip zones even if the frequency setting is within these zones.

 ATTENTION:
Output frequency of drive can normally pass through skip zones during Accel and Decel.

Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:

b0-19 Jog frequency
frequency 5.00Hz

This parameter sets the running frequency during jog. Jog Accel time is set by parameter b2-10
while its Decel time by parameter b2-11. Jog run command control could be performed through

- 138 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

control panel, control terminals or communication input. Multifunction MF key can be set as
forward jog or reverse jog key through parameter L0-00.

Jog can be realized using "forward jog terminal” and "reverse jog terminal” of DI, as well as via
communication input. See drive communication protocol for further information. See Jog
diagrammatic sketch 6-10.

Run frequency

Time

Fig. 6-10

Thereof:
f1 is jog frequency b0-19. t1 represents the Accel time from zero to jog frequency, t1 = (b2-10) ×
f1/(b0-08). b0-08 is the maximum frequency. t2 is the Decel time from jog frequency to 0, t2 =
(b2-11) × f1/(b0-08).

 ATTENTION:
Jog frequency set value is free from limitations of upper and lower limit frequency. Jog is
started from starting frequency and its start is not subject to limitation by b1-05. When the
jog frequency is set smaller than starting frequency, the drive will run at 0Hz.
Zero clearing when
b0-20 master and auxiliary Range: 0～1 Factory default:0
FREQ is switching
0~1
0: zero clearing
1: No zero clearing

Group b1 Start/Stop Control

b1-00 Run command Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

This parameter sets run command source. Run commands include "start, stop, forward and
reverse", etc.
0: Control panel control
Control run command through RUN, STOP/RESET and MF keys on control panel (set
multifunction key MF to JOG by L0-00). Refer to Chapter 4 about the operation of control
panel.

- 139 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

1: Terminal control
Control run command via DI terminals. Perform FORWARD and REVERSE by DI terminals.
The control mode is two-wire mode and three-wire mode selectable. See Group C0 for
details of designation and wiring regulation of DI terminals.
2: Communication control
Master device is able to control run command through built-in RS485 serial communication
interface of drive. Refer to parameters Group H0 and appendix for further information about
programming.

Run command from control panel, terminals and communication can be switched by terminals
"run command switched to control panel control", "run command switched to terminal control"
and "run command switched to communication control".

Multifunction key MF can be set to "run command sources shifted" key through parameter
L0-00. When MF key is pressed under this setting, run command will be shifted during control
panel control, terminal control and communication control circularly.

Binding of run command Factory default:

b1-01 Range: 000 ~ AAA
and frequency set 000
This parameter defines the bundled combination of three run command sources and frequency
set with the purpose of facilitating simultaneous switching. For example: frequency setting AI1
(ones place of b1-01 is set to 3) bundled with control panel control, while the frequency setting
X6/DI pulse input (ten's place of b1-01 is set to 6) bundled with terminal control. In such a case,
when run command is controlled by control panel, frequency setting would be AI1, while when
run command is controlled via terminals, frequency setting will be automatically switched to
X6/DI pulse input.
 Ones place: frequency setting bundled under control panel control
0: No binding
1: Digital setting (b0-02) + ∧/∨ adjustment on control panel
2: Digital setting (b0-02) + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment
3: Analog input AI1
4:Aanalog input AI2
5: Analog input EAI (on IO option board)
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Simple PLC
9: Multi-step frequency
A: Communication input
Refer to parameter b0-01 for details regarding above-mentioned sources of frequency setting.
 Tens place: frequency setting bundled under terminal control (same as ones place)
 Hundreds place: frequency setting bundled under communication control (same as ones
place)

- 140 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
Different run command sources can be bundled with the same frequency setting source. The
priority of frequency setting sources bundled with run command overrides Group b0.

b1-02 Run direction Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

This parameter applies to run command controlled by control panel, and disabled under
terminal and communication control.
0: Forward
1: Reverse

b1-03 Reverse disabled Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
In some applications, reverse is likely to result in equipment damage. This parameter is used to
prevent reverse running.

Dead time between Factory default:

b1-04 Range: 0.0s ~ 3600.0s
forward and reverse 0.0s

The dead time in 0Hz output during the transition from forward to reverse, or from reverse to
forward, is indicated by letter "t" in Fig. 6-11.

Output frequency

Time

Fig. 6-11 Dead time between forward and reverse

b1-05 Start method Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0

This parameter takes effect during the process of transition from stop status to run status.
0: From start frequency
When drive starts to run from stop status, it starts from start frequency (b1-06) and keeps this
frequency for a period of time set by b1-07, and then accelerated to set frequency in
accordance with the Accel method and time.
1: DC braking start
To make the motor stop completely before a new start, the drive will perform DC braking with
a certain period of time, as specified by b1-08 and b1-09, then start from start frequency

- 141 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

(b1-06), keeping a period of time as specified by b1-07, and then Accelerate to set frequency.
2: Flying start 1
3: Flying start 2
4: Flying start 3
5: Flying start 4
When this parameter is set to 2 or 3, the drive will detect the motor rotary speed in order to
perform a smooth start from the detected rotary speed. This start method is applicable to the
restart on momentary power loss, like rotating fan, etc. When this parameter value is set to
flying start 1, motor parameters and b1-10~b1-12 needs to be set correctly and appropriately.
When it is set to flying start 2, option board EPC-VD2 must be required. In general, for motor
restart, flying start 2 is much smoother then flying start 1, as it has the assistance of option
board EPC-VD2.
When the parameter is set to 3 or 4, please correctly set motor parameter of b1-10 ~ b1-12.
There is no need of EPC-VD2 board, with high robustness, and insensitive to motor
parameter. Flying start 4 has a higher accuracy, which is a more commonly used mode for
software speed search.

Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:

b1-06 Start FREQ
frequency 0.00Hz
Holding time of start Factory default:
b1-07 Range: 0.0s ~ 3600.0s
FREQ 0.0s

Start frequency is initial output frequency of drive start from stop status. Start frequency holding
time is the continuous run time with start frequency. After this holding time, the drive will
Accelerate to set frequency. Usually appropriate start frequency and holding time assure the
starting torque of heavy-duty load.

Provided that set frequency is lower than start frequency, drive output frequency is 0 Hz. Start
frequency and start frequency holding time take effect at the moment of motor start, as well as the
transfer between forward and reverse. Accel time at Group b2 excludes the holding time of start
frequency.

DC braking current at Factory default:

b1-08 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
start 0.0%
Factory default:
b1-09 DC braking time at start Range: 0.00s~30.00s
0.00s

When the motor is started by the method "DC braking start", it is essential to set these two
parameters.100% corresponds to rated current of drive. If braking time is set to 0.0s, DC
braking at start is disabled.

Factory default:
b1-10 Flying start 1 current Range: 0~200.0%
100.0%

- 142 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

When b1-05 is set to 2, flying start 1 current should be set appropriately. 100% corresponds to
drive rated current. When drive output current is less than this parameter value, it is deemed
that drive output frequency is the same as motor speed and the flying operation is finished.

Factory default:
b1-11 Flying start 1 Decel time Range: 0.1s~20.0s
2.0s

This parameter takes effect when b1-05 is set to 2, flying start 1.This time setting refers to the
time drive deceleration from maximum frequency to 0. The shorter the flying start Decel time is,
the faster the flying start will be. However, excessively rapid flying start brings about inaccuracy
of flying start.

Flying start 1 adjustment Factory default:

b1-12 Range: 0.0~100.0%
coeff 1.0%

When the start method is set to flying start (b1-05=2 or 3), a suitable flying start adjustment
coeff can suppress the output current during the process of flying start thus improve the
smoothness of flying start.

b1-13 Stop method Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

0: Ramp to stop
Upon the receipt of stop command, drive gradually decreases output frequency according to
the set Decel time, and stop when frequency attains 0.
1: Coast to stop
Upon the receipt of stop command, drive will immediately lock the output and the motor will
stop with its mechanical inertia.
2: Ramp to stop + DC brake
Upon the receipt of stop command, drive will decrease output frequency in accordance with
the rate of Decel time setting. Once the output frequency attains set value of b1-14, DC
braking will be enabled, and the drive will stop after the finish of DC braking.

Start frequency of DC Range: 0.00Hz ~ upper limit Factory default:

b1-14
brake stop frequency 0.00Hz
Factory default:
b1-15 DC brake current Range: 0.0%~200.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
b1-16 DC Brake time Range: 0.00s~30.00s
0.00s

During the process “ramp to stop + DC braking", DC brake would be started when output
frequency attains the set value of b1-14. b1-15 defines brake level, in amps, applied to the
motor. 100% corresponds to rated current of drive. b1-16 sets the duration of time that DC
brake current works when b1-13 is set to 2. In case b1-16 is set to 0.0s, DC brake shall be
disabled.

- 143 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

If "DC brake stop" terminal is enabled, this terminal time duration or b1-16 set time, whichever
is longer, would be taken as stop brake time.

b1-17 Overexcitation brake Range: 0~1 Factory default: 1

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When overexcitation brake is enabled in case of stop by Decel, the motor shall transform the
electric energy generated during Decel into heat energy by increasing magnetic flux so as to
attain rapid stop. If this parameter is enabled, the Decel time will be shortened. If
overexcitation brake is disabled, the Decel current of motor will decrease and the Decel time
will be prolonged.

b1-18 Dynamic brake Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When dynamic brake is enabled, the electric energy generated during Decel shall be
converted into heat energy consumed by brake resistor, so as to attain rapid Decel. This
brake method applies to brake of high-inertia load or the situations that require quick stop. In
such a case, it is necessary to select appropriate dynamic brake resistor and brake unit. The
drives equal and below 15kW are provided with a standard built-in brake unit. Built-in brake
chopper is optional for drives 18.5kW~75kW.
No matter built-in brake or external mounted brake is used, when dynamic brake is adopted ,
b1-18 shall be set to 1.

Dynamic brake Factory default:

b1-19 Range: 650V~750V
threshold voltage 720V

This parameter takes effect only to the drives with built-in brake chopper. If b1-18 is set to 1:
when bus voltage of drive attains the value of b1-19, dynamic brake shall perform. The energy
shall be rapidly consumed through brake resistor. This value is used to regulate the brake
effect of brake chopper.

Auto restart when power up

b1-20 Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
again after power loss
Defines the drive status when power up again after power loss during running
0: Disabled
The drive will not run automatically when power is up after power loss.
1: Enabled.
When run command is controlled by control panel or communication, the drive will run
automatically when power is up again after power loss. When run command is controlled by
terminals, the drive will run automatically only if ON signal from run command terminal is
detected.

- 144 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
Enable this parameter with caution for safety consideration.

Time delay of auto restart Factory default:

b1-21 Range: 0.0s~10.0s
when power up again 0.0s

This time setting should consider work restoration time of relative devices in the system when
power is up again after power loss, on the premise that b1-20 is set to 1.

Group b2 Accel/Decel Parameters

Accel/Decel time
b2-00 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1
resolution

0: 0.01s; the setting range of Accel/Decel time is 0.00s~600.00s

1: 0.1s; the setting range of Accel/Decel time is 0.0s~6000.0s
2: 1s; the setting range of Accel/Decel time is 0s~60000s
Accel/Decel time resolution takes effect on b2-01~b2-11.

Factory default:
b2-01 Accel time 1 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-02 Decel time 1 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-03 Accel time 2 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-04 Decel time 2 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-05 Accel time 3 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-06 Decel time 3 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-07 Accel time 4 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-08 Decel time 4 Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s

These parameters b2-01~b2-08 set the rate of Accel/Decel for speed increase/decrease.

Maximum Freq (b0-08) / Accel time X = Accel Rate X

Maximum Freq (b0-08) / Decel time X = Decel Rate X

- 145 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

As the formula sets forth above, Accel time means required time for drive to Accelerate to
maximum frequency b0-08 from zero frequency, while Decel time refers to the time required for
drive to Decelerate to zero frequency from maximum frequency b0-08. These four Accel/Decel
times can be selected through the ON/OFF combination of DI terminals" Accel/Decel time
determinant 1" and " Accel/Decel time determinant 2". See Table 6-5.
Table 6-5

Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time

Accel/Decel time
determinant 2 determinant 1
OFF OFF Accel/Decel time 1(b2-01, b2-02)
OFF ON Accel/Decel time 2(b2-03, b2-04)
ON OFF Accel/Decel time 3(b2-05, b2-06)
ON ON Accel/Decel time 4(b2-07, b2-08)

 ATTENTION:
 When the drive is running under simple PLC, the Accel time and Decel time are determined
by simple PLC related parameters, not by the DI terminals. See Group F2 for details.
 When Accel/Decel of broken-line style is selected, Accel/Decel time is automatically
switched to Accel/Decel time 1 and 2 according to switching frequency (b2-13 and b2-14).
Under this circumstance, Accel/Decel time selection terminals are disabled.

Decel time for Factory default:

b2-09 Range: 0s~60000s
emergency stop 6.0s

In case of emergency stop via multifunction MF key on control panel (MF key has been set to
emergency stop 1 through parameter L0-00), or via DI terminal "emergency stop", Decel is
conducted according to this time. This parameter sets the rate of Decel for speed decrease,
like b2-01~b2-08.

Factory default:
b2-10 Jog Accel time Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s
Factory default:
b2-11 Jog Decel time Range: 0s~60000s
6.0s

b2-10 and b2-11 set the rate of Jog Accel/Decel, like b2-01~b2-08.

b2-12 Accel/Decel curve Range: 0~4 Factory default: 0

0: Linear Accel/Decel
Outputs frequency increases or decreases with a constant rate as shown in Fig. 6-12.

- 146 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Output frequency

Time

Accel time Decel time

Fig. 6-12

fmax is maximum frequency b0-08.

1: Broken-line Accel/Decel
Accel/Decel time is shifted based on output frequency during Accel/Decel. When output
frequency during Accel is higher than or equal to b2-13 (Accel time switching frequency of
broken-line Accel/Decel), b2-01 (Accel time 1) is enabled. When lower than b2-13, b2-03
(Accel time 2) will be enabled.

When output frequency during Decel is higher than or equal to b2-14 (Decel time switching
frequency of broken-line Accel/Decel), b2-02 (Decel time 1) is enabled. When lower than b2-14,
b2-04 (Decel time 2) will be enabled.

 ATTENTION:
When broken-line Accel/Decel is enabled, "Accel/Decel time determinant 1" and
" Accel/Decel time determinant 2" will be disabled.

Broken-line Accel/Decel is as shown in Fig. 6-13.

Output frequency

Time

Accel time Accel time Decel time Decel time

Fig. 6-13

t1 = (b2-03)×(b2-13)/(b0-08) t2 =(b2-01)×[f-(b2-13)]/(b0-08)
t3 = (b2-02)×[f-(b2-14)]/(b0-08) t4 = (b2-04)×(b2-14)/(b0-08)
f is current frequency set, and b0-08 is maximum frequency.

- 147 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

2: S-curve Accel/Decel A
By adding a period of S-curve time to the first and last segments of Accel/Decel, it can
improve the smoothness of start/stop and prevent mechanical impact. See Fig. 6-14:
Output frequency

Linear
Accel

Time

Fig. 6-14

Accel/Decel rate changes gradually at the first and last segments of S-curve time. At the middle
segment of S-curve, it is linear Accel/Decel rate, which is determined by enabled Accel/Decel
time 1~4. Therefore, the actual Accel/Decel time is longer than linear Accel/Decel if this
parameter value is selected.

Actual Accel time = linear Accel time + (Time of first segment of Accel S-curve
+ Time of last segment of Accel S-curve)/2
Actual Decel time = linear Decel time + (Time of first segment of Decel S-curve + Time of last
segment of Decel S-curve)/2

Example:
Assuming that the maximum frequency b0-08 is 50Hz and the Accel time set is 6s, the linear
Accel time from initial status 10Hz to 40Hz = 6s × (40Hz-10Hz)/50Hz = 3.6s

Assuming b2-15 = 0.20s and b2-16 = 0.40s, the actual Accel time under “S-curve Accel/Decel
A” = 3.6s + (0.20s + 0.40s)/2 = 3.9s.

ATTENTION:
Provided the above-noted calculated linear Accel time is less than (Time of first segment of
Accel S-curve + Time of last segment of Accel S-curve)/2, there will not be linear part. Decel
is the same as above.

3: S-curve Accel/Decel B
Schematic diagram is shown as Fig. 6-15:

- 148 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Output frequency

Linear
Accel

Time

Fig. 6-15

S-curve time at first segment of Accel is (b2-19×t1) in the figure, in which the Accel rate
increases progressively. In this period, the S-curve time at last segment is (b2-20×t1) and the
Accel rate decreases gradually. At the middle of t1, it is linear Accel with a constant rate which
is adjusted automatically based on the setting of b2-19 and b2-20.

Decel period t2 is similar as above.

Make sure the sum of proportions of the first and last segments is no more than 100%, i.e. the
sum of set values of b2-19 and b2-20 should not exceed 100.0%, while that of b2-21 and b2-22
should not exceed 100%.

Example:
Assuming that the maximum frequency b0-08 is 50Hz and the Accel time setting is 6s, the
linear Accel time required for Accel from initial status 10Hz to 40Hz = 6s × (40Hz-10Hz)/50Hz =
3.6s

Assuming that b2-19 = 20.0% and b2-20 = 30.0%, The first segment of Accel S-curve should
be 20.0% × 3.6s = 0.72s; last segment of Accel S-curve should be 30.0% × 3.6s = 1.08s; linear
Accel time at middle segment should be 3.6s - 0.72s - 1.08s = 1.8s.

Difference between S-curve Accel/Decel A and B: Middle-segment Accel/Decel rate of S-curve

Accel/Decel A is determined by the selected Accel/Decel time 1~4, not subject to the effect of
S-curve time span, therefore the total Accel/Decel time changes with the variation of setting of
S-curve time.

When some certain Accel/Decel time is selected for S-curve Accel/Decel B, the total time of
Accel/Decel is constant, but with different proportion of the first part and the last part, the rate of
linear part as well as the shape of S-curve will change.

- 149 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4: S-curve Accel/Decel C
The motor rated frequency is taken as inflection point of this S-curve, and the set
Accel/Decel time is:
Accel/Decel rate = Motor rated frequency / Accel/Decel time (√)
NOT Accel/Decel rate = Maximum frequency / Accel/Decel time (×)

When set frequency is higher than motor rated frequency, the Accel/Decel time is automatically
adjusted by reducing motor output torque. This is applicable to the situation in which short
Accel/Decel time is required during the speed range higher than motor rated frequency.
Diagram of S-curve C is shown as Fig. 6-16:

Output
输出频率 frequency

fN

Time
时间

Fig. 6-16

f: Set Freq
fN: Motor rated frequency

Accel time switching Range:

Factory default:
b2-13 frequency of broken-line 0.00Hz~maximum
0.00Hz
Accel/Decel frequency
Decel time switching Range:
Factory default:
b2-14 frequency of broken-line 0.00Hz~maximum
0.00Hz
Accel/Decel frequency

When b2-12 is set to 1:

b2-01 (Accel time 1) is enabled when output frequency during Accel is more than or equal to
set value of b2-13, while b2-03 (Accel time 2) is enabled when output frequency during Accel is
less than set value of b2-13.

b2- 02 (Decel time 1) is enabled when output frequency during Decel is more than or equal to
set value of b2-14, while b2-04 (Decel time 2) is enabled when output frequency during Accel is
less than set value of b2-14.

- 150 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
When broken-line Accel/Decel is selected, terminals "Accel/Decel time determinant 1" and
"Accel/Decel time determinant 2" will be disabled.

Time of Accel S-curve first

b2-15 Range: 0.00s~60.00s Factory default: 0.20s
segment
Time of Accel S-curve last
b2-16 Range: 0.00s~60.00s Factory default: 0.20s
segment
Time of Decel S-curve first
b2-17 Range: 0.00s~60.00s Factory default: 0.20s
segment
Time of Decel S-curve last
b2-18 Range: 0.00s~60.00s Factory default: 0.20s
segment

These four parameters are enabled when b2-12 is set to 2.

Proportion of Accel
b2-19 Range: 0.0%~100.0% Factory default: 20.0%
S-curve first segment
Proportion of Accel
b2-20 Range: 0.0%~100.0% Factory default: 20.0%
S-curve last segment
Proportion of Decel
b2-21 Range: 0.0%~100.0% Factory default: 20.0%
S-curve first segment
Proportion of Decel
b2-22 Range: 0.0%~100.0% Factory default: 20.0%
S-curve last segment

These four parameters are enabled when b2-12 is set to 3.

ATTENTION:
The sum of the values of b2-19 and b2-20 should not exceed 100.0%. The sum of the
values of b2-21 and b2-22 also should not exceed 100.0%

Group C Input and Output Terminals

Group C0 Digital Input

Enabled condition of run

C0-00 command terminals when Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
power up

This parameter is only for digital terminals with parameter value 1~4 (forward/reverse jog, and
forward/reverse run), and also is only for initial run after power up.

0: Trigger edge detected + ON detected

When run command is controlled by terminals, the drive will start to run when it detects that
the terminal electric level jumps from OFF to ON and is kept ON after power up.

- 151 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

If run command terminal is in ON state before power up, the drive will not run after power up.
Under this circumstance, only when the ON state is shifted to OFF and then ON again, and
maintain ON, the drive will start running.
1: ON detected
When run command is controlled by terminals, the drive will start to run when detecting the
command terminal at ON state after power up.

 ATTENTION:
When “1: ON detected” selected, the drive will start to run after power up as long as ON of
run command terminal detected. Make sure of the safety of personnel and equipment before
this setting.

C0-01 Function of terminal X1 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 3

C0-02 Function of terminal X2 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 4
C0-03 Function of terminal X3 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 1
C0-04 Function of terminal X4 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 23
C0-05 Function of terminal X5 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 11
C0-06 Function of terminal X6/DI Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
Function of terminal EX
C0-07 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
(on IO option board)
Function of terminal AI1 (Digital
C0-08 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
enabled)
Function of terminal AI2 (Digital
C0-09 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
enabled)
Function of terminal EAI (Digital
C0-10 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
enabled) (on IO option board)

Analog input terminals AI1, AI2 and EAI can also be used as digital input terminals set by
C0-08~C0-10. When AI1, AI2 and EAI are used as analog input, C0-08~C0-10 shall be set to 0.
Parameter setting of digital input is as shown in Table 6-6:

Table 6-6 Digital input functions

Set value Function Set value Function
0 No function 26 Reserved
Run command switched to
1 JOG forward 27
control panel control
Run command switched to
2 JOG reverse 28
terminal control
Run command switched to
3 Run forward (FWD) 29
communication control

- 152 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Set value Function Set value Function

4 Run reverse (REV) 30 Frequency set mode shift
Master frequency set switched
5 Three-wire control 31
to digital setting b0-02
Auxiliary FREQ set switched to
6 Run suspended 32
digital setting b0-04
7 External stop 33 PID adjustment direction
8 Emergency stop 34 PID paused
9 Stop command + DC brake 35 PID integration paused
10 DC brake stop 36 PID parameter switch
11 Coast to stop 37 Count input
12 Terminal UP 38 Count clear
13 Terminal DOWN 39 Length count
Clear UP/DOWN (including ∧/
14 40 Length clear
∨ key) adjustment
15 Multi-step frequency terminal 1 41~62 Reserved
16 Multi-step frequency terminal 2 63 Simple PLC paused
17 Multi-step frequency terminal 3 64 Simple PLC disabled
18 Multi-step frequency terminal 4 65 Simple PLC stop memory clear
19 Accel/Decel time determinant 1 66 Start wobble frequency
20 Accel/Decel time determinant 2 67 Clear wobble frequency status
Accel/Decel disabled(ramp stop
21 68 Run prohibited
not inclusive)
22 External fault input 69 DC braking in run
23 Fault reset (RESET) 70 Analog input curve switching
24 Pulse input (valid only for X6/DI) 71~99 Reserved
25 Motor 1/2 switchover

0: No function
1: JOG forward
Jog forward through terminals. Jog frequency is set by b0-19, jog Accel time set by b2-10,
and jog Decel time set by b2-11. Refer to C0-00 for enabled conditions on initial power up.
2: JOG reverse
Jog reverse through terminals. Jog FREQ is set by b0-19, jog Accel time by b2-10, and jog
Decel time by b2-11. Refer to C0-00 for enabled conditions on initial power up.
3: Forward (FWD)
Terminals control forward run of the drive. Refer to C0-00 for enabled conditions on initial
power up.

- 153 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

4: Reverse (REV)
Terminals control reverse run of the drive. Refer to C0-00 for enabled conditions on initial
power up.
5: Three-wire control
There are two-wire control and three-wire control about Forward (FWD) and reverse (REV).
In case of three-wire control is enabled, "three-wire control" terminal is activated. For details,
refer to C0-19 (FWD/REV terminal control mode).
6: Run suspended
When "run suspended" terminal is enabled during the running, the drive will block the output
and perform zero-frequency run. Once "run suspended" terminal becomes disabled, the
drive restores the run.
7: External stop
No matter which type of b1-00 is set to, the drive will stop by enabled “external stop” terminal,
in the manner of stop mode.
8: Emergency stop
When "emergency shutdown" is enabled, the drive will stop in accordance with Decel time
set by b2-09. Please set b2-09 to an appropriate value so as to minimize the Decel time for
emergency stop.
9: Stop command + DC brake
The drive performs ramp-down stop when "stop command+ DC brake" terminal is enabled. It
will perform DC brake when output frequency attains brake start frequency. Brake start
frequency and brake current are set by b1-14 and b1-15. Brake time is determined by the
maximum of b1-16 and the lasting time of this terminal.
10: DC brake stop
The drive performs “ramp to stop + DC brake” (same as b1-13 is set to 2) when “DC brake
stop” is enabled, in the manner set by b1-14, b1-15 and b1-16.
11: Coast to stop
When “coast to stop” terminal is enabled, the drive will immediately cut off its output and the
motor will coast to stop.
12: Terminal UP
13: Terminal DOWN
Terminals are used to increase and decrease the set frequency. The set frequency will be
increased and decreased when "digital setting + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment" is enabled.
The adjustment “step size” is set by C0-18. Refer to C0-17 for Terminal UP/DOWN
frequency adjustment treatment.
14: Clear UP/DOWN (including ∧/∨ key) adjustment
When frequency setting is "digital setting + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment" or "digital
setting + control panel ∧/∨ adjustment", this enabled terminal will clear the adjusted
value via terminals UP/DOWN and keys ∧/∨, to digital set value b0-02 or b0-04.
15: Multi-step frequency terminal 1
16: Multi-step frequency terminal 2

- 154 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

17: Multi-step frequency terminal 3

18: Multi-step frequency terminal 4
16-step frequency can be attained via combination of multi-step frequency terminals 1~4, as
shown in Table 6-7:

Table 6-7
Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step
frequency frequency frequency frequency Frequency setting
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
Multi-step frequency 0
OFF OFF OFF OFF
(F1-00)
Multi-step frequency 1
OFF OFF OFF ON
(F1-01)
Multi-step frequency 2
OFF OFF ON OFF
(F1-04)
Multi-step frequency 3
OFF OFF ON ON
(F1-05)
Multi-step frequency 4
OFF ON OFF OFF
(F1-06)
Multi-step frequency 5
OFF ON OFF ON
(F1-07)
Multi-step frequency 6
OFF ON ON OFF
(F1-08)
Multi-step frequency 7
OFF ON ON ON
(F1-09)
Multi-step frequency 8
ON OFF OFF OFF
(F1-10)
Multi-step frequency 9
ON OFF OFF ON
(F1-11)
Multi-step frequency 10
ON OFF ON OFF
(F1-12)
Multi-step frequency 11
ON OFF ON ON
(F1-13)
Multi-step frequency 12
ON ON OFF OFF
(F1-14)
Multi-step frequency 13
ON ON OFF ON
(F1-15)
Multi-step frequency 14
ON ON ON OFF
(F1-16)
Multi-step frequency 15
ON ON ON ON
(F1-17)
19: Accel/Decel time determinant 1
20: Accel/Decel time determinant 2

- 155 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Accel/Decel time determinant 1~2 can realize at most 4 Accel/Decel time settings through
combination of different statuses as shown in Table 6-8. Accel/Decel time can be switched
via different combinations during run.

Table 6-8
Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time
Accel/Decel time
determinant 2 determinant 1
Accel/Decel time 1(b2-01,
OFF OFF
b2-02)
Accel/Decel time 2(b2-03,
OFF ON
b2-04)
Accel/Decel time 3(b2-05,
ON OFF
b2-06)
Accel/Decel time 4(b2-07,
ON ON
b2-08)

 ATTENTION:
The selection of Accel/Decel time 1~4 is not determined by digital input terminals when
the drive is running under simple PLC. See parameter Group F2 for details. When
broken-line Accel/Decel is enabled, Accel/Decel time is automatically switched to
Accel/Decel time 1 and 2 according to switching frequency (b2-13 and b2-14). In this case,
Accel/Decel time determinant terminals are disabled.

21: Accel/Decel disabled (ramp stop not inclusive)

When "Accel/Decel disabled" terminal is enabled, the drive maintains the present output
frequency and no longer responds to the change of frequency setting. But it will still perform
ramp-down stop when receiving stop command. This terminal is disabled during normal
ramp-down stop.
22: External fault input
This terminal is used to input the fault signal of external equipment, making the drive to
perform fault monitoring and protection. When external fault signal is received, the drive
shall display "PEr" and stop running.
23: Fault reset (RESET)
When the drive fault occurs, this enabled terminal will reset the fault. This function is the
same with RESET key on control panel.
24: Pulse input (valid only for X6/DI)
This is valid only for digital input terminal X6/DI. This terminal receives pulse signal as
frequency setting. Refer to C2-24~C2-27 for the relationship between pulse signal and
frequency setting.
When pulse input is selected as the frequency setting, X6/DI terminal must be set to "pulse
input" (C0-06 is set to 24).

- 156 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

25: Motor 1/2 switchover

The loaded motor can be selected via this terminal as shown in Table 6-9:

Table 6-9

Motor 1/2 switchover

A0-08 Loaded motor
terminal
0 OFF Motor 1
0 ON Motor 2
1 OFF Motor 2
1 ON Motor 1

Set parameters of motor 1 in parameter groups d0~d2, and set parameters of motor 2 in
groups d3~d5.
26: Reserved
27: Run command switched to control panel control
This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge. When this terminal status is switched from
OFF to ON, run command will be switched to control panel control.
28: Run command switched to terminal control
This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge. When this terminal status is switched from
OFF to ON, run command will be switched to terminal control.
29: Run command switched to communication control
This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge. When this terminal is switched from OFF
to ON, run command will be switched to communication control.
30: Frequency set mode shift
When b0-00 is set to 2, 3 and 4, switch during various frequency set mode can be
performed via "frequency set mode shift" terminal.
When b0-00 is set to 2, this terminal shall shift between master frequency setting and
auxiliary frequency setting.
When b0-00 is set to 3, this terminal shall shift between master frequency setting, and
master & auxiliary computation result.
When b0-00 is set to 4, this terminal shall shift between auxiliary frequency setting, and
master & auxiliary computation result.
31: Master frequency setting switched to digital setting b0-02
When this terminal is disabled, b0-01 determines master frequency setting. When it is
enabled, master frequency setting is forcibly switched to the value of b0-02.

 ATTENTION:
This terminal is disabled when the binding of run command and frequency setting is set by
b1-01.

- 157 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

32: Auxiliary frequency setting switched to digital setting b0-04

When this terminal is enabled, b0-03 determines auxiliary frequency setting. When it is
enabled, auxiliary frequency setting is forcibly switched to the value of b0-04.
33: PID adjustment direction
The combination of this terminal and value of F0-04 (PID positive and negative
adjustment), can determine the positive or negative characteristics of PID adjustment.

Table 6-10
PID adjustment direction
F0-04 Adjustment characteristic
terminal
0 OFF Positive action
0 ON Negative action
1 OFF Negative action
1 ON Positive action

34: PID paused

When this terminal is enabled, PID adjustment is paused, and the drive will maintain current
output frequency. After this terminal becomes disabled, PID adjustment recovers.
35: PID integration paused
When this terminal is enabled, PID integrator stops its integration, and the current value is
maintained. After this terminal becomes disabled, PID restores its integration.
36: PID parameter switch
When F0-14 (PID parameter switch) is set to "2: switched by terminal", this terminal could be
used to realize the switching between two groups of PID parameters. When this terminal is
enabled, PID parameters are Kp1 and Ti1, Td1 which are determined by F0-08~F0-10.
When this terminal is disabled, PID parameters are Kp2, Ti2 and Td2 which are determined
by F0-11~F0-13.
37: Count input
The maximum frequency at count pulse input terminal is 200Hz, and the count value can be
memorized in case of power loss. With the setting of F3-12 (set count value) and F3-13
(designated count value), this terminal can control digital output "set count value attained"
and "designated count value attained".
38: Count clear
Used with "count input" terminal, to clear pulse count value.
39: Length count
It is used for fixed-length control, and only takes effect on digital input terminal X6/DI. The
length is calculated via pulse input. Please refer to specification of parameters F3-08~F3-11
for details. When the length is attained, digital output terminal "length attained" shall output
effective signal. The current length value will be memorized on power loss.

- 158 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

40: Length clear

Used with "length count" terminal, to clear the length calculated.
41~62: Reserved
63: Simple PLC paused
When simple PLC is running and this terminal is enabled, the current PLC status (run time
and step) will be memorized, and the drive will run at 0Hz. When this terminal is disabled,
the drive restores its running from the memorized moment.
64: Simple PLC disabled
When simple PLC is running, and this terminal is enabled. The status of PLC will be cleared
and the output frequency is 0Hz. When this terminal is disabled again, the drive resumes
PLC running from step 0.
65: Simple PLC stop memory clear
Under simple PLC running, if this terminal is enabled in stop status, the memorized
information of PLC running step, running time and running frequency will be all cleared.
Refer to parameter Group F2 for more information.
66: Start wobble frequency
This terminal takes effect only when F3-00 is set to "1: wobble frequency function enabled "
and F3-01 ones place is set to “started through terminal”. When this terminal is disabled, the
drive runs at present frequency setting. When this terminal is enabled, the drive would
activate wobble-frequency running immediately. Refer to Group F3 for details of wobble
frequency.
67: Clear wobble frequency status
When the drive is running at wobble frequency, if this terminal is enabled, the memorized
wobble frequency status will be cleared, no matter which wobble frequency start method
(automatic/ via terminal) is taken. When this terminal is disabled, wobble frequency would
resume. Refer to Group F3 for information of wobble frequency.
68: Run prohibited
When this terminal is enabled, the drive will coast to stop if it's running, and will prohibit start
running if it's in a standby state. This terminal mainly applies to the situation where safety
interlocking is required. Only after this terminal becomes disabled, the drive can be
restarted.
69: DC brake in run
When this terminal is enabled, the drive will immediately fall into DC brake. After the
terminal becomes disabled, the drive will be restored to normal state and ramp up to the
frequency setting with the set ramp up time.

 ATTENTION:
When this terminal is enabled, output frequency does not need to decelerate to braking start
frequency, but will directly inject DC whose value is set by b1-15.
70: Analog input curve switching
When C2-00 is set to 3: curve 2 is switching with curve 3, analog input curve can be

- 159 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

switched through this terminal. Analog curve 2 is selected when the terminal is OFF;
analog curve 3 is selected when it’s ON

71~99: Reserved

Filtering time of digital Factory default:

C0-11 Range: 0.000s~1.000s
input terminal 0.010s

Sets the filtering time of X1~X6 (when X6 is used as ordinary low-speed terminal), EX, AI1, AI2
and EAI (when used as digital input terminal). Interference immunity of digital input terminals
can be improved by appropriate filtering time. However, the response time of digital input
terminal will become slower when filtering time is increased.

 ATTENTION:
This filtering time takes no effect on X6/DI when X6/DI terminal is used as DI high-speed
input terminal, while the filtering time of DI is determined by parameter C2-28.

Factory default:
C0-12 Delay time of terminal X1 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s
0.0s
Factory default:
C0-13 Delay time of terminal X2 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s
0.0s

The delayed response time of digital input terminals X1 and X2 is set by these two parameters.

 ATTENTION:
Terminal delay time C0-12 and C0-13 can be set with filtering time C0-11 at the same time.
The drive will respond after the signals via X1 and X2 go through filtering time, and then
delay time. Terminals X3~X6 and EX have no delay-time function.

Digital input terminal enabled Factory default:

C0-14 Range: 0000~1111
status setting 1 0000

 Ones place: X1
0: Positive logic; ON when current flows through
1: Negative logic; ON when no current flows through
 Tens place: X2 (same as X1)
 Hundreds place: X3 (same as X1)
 Thousands place: X4 (same as X1)

Digital input terminal Factory default:

C0-15 Range: 0000～1111
enabled status setting 2 0000

 Ones place: X5
0: Positive logic; ON when current flows through
1: Negative logic; ON when no current flows through
 Tens place: X6 (same as X5)

- 160 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 Hundreds place: EX (on IO option board; same as X5)

 Thousands place: reserved

Digital input terminal Factory default:

C0-16 Range: 0000～1111
enabled status setting 3 0000

This parameter sets the enabled condition of AI1, AI2 and EAI as digital input terminal (need to
be defined by C0-08~C0-10).
 Ones place: AI1
0: Positive logic: < 3V, ON; > 7V, OFF
1: Negative logic: <3V, OFF; > 7V, ON
 Tens place: AI2 (same as AI1)
 Hundreds place: EAI (on IO option board; same as AI1)
 Thousands place: reserved

 ATTENTION:
When AI1, AI2, EAI are used as analog input terminals, do NOT use them as digital input
terminals, thus C0-08~C0-10 shall be set to 0.

Terminal UP/DOWN frequency Factory default:

C0-17 Range: 0000~1111
adjustment action 0000

 Ones place: at stop

0: Cleared
Terminal UP/DOWN frequency adjustment value is cleared when the drive stops.
1: Maintained
Terminal UP/DOWN frequency adjustment value is maintained when the drive stops.
 Tens place: on power loss
0: Cleared
Terminal UP/DOWN frequency adjustment value is cleared in case of power loss.
1: Maintained
Terminal UP/DOWN frequency adjustment value is saved in case of power loss.
 Hundreds place: integral function
0: No integral function
Adjustment step size is kept constant during terminal UP/DOWN adjustment, in compliance
with C0-18.
1: Integral function enabled
When frequency is adjusted through terminal UP/DOWN, initial step size is set by C0-18. With
the effective lasting time of the terminals, adjustment step size will increase gradually.
 Thousands place: run direction
0: Changing run direction prohibited
When the frequency is decreased to 0Hz via terminal UP/DOWN, the drive will run at 0Hz and
won’t change its run direction.

- 161 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

1: Changing run direction allowed

When the frequency is decreased to 0Hz via terminal UP/DOWN, the drive will change its run
direction if this decrease is continued.

Terminal UP/DOWN frequency Range: Factory default:

C0-18
change step size 0.00Hz/s~100.00Hz/s 0.03Hz/s

When frequency setting is "digital setting + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment", this parameter is
used to set the step size of frequency adjustment UP/DOWN. The step size is defined as
frequency change per second, and the smallest step size is 0.01 Hz/s.

FWD/REV terminal control Factory default:

C0-19 Range: 0~3
mode 0

There are four different methods when run command is determined by FED/REV terminal. This
terminal control mode takes no effect on JOG.
0: Two-wire mode 1
FWD terminal inputs forward run command, while REV terminal inputs reverse run
command.
Table 6-11
Run
FWD REV
Drive command
OFF OFF Stop
OFF ON Reverse
ON OFF Forward
ON ON Stop
Fig. 6-17

1: Two-wire mode 2
FWD terminal inputs run command, while REV terminal inputs run direction.

Table 6-12
Running
FWD REV
command
Drive OFF OFF Stop
OFF ON Stop
ON OFF Forward
ON ON Reverse

Fig. 6-18

- 162 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

2: Three-wire mode 1
FWD terminal controls forward run of the drive, REV terminal controls reverse run, and digital
input terminal "three-wire run" controls the stop. Input signals of all these three terminals take
effect when trigger edge is detected.

Three-wire
run
terminal Xi

Drive

Fig. 6-19 Three-wire mode 1

SB1 is a stop button, by pressing which the drive will stop;
SB2 is a FORWARD button, by pressing which forward run will be activated;
SB3 is a REVERSE button, by pressing which reverse run will be activated.
Xi is a digital input terminal. In this case, it is necessary to define the function of
corresponding terminal as "three-wire run" terminal.
3: Three-wire mode 2
FWD terminal controls the run, while run direction is determined by REV terminal. Digital
input terminal "three-wire run" controls the stop.

Three-wire
Run
terminal Xi

Drive

Fig. 6-20 Three-wire mode 2

SB1 is a stop button, by pressing which the drive will stop;

SB2 is a RUN button, by pressing which the drive will run. When switch K is open, run is
forward, while when it is closed, run direction is reverse.
Xi is a digital input terminal. In this case, it is necessary to define the function of
corresponding terminal as "three-wire run" terminal.

- 163 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Option of virtual input Factory default:

C0-20 Range: 000~77F
terminal 000

This parameter is a 10-bit binary numeral. The terminals that correspond respectively to bit10
(the highest bit of binary system) through bit0 (the lowest bit of binary system) are as follows:
Table 6-13

Hundreds place Tens place Ones place

bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
EIA AI2 AI1 Revd EX X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

 Ones place: bit0~bit3 : X1~X4

0: Actual terminal takes effect
1: Virtual terminal takes effect
 Tens: bit4~bit6 : X5, X6, EX (same as ones place)
 Hundreds place: bit8~bit10 : AI1, AI2, EAI (same as ones place)
Virtual terminals simulate actual terminals via communication. Each bit represents one terminal.
When selecting virtual terminal, corresponding bit should be set to 1 in C0-20. Under this
circumstance the actual terminal is invalid.

Enabled condition of run

C0-21 command terminal after Range: 0～1 Factory default:0
fault reset (RESET)

This parameter only takes effect on run command terminals, i.e. digital input terminal set as
1~4 (JOG forward/reverse, run forward/reverse. See table 6-6), and only works for the run after
fault reset.
0: Trigger edge detected + ON detected
After the fault reset, the drive will start to run when an electric level jump from OFF to ON is
detected and ON signal are maintained.
1: ON detected
The drive will run automatically if ON signal from run command terminal is detected. When
this parameter value is set to 1, please make sure the status of run command terminals
before fault reset operation. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or
personal injury.

Group C1 Digital Output

C1-00 Y1 output function Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0

Y2/DO output function
C1-01 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
(when used as Y2)

- 164 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Control board relay Factory default:

C1-02 Range: 0~99
output function 14
Option board relay Factory default:
C1-03 Range: 0~99
output function 15

Define the functions of digital output terminals Y1 & Y2, control board relay and option board
relay. When used as high-speed pulse output, Y2/DO terminal's function are not set in C1-01
but in C3-02. Output terminal function selections are as follows:

Table 6-14
Value Function Value Function
0 No output 17 Drive overheated alarm

1 Drive undervoltage 18 Zero-current detection

2 Drive run preparation completed 19 X1

3 Drive is running 20 X2

Drive running at 0Hz (no output at

4 21 Motor 1/2 indication
stop)
Drive running at 0Hz (output at
5 22 Set count value attained
stop)
6 Run direction 23 Designated count value attained

7 Frequency attained 24 Length attained

8 Upper limit frequency attained 25 Consecutive run time attained

9 Lower limit frequency attained 26 Accumulative run time attained

10 Frequency detection FDT1 27 Brake control

11 Frequency detection FDT2 28~29 Reserved

12 Reserved 30 PLC step completed

13 Torque restricted 31 PLC cycle completed

Wobble frequency attains to upper

14 Fault output 32
or lower limit frequency
Frequency attains to upper/lower
15 Alarm output 33
limit frequency
Frequency attains target-frequency
16 Drive (motor) overloaded alarm 34
set by C2-29

- 165 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

0: No output
Output terminal is disabled, and there is no output.
1: Drive undervoltage
When DC bus voltage is lower than the level of undervoltage, it outputs ON signal and LED
control panel displays "LoU".
2: Drive run preparation completed
The output of ON signal indicates that the drive is free of fault. Under this circumstance, the
drive is ready to accept run command.
3: Drive is running
The output is ON when the drive is running, and output is OFF when drive stopped.
4: Drive running at 0Hz (no output at stop)
When running at 0Hz, this corresponding terminal outputs ON signal. No ON signal will be
output at stop.
5: Drive running at 0Hz (output at stop)
Outputs ON signal when running at 0Hz, and also outputs ON signal at stop.
6: Run direction
Outputs OFF signal under forward run and outputs ON signal under reverse run.
7: Frequency attained
When the deviation of output frequency from set frequency is less than the value of C1-14
(Detective width of frequency attained), outputs ON.
8: Upper limit frequency attained
When output frequency attains b0-09 (upper limit frequency), outputs ON.
9: Lower limit frequency attained
When output frequency attains b0-10 (lower limit frequency), outputs ON.
10: Frequency detection FDT1
Terminal outputs ON signal when output frequency exceeds C1-10 (FDT1 upper bound)
and will not output OFF signal unless output frequency drops to below C1-11 (FDT1 lower
bound).
11: Frequency detection FDT2
Terminal outputs ON when output frequency exceeds C1-12 (FDT2 upper bound) and will
not output OFF unless output frequency drops to below C1-13 (FDT2 lower bound).
12: Reserved
13: Torque restricted
This takes effect only in the mode of sensor-less vector control. If output torque attains the
limit value of drive torque or brake torque, terminal outputs ON.
14: Fault output
When the drive is in fault, it outputs ON.
15: Alarm output
When inverter gives an alarm, ON signal is output.
16: Drive (motor) overloaded alarm
In case drive output current exceeds E1-04 (overload alarm threshold ) and its last time

- 166 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

exceeds E1-05 (overload alarm activated time that exceeding threshold), outputs ON. Refer
to parameters E1-03~E1-05 for information with regard to drive (motor) overloaded alarm.

 ATTENTION:
In case of either drive is overloaded or motor is overloaded, it also will output ON.
17: Drive overheat alarm
When drive internally detected temperature exceeds E1-13 (Drive overheat alarm
threshold), ON signal will be output.
18: Zero-current detection
When drive output current is less than the value of C1-15 (effective proportion of zero
current detected) and the lasting time attains the value of C1-16 (Zero current detected
time), ON signal will be output.
19: X1
Output the status of X1.
20: X2
Output the status of X2.
21: Motor 1/2 indication
When motor 1 is selected, outputs OFF. When motor 2 is selected, outputs ON.
22: Set count value attained
Refer to the specification of parameter F3-12.
23: Designated count value attained
Refer to the specification of parameter F3-13.
24: Length attained
Refer to the specification of parameters F3-08~F3-11.
25: Consecutive run time attained
When consecutive run time attains the value of E0-03, corresponding terminal outputs ON.
Consecutive run time is cleared when stop.
26: Accumulative run time attained
When accumulative run time attains the value of E0-04, corresponding terminal outputs ON.
Accumulative run time is maintained when stop.
27: Brake control
Refer to the specification of parameters E0-05~E0-11 for details.
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: PLC step completed
Upon the completion of current step of simple PLC running, ON signal with the width of
500ms will be output.
31: PLC cycle completed
Upon the completion of a cycle of simple PLC running, ON signal with a width of 500ms will
be output.
32: Wobble frequency attains to upper or lower limit frequency

- 167 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

When drive output frequency attains upper limit frequency b0-09 or lower limit frequency
b0-10 under wobble frequency running, ON signal will be output.
33: Upper/lower limit of set FREQ attained
34: Target FREQ attained (set by C2-29)
When the error of drive output frequency and C2-29 value is less than C1-14, target
frequency is attained, this terminal output ON.
35~99: Reserved

C1-04 Y1 output time delay Range: 0.0s~3600.0s Factory default: 0.0s

C1-05 Y2 output time delay Range: 0.0s~3600.0s Factory default: 0.0s
Control board relay
C1-06 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s Factory default: 0.0s
output time delay
Option board relay
C1-07 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s Factory default: 0.0s
output time delay

These four parameters define the delay response time of digital output terminals Y1 & Y2,
control board relay and option board relay.

 ATTENTION:
When Y2/DO terminal is used as high-speed pulse output (set by C3-02), delay time set by
C1-05 is disabled.

Enabled state of digital Factory default:

C1-08 Range: 0000~1111
output 0000

 Ones place: Y1
0: Positive logic; ON when current flows through
1: Negative logic; ON when no current flows through
 Tens place: Y2 (same as Y1)
 Hundreds place: control board relay output
0: Positive logic; ON when there is coil excitation
1: Negative logic; ON when there is no coil excitation
 Thousands place: option board relay output (same as control board relay)
Wiring diagram of digital output terminal is shown as Fig. 6-21:

Relay

Drive

Fig. 6-21

- 168 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Detected object of FREQ Factory default:

C1-09 Range: 00~11
detection (FDT) 00

 Ones place: FDT1 detected object

0: Set value of speed (frequency after Accel/Decel)
FDT1 output frequency is the set frequency after Accel/Decel.
1: Detected speed value
FDT1 output frequency is actually detected or identified frequency. If the drive is under V/f
pattern, it should be output frequency.
 Tens place: FDT2 detected object
0: Set value of speed (frequency after Accel/Decel)
FDT2 output frequency is the set frequency after Accel/Decel.
1: Detected speed value
FDT2 output frequency is actually detected or identified frequency. If the drive is under V/f
pattern, it should be output frequency.

Factory default:
C1-10 FDT1 upper value Range: 0.00Hz~maximum FREQ
50.00Hz
Factory default:
C1-11 FDT1 lower value Range: 0.00Hz~ maximum FREQ
49.00Hz
Factory default:
C1-12 FDT2 upper value Range: 0.00Hz~ maximum FREQ
25.00Hz
Factory default:
C1-13 FDT2 lower value Range: 0.00Hz~ maximum FREQ
24.00Hz

These parameters should be set with digital output terminals "FDT1" and "FDT2". Take FDT1
for example, the drive outputs ON signal when output frequency exceeds upper value of FDT1
and will not output OFF signal unless output frequency drops to below lower value of FDT1.
Please set C1-10 to be larger to some certain extent than C1-11, avoiding status change
frequently. See Fig. 6-22:

FDT2 performance figure is the same as FDT1.

- 169 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Output frequency

FDT1 upper value

FDT1 lower value

Time

FDT1 terminal

Time
Fig. 6-22

Detection width of Range: 0.00Hz~ maximum Factory default:

C1-14
frequency attained FREQ 2.50Hz

This parameter should be set with digital output terminal "frequency attained". When the
difference between output frequency and set frequency is less than this value, terminal
"frequency attained" outputs ON. See Fig. 6-23:

Output

Set frequency
Frequency detection width

Time

Frequency attained
terminal

Time

Fig. 6-23

- 170 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Zero current detection Factory default:

C1-15 Range: 0.0%~50.0%
value 5.0%
Factory default:
C1-16 Zero current detection time Range: 0.01s~50.00s
0.50s

The two parameters should be set with digital output terminal "zero current detection". When
the drive output current is less than the value set by C1-15 and its lasting time attains the value
of C1-16, terminal "zero current detection" outputs ON signal. See Fig. 6-24:

Output current

Run Stop

Zero current detection value

Time
Zero
Zero current detection terminal current
detection
time

Time

Fig. 6-24

Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input

C2-00 Analog input curve Range: 0000~222 Factory default: 0210

Curves of analog input AI1, AI2 and EAI are selected by this parameter.
 Ones place: AI1 input curve
0: Curve 1 (2 points)
Defined by C2-01~C2-04.
1: Curve 2 (4 points)
Defined by C2-05~C2-12.
2: Curve 3 (4 points)
Defined by C2-13~C2-20.
3: Curve 2 and curve 3 switchover
Curve 2 and curve 3 selection can be switched via terminal “analog input curve switchover”.
When this terminal is deactivated, curve 2 takes effect, while when this terminal is activated,
curve 3 will work.

- 171 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 Tens place: AI2 input curve

Same as specification of AI1.
 Hundreds place: EAI input curve
Same as specification of AI1.
 Thousands place: reserved

Range: minimum input of curve Factory default:

C2-01 Curve 1 maximum input
1 ~110.0% 100.0%
Corresponding set value of Factory default:
C2-02 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
curve 1 maximum input 100.0%
Range: -110.0% ~ curve 1 Factory default:
C2-03 Curve 1 minimum input
maximum input 0.0%
Corresponding set value of Factory default:
C2-04 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
curve 1 minimum input 0.0%

Curve 1 is defined by above-noted 4 parameters. Input values C2-01 and C2-03:

EAI on option board and AI1 can select 0~10V voltage input or 0~20mA current input by
jumper.
If 0~10V is selected: 0V corresponds to 0%, while 10V corresponds to 100%.
If 0~20mA is selected: 0mA corresponds to 0%, while 20mA corresponds to 100%.
AI2 only supports -10V~10V input; for AI2, -10V corresponds to -100%, while 10V corresponds
to 100%.

Corresponding set values C2-02 and C2-04:

When the corresponding set value is frequency: 100% is the maximum frequency, while -100%
is the maximum negative frequency.
When the corresponding set value is current: 100% means 2 times the rated current of drive
while "less than or equal to 0%" corresponds to zero current.
When corresponding set value is torque: 100% means 2 times the rated torque, while -100%
means minus "2 times the rated torque".
When the corresponding set value is output voltage (e.g. the voltage setting in case of V/f
separated pattern): 100% corresponds to rated voltage of motor. "Less than or equal to 0%"
corresponds to 0V voltage.

Curve diagram is shown as below:

- 172 -
 GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Corresponding set value

Set value that

corresponds to
Corresponding set value curve 1 maximum
input (C2-02) Curve 1
Set value that minimum
corresponds to input
curve 1 maximum (C2-03)
input (C2-02) AI analog
Curve 1
Set value that Set value that maximum
corresponds to corresponds to input (C2-01)
curve 1 minimum curve 1 minimum
input (C2-04) input (C2-04)
AI analog
Curve 1 Curve 1
minimum maximum
input (C2-03) input (C2-01)

Fig. 6-25 Fig. 6-26

Corresponding set value

Corresponding set value

Set value that

Set value that corresponds to
corresponds to curve 1 minimum
curve 1 minimum input (C2-04)
input (C2-04) Curve 1
maximum
input (C2-01)
Set value that AI
corresponds to Curve 1 analog
Set value that minimum
curve 1 maximum
corresponds to input (C2-03)
input (C2-02) AI curve 1
Curve 1 Curve 1 analog maximum input
minimum maximum
(C2-02)
input (C2-03) input (C2-01)

Fig. 6-27 Fig. 6-28

Range: input of curve 2 Factory default:

C2-05 Curve 2 maximum input
inflection point A~110.0% 100.0%
Set value corresponding to Factory default:
C2-06 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
curve 2 maximum input 100.0%

Input of curve 2 inflection point Input of curve 2 inflection Factory default:

C2-07 point B ~ curve 2 maximum
A 0.0%
input
Set value corresponding to
Factory default:
C2-08 input of curve 2 inflection point Range: -100.0%~100.0%
0.0%
A

- 173 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Range: Curve 2 minimum

Input of curve 2 inflection point Factory default:
C2-09 input ~ Input of curve 2
B 0.0%
inflection point A
Set value corresponding to
Factory default:
C2-10 input of curve 2 inflection point Range: -100.0%~100.0%
0.0%
B
Range: -110.0%~ input of Factory default:
C2-11 Curve 2 minimum input
curve 2 inflection point B -100.0%
Set value corresponding to Factory default:
C2-12 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
curve 2 minimum input -100.0%

Description of input value of curve 2: Voltage input:

1） With regard to AI1 and the EAI on option board, 0% corresponds to 0V or 0mA, while
100% corresponds to 10V or 20mA.
2） Regarding to AI2, -100% corresponds to -10V, while 100% corresponds to 10V.
Curve 2 is defined by C2-05~C2-12. The input of curve 2 and the definition of corresponding
set value is the same as AI1. The difference is that curve 1 is a straight line while curve 2 is a
broken line with two inflection points. Diagram of curve 2 is shown as below:
Corresponding set value Corresponding set value

Set value that corresponds

Set value that corresponds
to curve 2 maximum input
to curve 2 maximum input
(C2-06)
(C2-06)
Set value corresponds to
Set value corresponds to point B input (C2-10)
point B input (C2-10)
Set value corresponds to
Set value corresponds to point A input (C2-08)
point A input (C2-08) AI analog
Set value that corresponds Curve 2
to curve 2 minimum input AI analog maximum input
(C2-12) (C2-05)
Curve 2
maximum input Set value that corresponds
(C2-05) to curve 2 minimum input
(C2-12)
Curve 2 Point A Point B input
minimum input input (C2-09)
Curve 2 minimum Point A input Point B input (C2-11) (C2-07)
input (C2-11) (C2-07) (C2-09)

Fig. 6-29 Fig. 6-30

Corresponding set value
Corresponding set value
Set value that corresponds
to curve 2 minimum input
(C2-12)
Set value that corresponds Point A input
Set value that corresponds to curve 2 minimum input (C2-07)
to point A input (C2-08) (C2-12)

Set value that corresponds

to point B input (C2-10) Set value that corresponds
to point A input (C2-08) Maximum input of
Point B input
Set value that corresponds AI analog (C2-09) curve 2 (C2-05)
to curve 2 maximum input AI analog
(C2-06) Curve 2 Minimum input of
maximum input Set value that corresponds curve 2 (C2-11)
(C2-05) to point B input (C2-10)

Curve 2 minimum Point A input Point B input Set value that corresponds
input (C2-11) (C2-07) (C2-09) to curve 2 maximum input
(C2-06)

Fig. 6-31 Fig. 6-32

- 174 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Range: input of curve 3 Factory default:

C2-13 Curve 3 maximum input
inflection point A ~110.0% 100.0%
Set value corresponding to Factory default:
C2-14 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
curve 3 maximum input 100.0%
Range: input of curve 3
Input of curve 3 inflection
C2-15 inflection point B ~ curve 3 Factory default: 0.0%
point A
maximum input
Set value corresponding to
C2-16 input of curve 3 inflection Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default: 0.0%
point A
Range: curve 3 minimum
Input of curve 3 inflection
C2-17 input~ input of curve 3 Factory default: 0.0%
point B
inflection point A
Set value corresponding to
C2-18 input of curve 3 inflection Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default: 0.0%
point B
Range: -110.0%~ input of
C2-19 Curve 3 minimum input Factory default: 0.0%
curve 3 inflection point B
Set value corresponding to
C2-20 Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default: 0.0%
curve 3 minimum input

Curve 3 is defined by C2-13~C2-20. The usage of curve 3 is the same as that of curve 2.

C2-21 AI1 terminal filtering time Range: 0.000s~10.000s Factory default: 0.1s
C2-22 AI2 terminal filtering time Range: 0.000s~10.000s Factory default: 0.1s
C2-23 EAI terminal filtering time Range: 0.000s~10.000s Factory default: 0.1s

C2-21~C2-23 define the filtering time of analog input terminals AI1, AI2 and EAI. Long filtering
time results in strong immunity from interference but slow response, while short filtering time
brings rapid response but weak immunity from interference.

Factory default:
C2-24 DI maximum input Range: C2-26~50.0kHz
50.0kHz
Set value corresponding to Factory default:
C2-25 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
DI maximum input 100.0%
Factory default:
C2-26 DI minimum input Range: 0.0kHz~C2-24
0.0kHz
Set value corresponding to
C2-27 Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default: 0.0%
DI minimum input

When digital input terminal X6/DI receives pulse signal as frequency setting, the relation

- 175 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

between input pulse signal and frequency setting is defined by curves set by C2-24~C2-27.
C2-24 and C2-26 represent the range of DI input pulse frequency. C2-25 and C2-27 are the set
values of frequency that corresponds to DI input pulse frequency: 100% corresponds to
positive maximum frequency while -100% corresponds to negative maximum frequency.

 ATTENTION:
When pulse input is selected as the frequency setting, X6/DI terminal shall be set to "pulse
input" function (C0-06 is set to 24).

Factory default:
C2-28 DI filtering time Range: 0.000s~1.000s
0.001s

Defines the filtering time of terminal X6/DI.

Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit Factory default:

C2-29 Target FREQ
frequency 0.0Hz

This parameter should be used together with digital output terminal “Frequency attains
target-frequency set by C2-29” (No.34 in table 6-14). When the error between drive output
frequency and C2-29 value is less than the value of C1-14, terminal “Frequency attains
target-frequency set by C2-29” outputs ON signal.

Group C3 Analog and Pulse Output

C3-00 AO1 output function Range: 0~99 Factory default: 2

EAO output function
C3-01 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 1
(on IO option board)
Y2/DO output function
C3-02 Range: 0~99 Factory default: 0
(when used as DO)

AO1 and EAO are analog output terminals. When used as high-speed pulse output DO, Y2/DO
terminal's functions are set in C3-02.

Voltage output or current output of AO1 and EAO can be selected through jumper switch. When
S3 is switched to the position as shown in Fig. 6-33, AO1 output 0~10V. EAO analog output
terminal is located at option board.
S1 S2 S3
485 AI1 AO1
ON I I

OFF V V

Fig. 6-33

- 176 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Output range of DO pulse frequency is 0~C3-09 (maximum output pulse frequency). The
ranges of corresponding digital output of AO1, EAO and DO are as shown in the table 6-15.

Table 6-15
Parameter value Function Range
0 No output No output
1 Set FREQ 0~maximum frequency
2 Output frequency 0~maximum frequency
3 Output current 0~2 times the rated current of inverter
4 Output torque 0~2 times the rated torque
5 Output voltage 0~2 times the rated voltage of motor
6 Output power 0~ 2 times the rated power
7 Bus voltage 0~1000V
8 Reserved Reserved
9 Torque current 0~2 times the rated current of motor
10 Magnetic flux current 0~ 2 times the rated current of motor
11 AI1 0~10V/0~20mA
12 AI2 -10V~10V
13 EAI 0~10V/0~20mA
14 Reserved Reserved
15 DI 0~50kHz
Communication input
16 0~65535
percentage
Output frequency before
17 0~maximum frequency
compensation
Output current (relative to 0~2 times of rated output current of the
18
motor rated current) motor
Output torque (direction -2 times rated torque~2 times rated
19
hinted) torque
Set torque (direction -2 times rated torque~2 times rated
20
hinted) torque

C3-03 AO1 offset Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default: 0.0%

C3-04 AO1 gain Range: -2.000~2.000 Factory default: 1.000

When users need to chang AO1 measuring range or correct the meter error, it can be realized
by setting of C3-03 and C3-04. When using factory default set: 0~10V (or 0~20mA) of AO1
corresponds to “0~maximun”. See table 6-15 for details. By expressing standard output of AO1

- 177 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

as x, the adjusted AO1 output as y, the gain as k, and the offset as b (100% of offset
corresponds to 10V or 20mA), there is the equation: y=kx+b

Example:
Set C3-00 to 2: output frequency. Standard AO1 output: AO1 outputs 0V when output
frequency is 0, and outputs 10V when output frequency is maximum frequency. If AO1 is
requested to output 2V when output frequency is 0Hz, and to output 8V when output frequency
is the maximum frequency.

There is: 2=k×0+b; 8=k×10+b. Through these two equations, we obtain: k = 0.6, b = 2V, i.e.
C3-03 is set to 20.0% while C3-04 is set to 0.600.

Additional examples are shown as below:

AO1 output after adjustment

AO1 standard output

Fig. 6-34 Influence of AO1 gain against output

AO1 output after adjustment

AO1 standard output

Fig. 6-35 Influence of AO1 offset against output

Factory default:
C3-05 AO1 filtering time Range: 0.0s~10.0s
0.0s

Defines output filtering time of AO1 terminal.

Factory default:
C3-06 EAO offset Range: -100.0%~100.0%
0.0%

- 178 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
C3-07 EAO gain Range: -2.000~2.000
1.000
Factory default:
C3-08 EAO filtering time Range: 0.0s~10.0s
0.0s

Adjustment method of EAO output curve is the same as AO1.

DO maximum output pulse Factory default:

C3-09 Range: 0.1kHz~50.0kHz
frequency 50.0kHz

This parameter sets the maximum output frequency when Y2/DO terminal is selected as
high-speed pulse output.

C3-10 DO output center point Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

There are three different center point modes when Y2/DO terminal is selected as high-speed
pulse output.
0: No center point.
DO pulse frequency output range 0~ (C3-09) corresponds to "0~maximum", as shown in Fig.
6-36:

DO corresponding value

Maximum corresponding value

DO pulse frequency

Fig. 6-36
1: Center point is (C3-09)/2, and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency
is higher than center point. The value that corresponds to DO pulse frequency at center point
is 0. DO pulse frequency C3-09 corresponds to the positive maximum value, while DO pulse
frequency 0Hz corresponds to the negative maximum value. See Fig. 6-37:

- 179 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

DO corresponding value

Maximum corresponding value

DO pulse frequency

Maximum negative corresponding value

Fig. 6-37
2: Center point is (C3-09)/2, and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency
is lower than center point. The value that corresponds to DO pulse frequency at center point
is 0. When set to 0, DO pulse corresponds to the positive maximum value, while when set to
C3-09, DO pulse frequency corresponds to the negative maximum value. See Fig. 6-38:

Do corresponding value

Maximum corresponding value

DO pulse frequency

Maximum negative value of indication

value

Maximum negative corresponding value

Fig. 6-38

Factory default:
C3-11 DO output filtering time Range: 0.00s~10.00s
0.00s

Set the filtering time of DO high-speed pulse output. Filtering can change the changing rate of
output pulse frequency. The longer the filtering time is, the lower the change rate of output
pulse frequency would be.

- 180 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Group C4 Automatic Correction of Analog Input

Parameter Group C4 is used to perform automatic correction of analog input channels,

obtaining the gain and offset of corresponding channel automatically. They can automatically
modify the measuring range of corresponding channel or correct meter error.

C4-00 Analog correction Range: 0~3 Factory default: 0

0: No correction
No correction to any analog input.
1: Correct AI1
Automatically correct analog AI1.
2: Correct AI2
Automatically correct analog AI2.
3: Correct EAI
Automatically correct analog EAI.

Sampling value of AI1 Factory default:

C4-01 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Input value of AI1 Factory default:
C4-02 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Sampling value of AI1 Factory default:
C4-03 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V
Input value of AI1 Factory default:
C4-04 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V
Sampling value of AI2 Factory default:
C4-05 Range: -10.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Input value of AI2 Factory default:
C4-06 Range: -10.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Sampling value of AI2 Factory default:
C4-07 Range: -10.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V
Input value of AI2 Factory default:
C4-08 Range: -10.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V
Sampling value of EAI Factory default:
C4-09 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Input value of EAI Factory default:
C4-10 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 1 1.00V
Sampling value of EAI Factory default:
C4-11 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V

- 181 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Input value of EAI Factory default:

C4-12 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
calibration point 2 9.00V

Take AI2 for example, automatic correction is as follows

1) Set C4-00 to 2 in stop status and press ENT key to confirm. In this way, AI2 is selected
as correction channel.
2) Input a relatively low analog voltage (e.g. about 1V) via AI2 terminal, and input the
theoretical value of this analog voltage by C4-06 after the stabilization of this voltage
input, and then press ENT key to confirm.
3) Input a relatively high analog voltage (e.g. about 9V) via AI2 terminal, and input the
theoretical value of this analog voltage by C4-08 after the stabilization of this voltage
input, and then press ENT key to confirm.
4) Upon the successful correction, C4-00 parameter will be restored to zero.

 ATTENTION:
Set the theoretical value or actual value of analog voltage in C4-06 and C4-08. This value
can be either the set value of analog output of peripheral equipment, or the actual voltage
value of analog input measured by a multimeter or other instruments. C4-05 and C4-07 are
the sampling values of analog input voltage. These values are for reference only. Do not
write the value of C4-05 directly into C4-06, or write the value of C4-07 directly into C4-08.

Group d Motor and Control Parameters

Group d0 Parameters of Motor 1

When motor 1 is selected as current load motor, please set motor parameters in Group d0.

d0-00 Type of motor 1 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1

0: Ordinary asyn. motor

1: Variable frequency asyn. motor
2: Synchronous motor
The major difference between ordinary motor and variable frequency motor lies in the handling
of motor overload protection. Under low speed run, ordinary motor has poor heat dissipation,
so motor overload protection shall be derated at low speed. Since fan-based heat dissipation of
variable frequency motor is not affected by motor speed, low-speed overload protection is not
necessarily derated. Therefore, please set d0-00 to 0 when driving ordinary asynchronous
motor so as to protect the motor reliably.

Range: Factory default:

d0-01 Power rating of motor 1
0.4kW~6553.5kW model dependent
d0-02 Rated voltage of motor 1 Range: 0V~480V Factory default: 380V

- 182 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
d0-03 Rated current of motor 1 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A
model dependent
Range: 0.00Hz~upper Factory default:
d0-04 Rated frequency of motor 1
limit frequency 50.00Hz
d0-05 Pole number of motor 1 Range: 1~80 Factory default: 4
Factory default:
d0-06 Rated speed of motor 1 Range: 0~65535 r/min
model dependent

Above-noted motor parameters must be correctly set according to motor nameplate. Please
select the motor that suits the power class of the drive, or the control performance of the drive
will drop dramatically.

Stator resistance R1 of Factory default:

d0-07 Range: 0.001Ω~65.535Ω
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
Leakage inductance L1 of Factory default:
d0-08 Range: 0.1mH~6553.5mH
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
Rotor resistance R2 of Factory default:
d0-09 Range: 0.001Ω~65.535Ω
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
Mutual inductance L2 of Factory default:
d0-10 Range: 0.1mH~6553.5mH
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
No-load current of asyn. Factory default:
d0-11 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A
motor 1 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 1 of Factory default:
d0-12 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 2 of Factory default:
d0-13 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 1 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 3 of Factory default:
d0-14 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 1 model dependent

The drive needs above-noted parameters to control its matching asyn. motor. If the parameters
of motor 1 is known, just write the actual value into d0-07~d0-14 correspondingly.

After the autotuning of motor 1, above-noted parameters are automatically updated and saved.
Parameters d0-07~d0-09 are obtained through static autotuning, and parameters d0-07~d0-14
are obtained through rotary autotuning. If above-noted parameters are unknown and it is not
allowed to perform motor autotuning, please input the parameters manually by referring to
parameters of like motors.

If motor power rating d0-01 is changed, d0-02~d0-14 will be automatically restored to default
setting of the standard motor.

- 183 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Stator resistance of syn. Factory default:

d0-15 Range: 0.001Ω~65.535Ω
motor 1 0.500Ω
D-axis inductance of syn. Factory default:
d0-16 Range: 0.01mH～655.35mH
motor 1 9.00mH
Q-axis inductance of syn. Factory default:
d0-17 Range: 0.01mH～655.35mH
motor 1 9.00mH
Back EMF voltage of syn. Factory default:
d0-18 Range: 0.0~1000.0V
motor 1 380.0V
The drive needs above-noted parameters to control its matching syn. motor. If the parameters
of motor 1 is known, just write the actual value into d0-15~d0-18 correspondingly.
After the autotuning of motor 1, above-noted parameters are automatically updated and saved.
Parameters d0-15~d0-17 are obtained through static autotuning, and parameters d0-15~d0-18
are obtained through rotary autotuning. If above-noted parameters are unknown and it is not
allowed to perform motor autotuning, please input the parameters manually by referring to
parameters of like motors.

Autotuning current of syn. Range: 0.0%～100.0%, 100% is Factory default:

d0-19
motor 1 motor rated current 35.0%
d0-22 Autotuning of motor 1 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0

Parameters for controlling the motor performance are automatically obtained through
autotuning, and the result will be automatically saved upon the completion of autotuning. No
matter it is asyn. motor or syn. motor, be sure to correctly input motor 1 parameters
d0-01~d0-06 before autotuning.
0: No autotuning
1: Static autotuning of asyn. motor
Static autotuning applies to the cases where rotary autotuning cannot be favorably
performed due to the fact that it is impossible to disengage the motor from its load. After
d0-22 is set to 1 and confirmed, press the key RUN to start static autotuning. d0-22 will be
restored to 0 upon the successful completion of autotuning. In this way, parameters
d0-07~d0-09 are obtained.
2: Rotary autotuning of asyn. motor
To perform rotary autotuning, it is essential to disengage the motor from its load. Autotuning
is prohibited when motor is loaded. After d0-22 is set to 2 and confirmed, press RUN to
perform static autotuning, upon the completion of which, the motor would accelerate to a
fixed frequency in the set ramp-up time, maintaining a period of time, and then stop by ramp
down according to the set ramp down time. In this way, the autotuning comes to an end, and
d0-22 will be restored to 0. Parameters d0-07~d0-14 have be obtained after the successful
completion of rotary autotuning. To perform rotary autotuning, please set appropriate
ramp-up and ramp-down time (i.e. Accel/Decel time. If overcurrent or overvoltage fault
occurs during autotuning, please prolong Accel/Decel time accordingly.

- 184 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

3: Reserved
4: Static autotuning of syn. motor
Applies to parameter autotuning for syn. motor. After d0-22 is set to 4 and confirmed, press
the key RUN to start static autotuning. d0-22 will be restored to 0 upon the successful
completion of autotuning. In this way, parameters d0-15~d0-17 are obtained.
5:No-load rotary autotuning of syn. motor
Applies to parameter autotuning for syn. motor. After d0-22 is set to 5 and confirmed, press
the key RUN to start rotary autotuning. d0-22 will be restored to 0 upon the successful
completion of autotuning. In this way, parameters d0-15~d0-18 are obtained. d0-19 is
autotuning current for rotary autotuning, if motor cannot run during rotary autotuning, this
current can be properly increased.

 ATTENTION:
Please make sure the motor is in a stationary state before the autotuning, or autotuning
cannot be performed normally.
Control panel displays "TUNE" and RUN indicator light is on during autotuning. RUN
indicator light is off upon the completion of autotuning.
Once autotuning fails, the fault code "tUN" shall be displayed.

Overload protection of
d0-23 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1
motor 1

Determine the overload protection of motor 1.

0: No protection
Once 0 is selected, it would be impossible to perform motor overload protection. Please take
care.
1: Judged by motor current
Provide overload protection judged from output current and its lasting time. Overload
protection detection time is set by d0-24.
2: Judged by temperature transducer
Input motor temperature sensor signal through analog input channel set by d0-25. The signal
voltage is compared with the protection threshold set by d0-26. If it is higher than protection
threshold, motor overheat fault "oH2" could be displayed.

Overload protection Factory default:

d0-24 Range: 0.1min~15.0min
detection time of motor 1 5.0min

When d0-23 is set to "1: judged by motor current", overload protection time is determined by
this parameter on the basis of the run current being 150% of motor rated current. An alarm of
motor overload fault "oL2" shall be displayed once the lasting time exceeds this parameter
value. Protection time when the run current is other value is automatically calculated according
to inverse time lag characteristic curve. See Fig. 6-39.

- 185 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Motor overload time

(d0-24) = 10 minutes

(d0-24) = 5 minutes

(d0-24) = 1 minutes

Motor current

Fig. 6-39 Motor protection curve for ordinary motor running at 50Hz

Overload protection is performed for variable frequency motor according to the curve as shown
in Fig. 6-39 at either high or low rotation speed. Due to the fact that fan-based heat dissipation
of ordinary motors become poor at low speed, the protection is derated at low speed.

Example: when d0-24 is set to 10.0 minutes, and the motor is running at 10Hz input, motor
overload fault "oL2" shall be displayed when the running current is 150% of the motor rated
current with lasting time 4 minutes. See Fig. 6-40.
Motor overload time

(d0-24) = 10 minutes

Motor current

Fig. 6-40 Overload protection curve for ordinary motor running at 10Hz

Temperature transducer signal

d0-25 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1
input of motor 1

0: AI1
1: AI2
2: EAI
When d0-23 is set to "2: judged by temperature transducer ", the analog signal input of
temperature sensor of motor 1 is set by this parameter. The drive compares the signal input
value via this analog channel with the thermal protection threshold set by d0-26. If it is bigger

- 186 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

than the threshold, the drive will immediately give an alarm of motor overheat fault "oH2".
Protection through temperature sensor has no characteristic of inverse time lag curve.

Thermal protection threshold of Factory default:

d0-26 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
motor 1 temperature transducer 10.00V

This parameter works together with d0-25, and this parameter value, corresponding to motor 1
overheat protection point, needs to be calculated in accordance with the type of temperature
sensor. Please consult GTAKE technical service engineer for this parameter value setting.
When the input analog signal through the channel selected by d0-25 is bigger than this
threshold, the drive will immediately trip with motor overeat fault "oH2".

Factory default:
d0-27 SW rotary speed track Kp Range: 0.00～655.35
0.00
Factory default:
d0-28 SW rotary speed track Ki Range: 0.00～655.35
2.00
Set as factory default.

Group d1 V/f Control Parameters of Motor 1

Set control parameters in Group d1 when motor 1 is selected as current load motor on which
V/f control is performed.

d1-00 V/f curve setting Range: 0~8 Factory default: 0

Set the relation between output voltage and output frequency of the drive when motor 1 is
under V/f control.
0: Linear V/f
Applies to general constant-torque load. When drive output frequency is 0, output voltage will
be 0, while when output frequency is rated frequency of motor, the output voltage would be
rated voltage of motor.
1: Broken line V/f (determined by d1-01~d1-08)
Applies to spin drier, centrifuge, industrial washing machine and other special loads. When
drive output frequency is 0, output voltage will be 0, while when output frequency is rated
frequency of motor, the output voltage would be rated voltage of motor. What is different is
this pattern can set 4 inflection points by d1-01~d1-08. See Fig. 6-41.

- 187 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Output voltage (V)

Rated voltage of
motor

Output frequency (Hz)

Rated frequency of motor

Fig. 6-41 User-defined various segments V/f curve

V0, V1, V2, V3 and f0, f1, f2 and f3 in the figure are voltage value and frequency value set by
parameters d1-01~d1-08.
2: 1.2nd power
3: 1.4th power
4: 1.6th power
5: 1.8th power
6: 2.0th power
Parameter values 2~6 apply to torque-dropped loads such as fans and water pumps. See
Fig. 6-42.

Output voltage (V)

power
power
power
power
power
Rated voltage of motor

SL V/f

Output frequency (Hz)

Rated frequency of
motor

Fig. 6-42 1.2~2.0 power V/f curve

7: V/f separated pattern 1

Output frequency and output voltage can be set separately. Frequency is set by the method
as stated in Group b0. Output voltage is set by d1-18. See d1-18 for details. This mode
applies to variable-frequency power supply or torque motor control etc.

- 188 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

8: V/f separated pattern 2

Determine a certain voltage by linear V/f mode, and then multiply this voltage by the
proportion set by d1-18 to obtain drive output voltage. See d1-18 for details.

Range: 0.00Hz~rated frequency Factory default:

d1-01 V/f frequency value f3
of motor 50.00Hz
Factory default:
d1-02 V/f voltage value V3 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
100.0%
Factory default:
d1-03 V/f frequency value f2 Range: d1-05~d1-01
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d1-04 V/f voltage value V2 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
d1-05 V/f frequency value f1 Range: d1-07~d1-03
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d1-06 V/f voltage value V1 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
d1-07 V/f frequency value f0 Range: 0.00Hz~d1-05
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d1-08 V/f voltage value V0 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%

d1-01~d1-08 is used for broken line V/f mode. Voltage value 100% corresponds to rated
voltage of motor. Please suitably set the values of frequency and voltage at knees on the basis
of characteristics of motor and load. Improper setting may rise output current even burn the
motor.

Factory default:
d1-09 Torque boost Range: 0.0%~30.0%
0.0%

Under V/f pattern, output voltage at low frequency can be compensated by this parameter,
improving the torque output. 0.0% corresponds to automatic torque boost, and drive output
voltage is automatically compensated via detection of load current. Automatic torque boost is
valid only for linear V/f pattern.

100% of torque boost corresponds to rated voltage of motor. A non-zero value means the
output voltage rises on the basis of V/f curve and this takes effect at parameter values 0~6 of
d1-00. It is suggested this parameter value be gradually increased from zero until the starting
requirement is met. Boost value is not suggested to be set to a relatively big one, as it is likely
to bring about a bigger drive current and higher motor temperature.

Torque boost diagram is shown as Fig. 6-43:

- 189 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Output voltage (V)

Rated voltage of motor

Boost value

Output frequency (Hz)

Rated frequency of motor

Fig. 6-43

Factory default:
d1-10 Slip compensation gain Range: 0.0%~400.0%
100.0%

Used under V/f control. When the motor is driving an electric-driven load, motor speed drops
with the increase of load. When the motor is driving a power generating load, motor speed will
increase with the increase of load. Appropriate slip compensation gain can maintain constant
motor speed when the motor load is changing.

To ensure the performance of slip compensation gain, setting motor rated speed d0-06 is
essential. The difference between d0-06 and the motor running speed without load is the rated
slip. Through real-time detection of motor load, slip compensation automatically adjusts the
drive output frequency on the basis of rated slip and motor load, reducing the impact of
changing load on motor speed.

Gain adjustment method: please make the adjustment around 100%. When motor is driving an
electric-driven load: if motor speed is relatively lower, the gain should be appropriately
increased; if motor speed is relatively higher, reduce the gain appropriately. When motor is
driving a power generating load: if motor speed is relatively lower, the gain should be
decreased; if motor speed is relatively higher, increase the gain appropriately.

Diagram of slip compensation gain is shown as Fig. 6-44 and 6-45.

- 190 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Motor speed
Slip compensation gain (d1-10) = 100%

Slip compensation gain (d1-10) = 50%

Slip compensation gain (d1-10) = 0%

n1 = rated speed of motor

n2 = rated motor speed - rated slip/2
n3 = rated motor speed - rated slip

Motor load
Rated load

Fig. 6-44 Diagram of slip compensation on electric driven load

Slip compensation gain (d1-10) = 0% Motor speed

n3 = rated motor speed + rated slip

n2 = rated motor speed + rated slip/2
n1 = rated motor speed

Slip
Slip compensation
compensation gain (d1-10) =
gain (d1-10) 50%
= 100%

Motor load

Rated load

Fig. 6-45 Diagram of slip compensation on power generating load

Range: 0.00Hz~maximum Factory default:

d1-11 Droop control
frequency 0.00Hz

In case several drives drive one load, different drives may bear different proportion of the load.
Through the setting of this parameter, the uniform load distribution on these drives could be
attained.

The drive takes real-time detection of its load. Output frequency is automatically dropped
according to the load and this parameter value, reducing itself borne load proportion.
Parameter value of d1-11 corresponds to drop frequency with rated load.

- 191 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

d1-12 Current limitation mode Range: 0~5 Factory default: 1

0: Disabled
1: Set by d1-13
2: Set by AI1
3: Set by AI2
4: Set by EAI
Drive output current is limited by analog input in the range of " 0~200% x rated current of drive".
5: Set by X6/DI
Drive output current is limited by X6/DI pulse input in the range of "0~200% x rated current of
drive".

When a non-zero value is set by d1-12, the current limitation is enabled. When output current
rises dramatically because of sharp change of load, instant adjustment of output frequency will
keep the output frequency below the set limitation. When the load is reduced, output frequency
will recover promptly. If the setting speed or motor load change dramatically, this function can
effectively reduce over-current fault.

When current limitation is enabled, the output frequency at constant speed may change at
times and the Accel/Decel time may probably be automatically prolonged. Therefore, this
function should not be used where output frequency or Accel/Decel time is not allowed to
change.

Digital setting of current Factory default:

d1-13 Range: 20.0%~200.0%
limit value 160.0%

When d1-12 is set to "1: set by d1-13", the drive keeps output current less than this current limit
value through instantaneous adjustment of output frequency. 100% current limit value
corresponds to rated current of the drive. If this parameter value is set to a relatively big one, it
will increase the chances of over-current. If this parameter value is set to a relatively small one,
it will affect the loaded capability of the drive.

Current limit coeff on flux Factory default:

d1-14 Range: 0.001~1.000
weakening 0.500

When the drive runs at the frequency higher than rated frequency of motor, Accel/Decel
characteristic and output torque can be effectively improved by setting this parameter
appropriately.

Factory default:
d1-15 Energy saving percentage Range: 0%~40.0%
0.0%

During no-load or light-load application, load current is detected so as to appropriately reduce

output voltage, reducing the copper loss and iron loss of motor with the purpose of energy
saving. The larger the energy-saving percentage is, the better the energy-saving effect will be,

- 192 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

but the response will be slower. This parameter is applicable to loads such as fan and pump or
light-load for a long time. Where rapid change is required, this parameter is suggested to be
default set 0.0%.

V/f oscillation suppression Factory default:

d1-16 Range: 0~3000
gain 1 38
V/f oscillation suppression
d1-17 Range: 0~3000 Factory default: 0
gain 2

Under V/f control, speed and current oscillation is likely to occur due to load vibration, and may
lead to system failure even over current protection. This is particularly obvious during no-load
or light-load applications. The appropriate setting of parameter values of d1-16 and d1-17
would effectively suppress speed and current oscillation. In many case it is not necessary to
modify the default setting. Please make progressive change around default setting, since
excessive setting will influence V/f control performance.

Voltage setting on V/f

d1-18 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
separated pattern
This parameter takes effect when d1-00 is set to 7 or 8.
0: d1-19 digital setting
Under V/f separated pattern 1, drive output voltage is completely determined by d1-19. 100%
corresponds to motor rated voltage.
Under V/f separated pattern 2, output voltage = voltage calculated according to linear V/f
curve x 2 x d1-19.
1: Set by AI1
2: Set by AI2
3: Set by EAI
Under V/f separated pattern 1, drive output voltage is completely determined by the selected
analog. The biggest setting is the motor rated voltage.
Under V/f separated pattern 2, output voltage = voltage calculated according to linear V/f
curve x the proportion determined by the analog input. The maximum set value can be
200%.
4: Process PID output
Outputs voltage on the basis of process PID.
Under V/f separated pattern 1, output voltage is determined by the output of process PID.
Under V/f separated pattern 2, the output of process PID is a proportional value whose
maximum set value could be 200%. Then this proportional value is multiplied by the voltage
calculated according to linear V/f curve to obtain drive output voltage. Refer to parameter
group F0 for information of process PID.
5: AI1 + process PID output
Under V/f separated pattern 1, drive output voltage is determined by "AI1 + process PID
output". The maximum set value of AI1 is motor rated voltage.

- 193 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Under V/f separated pattern 2, "AI1 + process PID" output is a proportional value whose
maximum set value corresponds to 200%. This proportional value is multiplied by the voltage
calculated according to linear V/f to obtain drive output voltage.

Digital set voltage on V/f Factory default:

d1-19 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
separated pattern 0.0%

When 0 is selected at d1-18, the output voltage will be determined by d1-19.

Voltage variation time on Factory default:

d1-20 Range: 0.00s~600.00s
V/f separated pattern 0.01s

Sets the output voltage change rate under V/f separation pattern. This parameter value is the
time rising from 0V to motor rated voltage or dropping from rated voltage to 0V.

Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1

Set control parameters in Group d2 when motor 1 is selected as current load motor on which
sensor-less vector control is performed.

d2-00 Reserved Reserved Reserved

ASR high-speed Factory default:
d2-01 Range: 0.0~20.0
proportional gain Kp1 2.0
ASR high-speed Factory default:
d2-02 Range: 0.000s~8.000s
integration time Ti1 0.200
ASR low-speed Factory default:
d2-03 Range: 0.0~20.0
proportional gain Kp2 2.0
ASR low-speed integration Factory default:
d2-04 Range: 0.000s~8.000s
time Ti2 0.200
Factory default:
d2-05 ASR switching frequency 1 Range: 0.00Hz~d2-06
5.00Hz
Range: d2-05~upper limiting Factory default:
d2-06 ASR switching frequency 2
frequency 10.00Hz

Under sensor-less vector control (SVC), motor speed is kept at set value by automatic speed
regulator (ASR). ASR parameters should be set in d2-01~d2-06.

The proportional gain Kp and integration time Ti of ASR can be set through d2-01~d2-04 so as
to change the speed response characteristic under SVC. Increment of proportional gain Kp can
bring in fast response of the system. However, bigger Kp value will bring about larger system
oscillation.

Reduction of integration time Ti can also quicken response time, but small Ti value will result in
big system overshooting and may easily bring about oscillation. Principle for adjustment of

- 194 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

proportional gain Kp and integration time Ti: proportional gain Kp is usually adjusted prior,
maximizing Kp at the premise of ensuring the system is subject to no oscillation, and then
adjust integration time Ti to provide the system with both instant response characteristic and
less overshooting.

d2-01~d2-02 are the proportional gain and integration time of the drive at high speed.
d2-03~d2-04 are the proportional gain and integration time of the drive at low speed. Distinction
between high speed and low speed is determined by d2-05~d2-06. The diagram is as shown in
Fig. 6-46.

ASR KP ASR KI

Frequency Frequency

Fig. 6-46

ASR parameters are normally adjusted in the following order: select appropriate switching
frequency. Adjust proportional gain d2 -01 and integration time d2-02 at high speed, ensuring
the system has no oscillation and meets the requirements of dynamic response characteristics.
Adjust proportional gain d2-03 and integration time d2-04 at low speed, ensuring there is no
oscillation at low speed and requirements of dynamic response characteristics are met.

 ATTENTION:
Inappropriate parameters of Kp, Ti may bring about overcurrent or overvoltage faults.
Usually, fine adjustment should be performed close to factory default parameter.

Factory default:
d2-07 ASR input filtering time Range: 0.0ms~500.0ms
5.0ms

Sets the input filtering time of ASR. No need to modify its default setting if there is no special
requirement.

Factory default:
d2-08 ASR output filtering time Range: 0.0ms~500.0ms
0.3ms

Sets the output filtering time of ASR. No need to modify its default setting if there is no special
requirement.

- 195 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

ACR proportion coefficient Factory default:

d2-09 Range: 0.000~4.000
Kp 1.000
ACR integration coefficient Factory default:
d2-10 Range: 0.000~4.000
Ki 1.000

These two parameters determine the characteristics of automatic current regulator (ACR)
under SVC pattern. Increment of proportion coefficient and/or integration coefficient can
shorten torque response time. Reduction of proportion coefficient an/or integration coefficient
can increase the stability of the system. Inappropriate setting may bring about system
oscillation. Factory default is not needed to be changed in most cases.

Factory default:
d2-11 Pre-excitation time Range: 0.000s~5.000s
0.200s

Applies to asynchronous motor. To attain quick start, it is necessary to perform pre-excitation

before the running of motor, and the pre-excitation time is set by this parameter. Properly
establish stable flux prior and then ramp up quickly. The set value of 0.000s means "no
pre-excitation" and ramp up at the moment of the receipt of run command. Pre-excitation time
is not included in Accel/Decel time. Factory default is suggested to maintain in most cases.

Driven torque restriction

d2-12 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
source

Under the pattern of SVC speed control, and when the motor is driving an electric-driven load, it
usually needs to restrict the output torque of the motor. This parameter sets the torque
restriction source.
0: d2-14 digital setting
Restrict output torque through digital set parameter d2-14. 100% corresponds to motor rated
torque.
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: EAI (on IO option board)
Limit the torque through analog input. The limited range is "0~200%r x rated torque".
4: X6/DI pulse input
Restrict the torque through X6/DI pulse input. The limited range is "0~200%r x rated torque".
5: Communication
A superior device sets the restricted value of the output torque through standard RS485
communication interface at the drive. Refer to parameter Group H0 and appendix for details
of communication.

Braking torque restriction

d2-13 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
source

Under the pattern of SVC speed control, and when the motor is driving a power generating load,

- 196 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

it needs to restrict the output brake torque of the motor. This parameter sets the torque
restriction source.
0: d2-15 digital setting
Restrict output brake torque through digital set parameter d2-15. 100% corresponds to rated
torque of the motor.
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: EAI (on IO option board)
Limit the torque through analog input. The limited range is "0~200%r x rated torque".
4: X6/DI pulse input
Restrict the torque through X6/DI pulse input. The limited range is "0~200%r x rated torque".
5: Communication
A superior device sets the restricted value of the output torque through standard RS485
communication interface at the drive. Refer to parameter Group H0 and appendix for details
of communication.

Digital setting of driven Factory default:

d2-14 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
torque 180.0%

When 0 is selected for d2-12, this parameter value limits the maximum output driven torque.
100% corresponds to rated torque of the motor.

Digital setting of brake Factory default:

d2-15 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
torque 180.0%

When d2-13 is set to 0, this parameter value limits the maximum output brake torque. 100%
corresponds to rated torque of the motor.

Torque limit coefficient in Factory default:

d2-16 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
flux weakening 50.0%

Under the pattern of SVC speed control, and when the drive is running at frequency higher than
rated frequency (flux weakening zone), appropriate torque limit coefficient can effectively
improve the performance of output torque and Accel/Decel characteristics.

Driven slip compensation Factory default:

d2-17 Range: 10.0%~300.0%
gain 100.0%

Under SVC pattern, adjustment of this parameter value can improve the speed accuracy when
driving electric-driven load. If the load is becoming heavier and the motor speed is relatively
lower, set a bigger value, while the motor speed is relatively higher, set a smaller value.

Brake slip compensation Factory default:

d2-18 Range: 10.0%~300.0%
gain 100.0%

- 197 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Under SVC pattern, adjustment of this parameter value can improve the speed accuracy when
driving power generating load. If the load is becoming heavier and the motor speed is relatively
higher, set a bigger value, while the motor speed is relatively lower, set a smaller value.

Group d3 Parameters of Motor 2

When motor 2 is selected as current loaded motor, set motor parameters in Group d3. The
specification of parameters of motor 2 in Group d3 is exactly the same with that of parameters
of motor 1 in Group d0.

d3-00 Type of motor 2 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
d3-01 Power rating of motor 2 Range: 0.4kW~6553.5kW
model dependent
Factory default:
d3-02 Rated voltage of motor 2 Range: 0V~480V
380V
Factory default:
d3-03 Rated current of motor 2 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A
model dependent
Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit Factory default:
d3-04 Rated frequency of motor 2
frequency 50.00Hz
d3-05 Pole number of motor 2 Range: 1~80 Factory default: 4
Factory default:
d3-06 Rated speed of motor 2 Range: 0~65535 r/min
model dependent
Stator resistance R1 of Factory default:
d3-07 Range: 0.001Ω~65.535Ω
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Leakage inductance L1 of Factory default:
d3-08 Range: 0.1mH~6553.5mH
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Rotor resistance R2 of Factory default:
d3-09 Range: 0.001Ω~65.535Ω
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Mutual inductance L2 of Factory default:
d3-10 Range: 0.1mH~6553.5mH
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
No-load current of asyn. Factory default:
d3-11 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A
motor 2 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 1 of Factory default:
d3-12 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 2 of Factory default:
d3-13 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Flux weakening coeff 3 of Factory default:
d3-14 Range: 0.0000~1.0000
asyn. motor 2 model dependent
Stator resistance of syn. Factory default:
d3-15 Range: 0.001Ω～65.535Ω
motor 2 0.500Ω

- 198 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

D-axis inductance of syn. Factory default:

d3-16 Range: 0.01mH～655.35mH
motor 2 9.00mH
Q-axis inductance of syn. Factory default:
d3-17 Range: 0.01mH～655.35mH
motor 2 9.00mH
Back EMF voltage of syn. Factory default:
d3-18 Range: 0.0~1000.0V
motor 2 380.0V
Autotuning current of syn. Range: 0.0%～100.0%，100% is Factory default:
d3-19
motor 2 motor rated current 35.0%
d3-22 Autotuning of motor 2 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
Overload protection mode
d3-23 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1
of motor 2
Overload protection Factory default:
d3-24 Range: 0.1min~15.0min
detection time of motor 2 5.0min
Input channel of motor 2
d3-25 temperature transducer Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0
signal
Thermal protection
Factory default:
d3-26 threshold of motor 2 Range: 0.00V~10.00V
10.00V
temperature transducer
Single phase current Factory default:
d3-27 Range: 0.0%~400.0%
overload point 150.0%
Single phase current Factory default:
d3-28 Range: 0.001~50.000s
overload time 1.000s

Group d4 V/f Control Parameters of Motor 2

Set control parameters in Group d4 when motor 2 is selected as current loaded motor on which
V/f control is performed. The specification of V/f control parameters of motor 2 in Group d4 is
exactly the same with that of V/f control parameters of motor 1 in Group d1.

d4-00 V/f curve setting Range: 0~8 Factory default: 0

Range: 0.00Hz~rated frequency Factory default:
d4-01 V/f frequency value f3
of motor 50.00Hz
Factory default:
d4-02 V/f voltage value V3 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
100.0%
Factory default:
d4-03 V/f frequency value f2 Range: d4-05~d4-01
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d4-04 V/f voltage value V2 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%

- 199 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory default:
d4-05 V/f frequency value f1 Range: d4-07~d4-03
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d4-06 V/f voltage value V1 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
d4-07 V/f frequency value f0 Range: 0.00Hz~d4-05
0.00Hz
Factory default:
d4-08 V/f voltage value V0 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
d4-09 Torque boost Range: 0.0%~30.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
d4-10 Slip compensation gain Range: 0.0%~300.0%
100.0%
Drooping FREQ of droop Range: 0.00Hz~maximum Factory default:
d4-11
control frequency 0.00Hz
d4-12 Current limitation source Range: 0~5 Factory default: 1
Digital setting of current Factory default:
d4-13 Range: 20.0%~200.0%
limit value 160.0%
Flux weakening current Factory default:
d4-14 Range: 0.001~1.000
limit coeff 0.500
Factory default:
d4-15 Energy saving percentage Range: 0.0%~40.0%
0.0%
V/f oscillation suppression Factory default:
d4-16 Range: 0~3000
gain 1 38
V/f oscillation suppression
d4-17 Range: 0~3000 Factory default: 0
gain 2
Voltage setting on V/f
d4-18 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
separated pattern
Digital set voltage on V/f Factory default:
d4-19 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
separated pattern 0.0%
Voltage variation time on Factory default:
d4-20 Range: 0.00s~600.00s
V/f separated pattern 0.01s

Group d5 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 2

Set control parameters in Group d5 when motor 2 is selected as current load motor on which
SVC is performed. The specification of SVC parameters of motor 2 in Group d5 is exactly the
same with that of SVC parameters of motor 1 in Group d3.

- 200 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

d5-00 Reserved Reserved Reserved

ASR high-speed Factory default:
d5-01 Range: 0.0~20.0
proportional gain Kp1 2.0
ASR high-speed Factory default:
d5-02 Range: 0.000s~8.000s
integration time Ti1 0.200
ASR low-speed Factory default:
d5-03 Range: 0.0~20.0
proportional gain Kp2 2.0
ASR low-speed integration Factory default:
d5-04 Range: 0.000s~8.000s
time Ti2 0.20
ASR switching frequency 1 Factory default:
d5-05 Range: 0.00Hz~d5-06
5.00Hz
ASR switching frequency 2 Range: d5-05~upper limit Factory default:
d5-06
frequency 10.00Hz
ASR input filtering time Factory default:
d5-07 Range: 0.0ms~500.0ms
5.0ms
ASR output filtering time Factory default:
d5-08 Range: 0.0ms~500.0ms
0.3ms
ACR proportion coefficient Factory default:
d5-09 Range: 0.000~4.000
Kp 1.000
ACR integration coefficient Factory default:
d5-10 Range: 0.000~4.000
Ki 1.000
Factory default:
d5-11 Pre-excitation time Range: 0.000s~5.000s
0.200s
Driven torque restriction
d5-12 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
source
Braking torque restriction
d5-13 Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0
source
Digital setting of driven Factory default:
d5-14 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
torque limit value 180.0%
Digital setting of braking Factory default:
d5-15 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
torque limit value 180.0%
Flux weakening torque limit Factory default:
d5-16 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
coeff 50.0%
Driven slip compensation Factory default:
d5-17 Range: 10.0%~300.0%
gain 100.0%
Brake slip compensation Factory default:
d5-18 Range: 10.0%~300.0%
gain 100.0%

- 201 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Group E Enhanced Function and Protection Parameters

Group E0 Enhanced Function

E0-00 Switching FREQ Range: 0.7~16.0kHz Model dependent

With lower switching frequency, output current of the drive produces higher harmonics, motor
loss increases, and temperature and motor noise rise, but drive temperature, drive leakage
current, and drive interference to external devices are lower or less.

with higher switching frequency, drive temperature will rise, drive leakage current is bigger, and
drive interference to external devices is bigger. However, motor loss and noise will be lower,
and motor temperature will drop.

The table below specifies the setting range and factory default of PWM switching frequency of
the drives at different power ratings:

Table 6-16
Power rating of the drives Setting Range Factory Default
≤15kW 0.7k~16k 8k
18.5kW~45kW 0.7k~10k 4k
55kW~75kW 0.7k~8k 3k
≥90kW 0.7k~3k 2k

Tips for PWM switching frequency setting:

1) When the motor line is too long, reduce switching frequency.
2) When torque at low speed is unstable, reduce switching frequency.
3) If the drive produces severe interference to surrounding equipment, reduce switching
frequency.
4) Leakage current of the drive is big, reduce switching frequency.
5) Drive temperature rise is relatively high, reduce switching frequency.
6) Motor temperature rise is relatively high, increase switching frequency.
7) Motor noise is relatively big, increase switching frequency.

Factory default:
E0-01 PWM optimization Range: 0000~1121
0100
 Ones place: switching FREQ relation with temperature
0: Self-adaption
1: No adaption
When self-adaption of PWM switching frequency is selected, the drive will automatically
reduce switching frequency with the temperature rise, protecting itself against overheat. Set
to 1 where PWM switching frequency change is not allowed.

- 202 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 Tens place: PWM modulation mode

0: five-segment and seven-segment self-switchover
1: five-segment mode
2: seven-segment mode
This selection is valid only for V/f control. When five-segment mode is selected, the drive has
low temperature rise but relatively higher output current harmonic. Under seven-segment
mode, it has relatively higher temperature rise but lower output current harmonic. Under SVC
pattern, PWM is seven-segment mode.
 Hundreds place: over-modulation adaption
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
At low grid voltage or long-term heavy-duty operation, over-modulation can improve the
voltage utilization and enhance the maximum voltage output capacity of the drive. This
parameter takes effect only for V/f control, while over-modulation is enabled all the time
under SVC pattern.
 Thousands place: PWM switching FREQ relation with output frequency
0: Self-adaption
1: No adaption
When this bit is set to 0, the drive running at low speed automatically reduces its switching
frequency, so as to improve the motor load carrying capacity at low speed. Please set this
bit to 1 if PWM switching frequency change is not allowed.

Action when run time Factory default:

E0-02 Range: 000~111
attained 000

 Ones place: action when consecutive run time attained

0: Run continued
When the drive consecutive run time attains the set value of E0-03, the drive will continue to
run.
1: Stop and fault reported
When the drive consecutive run time attains the set value of E0-03, the drive will report fault
code "to2" and coast to stop. Digital output terminal "consecutive run time attained" will
output ON. When E0-03 is set to 0, this parameter value is enabled.
 Tens place: action when accumulative run time attained
0: Run continued
When the drive accumulative run time attains the set value of E0-04, the drive will continue to
run.
1: Stop and fault reported
When the drive accumulative run time attains the set value of E0-04, the drive will report fault
"to3" and coast to stop. Digital output terminal "accumulative run time attained" will output
ON. When E0-04 is set to 0, this parameter value is enabled.

- 203 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 Hundreds place: unit of running time:

0: Second
1: Hour
Sets the unit of E0-03 consecutive run time and E0-04 accumulative run time.

Consecutive run time Factory default:

E0-03 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(h)
setting 0.0 s(h)

When consecutive run time attains this set value, the drive will perform the action set by ones
place of E0-02. Time unit is set at hundreds place of E0-02. When this parameter value is set to
0, this function is enabled.

Accumulative run time Factory default:

E0-04 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(h)
setting 0.0 s(h)

When accumulative run time attains this set value, the drive will perform the action set by tens
place of E0-02. Time unit is set at hundreds place of E0-02. When this parameter value is set to
0, this function is enabled.

E0-05 Mechanical brake control Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Process of mechanical brake control is as shown as Fig. 6-47 below:

Run command

Time
Frequency

Time
Current

Time
Mechanical brake control

Time

Fig. 6-47
1) Upon the receipt of run command, the drive will accelerate to the mechanical brake open
frequency set by E0-06.
2) When frequency attains the value as set by E0-06, digital output terminal "mechanical
brake control" outputs ON to control the mechanical brake open.

- 204 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

3) Perform constant-speed running at mechanical brake open frequency. During this period,
the drive keeps the output current no higher than the current as set by E0-07.
4) When the run time at mechanical brake open frequency attains set value of E0-08, the
drive will accelerate to set frequency.
5) Upon the receipt of stop command, the drive decelerate to mechanical brake close
frequency set by E0-09 and maintains constant-speed run at this frequency.
6) When the run frequency attains the set value of E0-09, waiting a period of time set by
E0-10, then digital output terminal "mechanical brake control" will output OFF signal to
control mechanical brake close.
7) When the time of output OFF signal "mechanical brake control" attains the set value of
E0-11, the drive will block the output and stop.

Mechanical brake open Factory default:

E0-06 Range: 0.00Hz~10.00Hz
frequency 2.50Hz

When frequency attains this value, digital output terminal "mechanical brake control" outputs
ON signal to control the open of mechanical brake. This value can be set the same value as
rated slip frequency of motor. Under V/f control, it could be set to a relatively large one.

Mechanical brake open Factory default:

E0-07 Range: 0.0%~200.0%
current 120.0%

Current is limited to this value before the drive starts its acceleration from mechanical brake
open frequency, i.e. before mechanical brake mechanism is opened.

Accel delay time after Factory default:

E0-08 Range: 0.0s~10.0s
brake open 1.0s

After digital output terminal "mechanical brake control" outputs ON signal, inverter will delay its
Accel with this time. Accelerated running will be started after this set time is elapsed. Please set
this parameter value in compliance with the time required for mechanism open of mechanical
brake.
Factory default:
E0-09 Mechanical brake FREQ Range: 0.00Hz~10.00Hz
2.00Hz

Upon the receipt of stop command, the drive decelerates to mechanical brake close frequency
set by E0-09 and maintains constant-speed running at this frequency, waiting for the output of
mechanical brake control signal.

Mechanical brake close Factory default:

E0-10 Range: 0.0s~10.0s
waiting time 0.0s

When the run frequency attains mechanical brake close frequency, after this waiting time,
digital output terminal "mechanical brake control" outputs OFF signal to control the mechanical
brake close.

- 205 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Mechanical brake close Factory default:

E0-11 Range: 0.0s~10.0s
holding time 1.0s

When the digital output terminal "mechanical brake control" outputs OFF signal, the frequency
will be maintained the time set by E0-11 to ensure complete mechanism close. Then, the drive
will block the output and stop.

Group E1 Protection Parameters

E1-00 Overvoltage stall Range: 0~2 Factory default: 1

0: Invalid in all process

1: Valid in all process
2: Valid only for decelerating
When the motor is decelerating with a high-inertia load or short-term regenerative braking
occurs during the run, the energy feedback to the drive may raise DC bus voltage, and thus
resulting in overvoltage protection.

When this parameter value is set to 1, the drive will detect its bus voltage and compare with
parameter set by E1-01. If the bus voltage exceeds value of E1-01, drive output frequency
shall be adjusted instantaneously and the deceleration time shall be automatically prolonged,
to maintain the stability of DC bus voltage. Set this parameter to 0 if frequency fluctuation or
Decel time prolonging is not allowed.

Overvoltage stall Factory default:

E1-01 Range: 120%~150%
protection voltage 130%

This value is a percentage compared to standard DC bus voltage.

E1-02 Undervoltage stall Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Under momentary voltage drop or momentary power loss, the drive will accordingly drop
output frequency, and compensate the voltage drop via the energy feedback from load, so as
to maintain consecutive running, no trip. This function applies to fans and centrifugal pumps
and such.

Factory default:
E1-03 Overload alarm Range: 000~111
000

 Ones place: detection option

0: Always detect
Overload alarm works all the time during drive running.

- 206 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

1: Detect at constant speed only

Overload pre-alarm only works during constant-speed running of inverter.
 Tens place: compared with
0: motor rated current
Compared object is the rated current relative to motor, and display "oL2" when the alarm is
given under this setting
1: drive rated current
Compared object is the rated current of drive, and display "oL1" when the alarm is given
under this setting.
 Hundreds place: drive action
0: Alarm but run continued
When drive output current exceeds the level set by E1-04 and the lasting time attains
parameter value of E1-05, the drive will alarm but continue its running.
1: Alarm and coast to stop
When drive output current exceeds the level set by E1-04 and the lasting time attains
parameter value of E1-05, the drive will display overload fault and coast to stop.

Factory default:
E1-04 Overload alarm threshold Range: 20.0%~200.0%
130.0%

When tens place of E1-03 is set to 0, this parameter value is a percentage compared to rated
current of motor. When tens place of E1-03 is set to 1, this parameter value is a percentage
compared to rated current of drive.

Overload alarm activation Factory default:

E1-05 Range: 0.1s~60.0s
time 5.0s

Sets the lasting time that overload alarm is activated when output current of drive is bigger than
the threshold set by E1-04.

Factory default:
E1-06 Protection action 1 Range: 0000~1111
0000
Factory default:
E1-07 Protection action 2 Range: 0000~3111
3001

These two parameters set the protection action of the drive in the following abnormal status.

Specification of E1-06:
 Ones place: reserved
 Tens place: temperature measurement circuit fault (OH3)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
 Hundreds place: abnormal EEPROM (EPr)
0: Coast to stop

- 207 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

1: Alarm but run continued

 Thousands place: abnormal terminal communication (TrC)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued

Specification of E1- 07:

 Ones place: abnormal power supply when running (SUE)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
 Tens place: current detection circuit failed (CtC)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
 Hundreds place: abnormal contactor (CCL)
0: Coast to stop
1: Alarm but run continued
 Thousands place: input supply fault /output phase loss (ISF, oPL)
0: Protection for neither input supply fault nor output phase loss
1: No protection for input supply fault, protection enabled for output phase loss
2: Protection enabled for input supply fault, no protection for output phase loss
3: Protection enabled both for input supply fault and output phase loss

 ATTENTION:
Please set "protection action" with caution since inappropriate setting may extend the fault.

Fault memory after power

E1-08 Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
loss

Determine whether or not the previous fault code is to be memorized and displayed upon the
power up of the drive after power loss.
0: Not memorized after power loss
1: Memorized after power loss

 ATTENTION:
Undervoltage fault "LoU" is not memorized after power loss.

E1-09 Fault auto-reset times Range: 0~20 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
E1-10 Auto-reset interval Range: 2.0s~20.0s
2.0s

When a fault occurs during the running, the drive will run at 0Hz with the time set by E1-10, and
then the fault will be reset and the drive continues to run. Times of automatic reset is set by
E1-09. Automatic reset is prohibited and fault protection shall be executed immediately when
E1-09 is set to 0.

- 208 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 ATTENTION:
1) Automatic fault reset is not performed at the following types of faults:
 Module protection "FAL"
 Parameter identification failed "tUN"
 Current detection abnormal "CtC"
 Ground short circuit protection at output side "GdP"
 Option board 1 connection abnormal "EC1"
 Converter module overload protection "oL3"
 Drive line connection abnormal "dLC"
 Analog terminal functional mutex (TEr)
 External equipment error "PEr"
 Consecutive run time attained "to2"
 Accumulative run time attained fault "to3"
 Power supply abnormal during running "SUE"
 Parameter copy fault "CPy"
 Software version compatibility failure "SFt"
 CPU interference fault "CPU"
 Reference protection "oCr"
 5V power supply out-of-limit "SP1"
 Undervoltage protection "LoU"
 PID feedback loss ”Plo”
2) Please use automatic fault reset function with caution, or fault will be extended.

Factory default:
E1-11 Relay action on drive fault Range: 000~111
010

 Ones place: when undervoltage fault occurs

0: No action
1: Action enabled
Set whether or not fault relay acts when undervoltage occurs.
 Tens place: when fault locked
0: No action
1: Action enabled
Set whether or not the relay acts when the fault locked at latest power loss after power up.
 Hundred's place: at interval of auto- reset
0: No action
1: Action enabled
Set whether or not the relay acts when fault occurs in automatic reset status.

E1-12 Cooling fan control Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Auto run
The fans run all the time during the running. Determine if the fans continue to run or stop

- 209 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

according to module temperature after stop.

1: Always run after power up
The fans run all the time after applying power to the drive.

Drive overheat alarm Factory default:

E1-13 Range: 0.0℃~100.0℃
threshold 80.0℃

This parameter sets the threshold of drive overheat alarm.

Group F Application

Group F0 Process PID

The purpose of process PID control is to make feedback value consistent with the set value.
PID control diagram is shown as Fig. 6-48.

- 210 -
 Proportional gain

PID setting F0-00 Integration selection by decade of

PIDPID positive and F0-03
negative adjustment Integration
F0-01 digital setting paused 1
0 0
Filtering time + Integration gain
PID offset limit
AI1 of PID setting +
F0-17 1 0
F0-05 - 1 +
AI2 -1

EAI +
GK620 User Manual

X6/DI pulse input

Communication input

Last time Integration

PID feedback F0-02 value

AI1
PID differential limit
AI2 F0-18
Filtering time
EAI of PID fdback
F0-06 Differential gain
AI1+AI2

AI1-AI2

- 211 -
max｛AI1，AI2｝

min｛AI1，AI2｝ V/f separated enabled PID output limit

Output voltage PID
X6/DI pulse input paused
0 Filtering time of PID output
Communication input F0-07
1
Relationship of frequency Last time PID output
direction and run
Holding time of PID initial command: the unit of
value F0-03
0:not attained 1: attained
1
Proportional gain, integration gain, differential gain decided by F0-08~F0-13.
Output 0
frequency PID integration pause switched by digital input terminal #35
0 PID pause switched by digital input terminal #34
1
PID output frequency limit：it is upper limit frequency when the direction is the same with run
command, while it is determined by F0-23 when the direction is opposite

PID initial value F0-19

Fig. 6-48
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

F0-00 PID setting Range: 0~5 Factory default: 0

Select the setting source of PID control.

0: F0-01 digital setting
1:AI1
2:AI2
3: EAI (on IO option board)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Communication input
Factory default:
F0-01 PID digital setting Range: 0.0%~100.0%
50.0%

When F0-00 is set to 0, this parameter value is taken as the set value of PID.

F0-02 PID feedback Range: 0~8 Factory default: 0

Select the feedback source of PID control.

0:AI1
1:AI2
2: EAI (on IO option board)
3:AI1+AI2
4:AI1-AI2
5:max｛AI1，AI2｝
6:min｛AI1，AI2｝
7: X6/DI pulse input
8: Communication input

F0-03 PID adjustment Range: 00~11 Factory default: 11

 Ones place: output frequency
0: Must be the same direction as the set run direction
When PID frequency output direction is opposite to the rotary set direction, PID output is 0.
1: Opposite direction allowed
PID frequency output direction can be opposite to the rotary set direction, and PID output
performs normally.
 Tens place: integration selection
0: Integral continued when frequency attains upper/lower frequency
Under PID control, when output frequency attains upper/lower limit of frequency or
parameter value of F0-23 (maximum frequency if it is opposite to the rotary set direction), PID
integral continues. This mode requires longer time of quitting saturation.
1: Integral stopped when frequency attains upper/lower limit
Under PID control, when output frequency attains upper/lower limit of frequency or
parameter value of F0-23 (maximum frequency if it is opposite to the rotary set direction), PID
integral will cease. This mode can quit integral saturation status rapidly.

- 212 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

PID positive and negative

F0-04 Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
adjustment

0: Positive adjustment
1: Negative adjustment
This parameter can be used with digital input terminal "PID adjustment direction" to select
positive or negative adjustment of PID.

Table 6-17
F0-04 PID adjustment direction Adjustment
terminal
0 OFF Positive
0 ON Negative
1 OFF Negative
1 ON Positive

Positive adjustment: when feedback signal is smaller than PID setting, output frequency of the
drive will rise to reach PID balance.
when feedback signal is bigger than PID setting, output frequency of the
drive will drop to reach PID balance.
Negative adjustment: when feedback signal is smaller than PID setting, output frequency of the
drive will drop to reach PID balance.
when feedback signal is bigger than PID setting, output frequency of the
drive will rise to reach PID balance.

Factory default:
F0-05 Filtering time of PID setting Range: 0.00s~60.00s
0.00s
Filtering time of PID Factory default:
F0-06 Range: 0.00s~60.00s
feedback 0.00s
Factory default:
F0-07 Filtering time of PID output Range: 0.00s~60.00s
0.00s

Set the filtering time of PID setting, feedback and output.

Factory default:
F0-08 Proportional gain Kp1 Range: 0.0~200.0
50.0
Factory default:
F0-09 Integration time Ti1 Range: 0.000s~50.000s
0.500s
Factory default:
F0-10 Derivative time Td1 Range: 0.000s~50.000s
0.000s

Process PID is provided with two groups of proportion, integral and differential parameters set
by F0-14. F0-08~F0-10 are the first group of parameters.

- 213 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Proportional gain Kp: dynamic response of the system can be quickened by increasing
proportional gain Kp. However, excessive Kp value would bring about system oscillation. Only
proportional gain control cannot eliminate steady state error.

Integration time: dynamic response of the system can be quickened by reducing integration
time Ti. However, excessively small Ti value would result in serious system overshooting and
may easily bring about oscillation. Integral control can be used to eliminate steady state error
but is unable to control sharp changes.

Differential time Td: it can predict the change trend of offset and thus can rapidly respond to the
change, improving dynamic performance. However, this is vulnerable to interference. Please
use differential control with caution.

Factory default:
F0-11 Proportional gain Kp2 Range: 0.0~200.0
50.0
Factory default:
F0-12 Integration time Ti2 Range: 0.000s~50.000s
0.500s
Factory default:
F0-13 Derivative time Td2 Range: 0.000s~50.000s
0.000s

Process PID is provided with two groups of proportion, integral and differential parameters set
by F0-14. F0-11~ F0-13 are the second group of parameters.

F0-14 PID parameter switch Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

Process PID is provided with two groups of proportional, integral and differential parameters,
which is set by this parameter.
0: No switch, determined by parameters Kp1, Ti1 and Td1
Always determined by Kp1, Ti1 and Td1 set at F0-08~F0-10.
1: Auto switched on the basis of input offset
When the offset between setting and feedback is less than the set value of F0-15, PID
adjustment is determined by Kp1, Ti1 and Td1. When the offset between setting and
feedback is bigger than the set value of F0-15, PID adjustment is determined by Kp2, Ti2 and
Td2 set at F0-11~F0-13.
2: Switched by terminal
When digital input terminal "PID parameters switch" is OFF, it is determined by Kp1, Ti1 and
Td1. When "PID parameters switch" is ON, it is determined by Kp2, Ti2 and Td2

Input offset under Factory default:

F0-15 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
PID auto switch 20.0%

When F0-14 is set to 1, this parameter sets the switching point of the two groups of PID
parameters. When the offset between setting and feedback is less than this set value, it is

- 214 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

determined by Kp1, Ti1 and Td1. When the offset between setting and feedback is bigger than
this set value, it is determined by Kp2, Ti2 and Td2.

Factory default:
F0-16 Sampling period T Range: 0.001s~50.000s
0.002s

Sampling period aims at feedback. PID controller performs the sampling and compute once in
each sampling period. The longer the sampling period T is, the slower the response time will
be.

Factory default:
F0-17 PID offset limit Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%

If the offset between PID feedback and setting is more than this set value, PID regulator will
implement regulation. If the offset between PID feedback and setting is less than this set value,
PID will stop the regulation and the PID controller output will be kept unchanged. This function
can improve the stability of PID performance.

Factory default:
F0-18 PID derivative limit Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.5%

Sets differential output limit of PID control.

Factory default:
F0-19 PID initial value Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
PID initial value holding Factory default:
F0-20 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s
time 0.0s

PID does not make adjustment when the drive starts its running, but outputs the value set by
F0-19 and maintains the holding time set by F0-20, then starts PID adjustment. When F0-20 is
set to 0, PID initial value is disabled. This function makes PID adjustment get into stable status
fast.

PID feedback loss Factory default:

F0-21 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
detection value 0.0%
PID feedback loss Factory default:
F0-22 Range: 0.0s~30.0s
detection time 1.0s

When offset between feedback and setting of PID is bigger than set value of F0-21 and the
lasting time attains the set time of F0-22, the drive reports fault "Plo". If F0-22 is set to 0,
feedback loss detection is disabled.

Cutoff FREQ when opposite to Range: 0.00Hz~maximum Factory default:

F0-23
rotary set direction frequency 50.00Hz

When rotary set direction is forward, while PID output is reverse, the maximum reverse

- 215 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

frequency will be determined by F0-23. When rotary set direction is reverse, while PID output is
forward, the maximum forward frequency will be determined by F0-23.

F0-24 PID computation option Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: No computation in stop status

1: Computation continued in stop status

Group F1 Multi-step Frequency

FREQ set source of

F1-00 Range: 0~8 Factory default: 0
multi-step 0

0: Digital setting F1-02

1: Digital setting b0-02 + control panel ∧/∨ adjustment
2: Digital setting b0-02 + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment
3:AI1
4:AI2
5: EAI (on IO option board)
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Communication input
At most 16-step of frequency can be set through the combination of "multi-step frequency
terminals 1~4" of digital input. Multi-step frequency 2~15 are only digital setting while a number
of setting sources can be selected for multi-step frequency 0~1. Parameter value of F1-00
determines command source of step 0.

FREQ set source of

F1-01 Range: 0~8 Factory default: 0
multi-step 1

0: Digital setting F1-03

1: Digital setting b0-04 + control panel ∧/∨ adjustment
2: Digital setting b0-04 + terminal UP/DOWN adjustment
3:AI1
4:AI2
5: EAI (on IO option)
6: X6/DI pulse input
7: Process PID output
8: Communication input
At most 16-step of frequency can be set through the combination of "multi-step frequency
terminals 1~4" of digital input. Multi-step frequency 2~15 are only digital setting while a number
of setting sources can be selected for multi-step frequency 0~1. Parameter value of F1-01
determines command source of step 1.

- 216 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
F1-02 Multi-step frequency 0 Range: -100.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-03 Multi-step frequency 1
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-04 Multi-step frequency 2
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-05 Multi-step frequency 3
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-06 Multi-step frequency 4
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-07 Multi-step frequency 5
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-08 Multi-step frequency 6
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-09 Multi-step frequency 7
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-10 Multi-step frequency 8
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-11 Multi-step frequency 9
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-12 Multi-step frequency 10
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-13 Multi-step frequency 11
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-14 Multi-step frequency 12
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-15 Multi-step frequency 13
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-16 Multi-step frequency 14
0.0%
Range: -100.0%~100.0% Factory default:
F1-17 Multi-step frequency 15
0.0%

 ATTENTION:
F1-02~F1-17 is relevant to upper limit b0-09

At most 16 steps of multi-step frequency can be set by different status combinations of

"multi-step frequency terminals 1~4" of digital input, as shown in Table 6-18.

- 217 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Table 6-18
Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step
Command frequency
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
Multi-step frequency
OFF OFF OFF OFF
0(F1-00)
Multi-step frequency
OFF OFF OFF ON
1(F1-01)
Multi-step frequency
OFF OFF ON OFF
2(F1-04)
Multi-step frequency
OFF OFF ON ON
3(F1-05)
Multi-step frequency
OFF ON OFF OFF
4(F1-06)
Multi-step frequency
OFF ON OFF ON
5(F1-07)
Multi-step frequency
OFF ON ON OFF
6(F1-08)
Multi-step frequency
OFF ON ON ON
7(F1-09)
Multi-step frequency
ON OFF OFF OFF
8(F1-10)
Multi-step frequency
ON OFF OFF ON
9(F1-11)
Multi-step frequency
ON OFF ON OFF
10(F1-12)
Multi-step frequency
ON OFF ON ON
11(F1-13)
Multi-step frequency
ON ON OFF OFF
12(F1-14)
Multi-step frequency
ON ON OFF ON
13(F1-15)
Multi-step frequency
ON ON ON OFF
14(F1-16)
Multi-step frequency
ON ON ON ON
15(F1-17)

- 218 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Group F2 Simple PLC

Simple PLC is a multi-step frequency generator. The drive can automatically change run
frequency and direction based on the run time so as to meet on-site technological requirements.
Flow chart is shown as Fig. 6-49.

PLC step completed

Pulse length: 500ms

PLC cycle completed

Fig. 6-49

a0~a15 are the Accel times of steps, while d0~d15 are the Decel times.
f0~f15 are the set frequencies of steps while T0~T15 are the run times.

Upon the completion of current step of simple PLC, digital output terminal "PLC step
completed" outputs ON signal, 500ms. When simple PLC finishes a run cycle, digital output
terminal "PLC cycle completed" outputs ON signal, 500ms.

Factory default:
F2-00 Simple PLC run mode Range: 0000~1212
0000

 Ones place: PLC run mode

0: Stop after a single cycle
PLC stops upon the completion of one cycle and it won’t be started unless another run
command is given, shown as Fig. 6-50.

- 219 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

PLC step completed

Pulse length: 500ms

PLC cycle completed

Run command
Fig. 6-50
1: Continue to run in the last FREQ after a single cycle
After the completion of one cycle, PLC maintains the run frequency and direction of the last
step. See the figure below:
f7
f6 a7
f5 a6 f15
f4 a5
f3 a4 f14 a15
f2 a3 d8 f13 a14
f1 a2
f0 a1
a0 a13
a8
f8
a9 d13
f9
a10
f10 f12
a11 d12
f11

T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

PLC阶段完成
PLC step completed
Pulse 500ms
length: 500ms
宽度的脉冲

PLC循环完成
PLC cycle completed

Run command
运行命令
Fig. 6-51

- 220 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

2: Cycle repeated
PLC automatically starts another cycle after finishing one cycle until there is a stop
command, shown as Fig. 6-52.
f7
f6 a7
f5 a6 f15
f4 a5
f3 a4 f14 a15
f2 a3 d0
d8 f13 a14
f1 a2
f0 a1 f0
a0 a13
a8
f8
a9 d13
f9
a10
f10 f12
a11 d12
f11

T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

PLC
PLC step completed
阶段完成
Pulse 500ms
length:宽度的脉冲
500ms

PLC循环完成
PLC cycle completed

Run command
运行命令

Fig. 6-52

 Tens place: power loss memory

0: No memory on power loss
The drive does not memorize PLC run status on power loss and starts the run from step 0
after power up again.
1: Memorized on power loss
The drive saves PLC run status on power loss, including the run step, run frequency and
finished run time at the moment of power loss. After the next power up, the run will be
continued in accordance with the memorized status.
 Hundreds place: starting mode
0: Run from the first step “multi-step frequency 0”
When restarted after stop, the drive will start to run from “step 0”.
1: Continue to run from the step of stop (or fault)
At the moment drive stop, the drive automatically records the run time of current step. When
restarted, the drive will gets into this step, continue to run the remanent time with the
frequency of this step, shown as Fig. 6-53.

- 221 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Output frequency

Coast to stop at fault

Time

Run time Run Run time Remanent Run time

of step 0 time of of step 2 time of of step 3
step 1 step 2

Run command

Fig. 6-53

2: Continue to run from the step and frequency at which the run stopped (or fault occurred)
At the moment of stop, the drive not only records the run time of current step, but also
records the run frequency at the moment of stop. When restarted, it will restore the run
frequency that was recorded at the moment of stop, and then continue to run the remanent
step, as shown in Fig. 6-54:
Output frequency

Coast to stop at fault

Time

Run time Run Run time Remanent Run time

of step 0 time of of step 2 time of of step 3
step 1 step 2

Run
command

Fig. 6-54

 Thousands place: unit of simple PLC run time

0: Second
1: Minute
Sets the unit of running time and Accel/Decel time of simple PLC.

- 222 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
F2-01 Setting of multi-step 0 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

Sets the frequency of step 0 of simple PLC.
0: Multi-step frequency 0 (F1-02)
1:AI1
2:AI2
3: EAI (on IO option board)
4: X6/DI pulse input
5: Process PID output
6: Multi-step frequency
7: Communication input
 Tens place: run direction
Sets the run direction for step 0 of simple PLC.
0: Forward
1: Reverse
2: Determined by run command
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option
Sets the Accel/Decel time step 0.
0: Accel/Decel time 1
1: Accel/Decel time 2
2: Accel/Decel time 3
3: Accel/Decel time 4
The Accel/Decel time of simple PLC running is set here, not determined by digital input terminal
"Accel/Decel time determinant 1~2". In addition, Accel/Decel time unit is set through thousands
place of F2-00 and is independent of the setting of b2-00.

Factory default:
F2-02 Run time of step 0 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time for step 0 of simple PLC and the time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-03 Setting of step 1 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 1 (F1-03)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

- 223 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory default:
F2-04 Run time of step 1 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time for step 1 of simple PLC and the time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-05 Setting of step 2 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 2 (F1-04)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-06 Run time of step 2 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 2. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-07 Setting of step 3 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 3 (F1-05)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-08 Run time of step 3 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 3 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-09 Setting of step 4 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 4 (F1-06)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-10 Run time of step 4 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 4 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

- 224 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
F2-11 Setting of step 5 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 5 (F1-07)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-12 Run time of step 5 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 5 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-13 Setting of step 6 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 6 (F1-08)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-14 Run time of step 6 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 6 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-15 Setting of step 7 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 7 (F1-09)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-16 Run time of step 7 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 7 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-17 Setting of step 8 Range: 000~327
000

- 225 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 8 (F1-10)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-18 Run time of step 8 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 8 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-19 Setting of step 9 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 9 (F1-11)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundred's place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-20 Run time of step 9 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time for step 9 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-21 Setting of step 10 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 10 (F1-12)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-22 Run time of step 10 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 10 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-23 Setting of step 11 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 11 (F1-13)
1~7: same as F2-01

- 226 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)

 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-24 Run time of step 11 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 11 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-25 Setting of step 12 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 12 (F1-14)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-26 Running time of step 12 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 12 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-27 Setting of step 13 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-28 Run time of step 13 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 13 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-29 Setting of step 14 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 14 (F1-16)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

- 227 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Factory default:
F2-30 Run time of step 14 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time of step 14 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousands place of F2-00.

Factory default:
F2-31 Setting of step 15 Range: 000~327
000

 Ones place: frequency setting

0: Multi-step frequency 15 (F1-17)
1~7: same as F2-01
 Tens place: run direction (same as F2-01)
 Hundreds place: Accel/Decel time option (same as F2-01)

Factory default:
F2-32 Run time of step 15 Range: 0.0~6000.0s(min)
0.0s

Sets the run time for step 15 of simple PLC. The time unit is set by thousand's place of F2-00.

 ATTENTION:
Digital input terminals "simple PLC paused", "simple PLC disabled" and "simple PLC stop
memory clear" can be used during the running of simple PLC. See specification of digital
input of Group C0 for details.

Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count

Wobble frequency function is usually used in textile and chemical fiber industries where
traverse motion is required. Wobble frequency control process is as follows: accelerate to the
pre-frequency of wobble frequency function according to the current Accel time. Maintain this
frequency for a period of time and run to center frequency of wobble frequency according to the
current Accel/Decel time (i.e. the set frequency set by parameter group b0). Then run in a cyclic
manner according to wobble frequency amplitude, hopping frequency, wobble frequency cycle
time, and frequency ramp up time. When a stop command is given, the drive will ramp down to
stop according to the set Decel time.

- 228 -
 GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Output frequency
Wobble frequency Hop frequency
positive amplitude
Wobble frequency
negative amplitude
Upper limit of wobble frequency

Center frequency
Lower limit of wobble frequency
Pre-wobble frequency
Triangular wave rise time

Time

Pre- wobble
frequency
holding time Wobble
frequency
cycle (F3-06)

Run command Stop command

Fig. 6-55

a is the set Accel time (ramp up time), and d is the set Decel time (ramp down time).

F3-00 Wobble frequency function setting Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Wobble frequency function disabled

1: Wobble frequency function enabled

Factory default:
F3-01 Wobble frequency run setting Range: 0000~1111
0000

 Ones place: started method

0: Automatically
Run at pre-frequency of wobble frequency set by F3-02, maintain Pre-frequency holding time
set by F3-03, and then automatically get into wobble frequency run.
1: Started by terminal
Digital input terminal "start wobble frequency" controls the run of wobble frequency. When
terminal inputs ON, the drive gets into wobble frequency run. When terminal inputs OFF, the
drive exits wobble frequency and runs at pre-frequency of wobble frequency. Under this
mode, Pre-frequency holding time is enabled.
 Tens place: amplitude control
0: Relative to center frequency
Amplitude = F3-04 x current frequency setting.
1: Relative to maximum frequency

- 229 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Amplitude = F3-04 x maximum frequency b0-08.

 Hundreds place: wobble frequency memorized when stop
0: Memory enabled
The drive memorizes the current wobble frequency state when stop. When restarted, drive
continues to run the wobble frequency with the memorized state at latest stop. Pre-frequency
of wobble frequency F3-02 is enabled at restart.
1: Memory disabled
When the drive is started, it restarts wobble frequency running. Run at pre-frequency of
wobble frequency F3-02, maintain this frequency for pre-frequency holding time F3-03, and
then automatically gets into wobble frequency control.
 Thousands place: wobble frequency memorized on power loss
0: Memory enabled
Automatically save the wobble frequency state on power loss. This function takes effect only
under wobble frequency running.
1: Memory disabled
Drive clears wobble frequency status on power loss.

Factory default:
F3-02 Pre-wobble frequency Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
Pre-wobble frequency Factory default:
F3-03 Range: 0.0s~3600.0s
holding time 0.0s

During the run of wobble frequency, F3-02 is the run frequency before the drive begins to run at
wobble frequency, while F3-03 is the holding time of pre-wobble frequency. When F3-03 is set
to 0, pre-frequency is disabled.

Wobble frequency Factory default:

F3-04 Range: 0.0%~50.0%
amplitude 0.0%

The percentage is relative to center frequency or maximum frequency and determined by the
tens place of F3-01. Center frequency is the frequency setting determined by parameters of
Group b0.

Run frequency of wobble frequency is not only subject to this amplitude, but is also restricted
by upper limit and lower limit of frequency.

Factory default:
F3-05 Hop frequency Range: 0.0%~50.0%
0.0%

Hop frequency = F3-05 × amplitude.

- 230 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
F3-06 Cycle of wobble frequency Range: 0.1s~999.9s
0.0s

The time of the completion of a complete process of wobble frequency

Factory default:
F3-07 Triangular wave ramp-up time Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%

Sets the wobble frequency run time of ramp-up step.

Triangular wave ramp up time = F3-07 × F3-06
Wobble frequency ramp-down time = F3-06 - triangular wave ramp-up time

 ATTENTION:
The current wobble frequency status can be cleared by digital input terminal "clear wobble
frequency status " in stop status.If the output frequency exceeds upper limit frequency or
lower limit frequency during the running at wobble frequency, digital output terminal " wobble
frequency attains to upper or lower limit frequency " outputs ON signal

Parameters F3-08~F3-11 are for fixed-length stop.

F3-08 Length unit Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: m
1: 10m

Factory default:
F3-09 Length setting Range: 0~65535
1000

Sets the length value of fixed-length stop. When set to 0, fixed-length stop function is enabled,
but the actual length is still calculated. When it is detected the actual length attains this set
value, digital output terminal "length attained" will output ON signal and perform the command
set by F3-11.

Factory default:
F3-10 Pulse number per meter Range: 0.1~6553.5
100.0

Input pulse is received via digital input terminal "length count"; the pulse number per meter is
set here.

Action when the length

F3-11 Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
attained

0: Not stop
1: Stop
This parameter sets the action of the drive when actual length attains the length set by F3-09.
Actual length can be cleared through digital input terminal "length clear".

- 231 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

 ATTENTION:
When actual length is detected to attain the set length, digital output terminal "length
attained" outputs ON signal no matter the drive is set to stop or not stop. Actual length is
saved at power loss and can be read in both stop and running.

Factory default:
F3-12 Set count value Range: 1~65535
1000
Factory default:
F3-13 Designated count value Range: 1~65535
1000

The two parameters are used with digital input terminal "count input" and digital output
terminals "set count value attained" and "designated count value attained". Input pulse through
digital input terminal "count input". When the number of pulses attain the value set by F3-12,
the terminal outputs ON. With the completion of the value of F3-12, the terminal "designated
count value attained” outputs OFF.

When the number of input pulses attains the designated count value of F3-13, terminal
"designated count value attained" will output ON. Upon the completion of set count value of
F3-12, terminal "designated count value attained" outputs OFF.

For example: F3-12= 10, F3-13= 7. Fig. 6-56:

Count input signal

"Designated count value attained” terminal

"Set count value attained" terminal

Fig. 6-56

 ATTENTION:
Actual count value can be cleared through digital input terminal "count clear". Actual count
value is saved at power loss.

Group F5 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count

Recognition of rotor initial

F5-00 Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0
magnetic pole position
0: Detecting forbidden
1: Recognition of pulse injection initial position

- 232 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

This setting is suitable for PMSM with certain salient pole ratio. If F5-00 is set to 1, there will
be no obvious reverse slip or rotating when motor is starting, but there will be sound of pulse
injection at starting moment. It is suitable for application which allow zero-reverse when
motor is starting.
2. Reserved
Factory default:
F5-04 Initial pull-in current Range: 0.0%~200.0%
50.0%
Factory default:
F5-05 Cut-off FREQ of pull-in current Range: 0.00Hz~b0-09
0.00Hz
Parameter F5-04 and F5-05 can be properly increased when there is difficulty in motor
starting. When Frequency is less than F5-05, PMSM will run with constant torque at F5-04 of
rated current.
Max. torque current ratio Factory default:
F5-09 Range: 0.000~32.000
coefficient 0.000
0: forbid Max. torque current ratio (MTPA) control
Not 0: Max. torque current ratio (MTPA) coefficient
The coefficient is inversely proportional to salient pole ratio, the higher the salient ratio is,
the smaller this coefficient should be set to.

 ATTENTION:
When PMSM SVC is adopted (A0-09=3), it is NOT recommended to use MTPA control. This
has a high requirement for Q-axis and D-axis inductance and back EMF coefficient, and
may easily affect system stability.
Speed observer bandwidth Factory default:
F5-12 Range: 0.000~32.000
coefficient 4.000
Factory default:
F5-13 Speed observer filter coefficient Range: 0.000~32.000
0.200
Bandwidth and filter coefficient of PMSM rotator speed observer, normally there is no need
to change default setting

Factory default:
F5-17 Open-loop vector mode selection Range: 0~1111
0011
 Ones place: dead-time compensating enabled
0: Forbidden
1: Enabled
If it is set to 1, AC drive will enable dead-time compensating, then harmonic distortion rate of
output current will decrease, and torque pulse will decrease.
 Tens place: feedforward control enabled
0: Forbidden
1: Enabled

- 233 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

If it is set to 1, cross coupling will be brought in for PMSM current control inner circuit, and
system dynamic response ability will be increased.
 Hundreds place: start step-out self-recovery enabled
0: Forbidden
1: Enabled
If it is set to 1, PMSM will recover and start again after start step-out.
 Thousands place: speed loop integral separating enabled
0: Forbid integral separating
1: Enable integral separating
It can be enabled for large-inertia application

Following F5-20~F5-25 is specification for PMSM flux weakening loop parameter

Max. flux weakening current Factory default:
F5-20 -8000~8000
allowed -6000
F5-20 is scale value of max. flux weakening current allowed, actual corresponding current is
indicated as d0-03*F5-20/4096. Adjust this parameter to limit PMSM flux weakening current.
Factory default:
F5-21 Max. voltage utilization ratio Range: 0~65535
31767
F5-21 is scale value of max. voltage utilization ratio, actual max. voltage utilization value is
indicated as F5-21/32767. Adjust this parameter to adjust voltage utilization and output max.
voltage limit of AC drive. This parameter is invalid if over modulation function is enabled
(hundreds place of E0-01 is set to 1).
Flux weakening loop proportional
F5-24 Range: 0~65535 Factory default: 0
gain
Flux weakening loop integral Factory default:
F5-25 Range: 0~65535
gain 800
F5-24 and F5-25 is proportional gain and integral gain coefficient of flux weakening loop.
Normally there is no need to change default setting.

Group H Communication Parameters

Group H0 MODBUS Communication Parameters

Support universal Modbus protocol. Please refer to appendix for detailed description of
communication protocol.

H0-00 SCI port selection Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: Local 485 port

1: Optional 232 port

- 234 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

SCI port communication Factory default:

H0-01 Range: 0000～1155
configuration 0001

 Ones place: baud rate

0: 4800bps
1: 9600bps
2: 19200bps
3: 38400bps
4: 57600bps
5: 115200bps
 Tens place: data format
0: 1-8-2-N format, RTU
1: 1-8-1-E format, RTU
2: 1-8-1-O format, RTU
3: 1-7-2-N format, ASCII
4: 1-7-1-E format, ASCII
5: 1-7-1-O format, ASCII
 Hundreds place: connection type
0: Direct cable connection (232/485)
1: MODEM (232) (reserved)
 Thousands place: communication data handling at power loss
0: Not saved at power loss
1: Saved at power loss

Local address of SCI port

H0-02 Range: 0~247 Factory default: 5
communication

Sets the local address. 0 is broadcast address, while available addresses are 1~247.

Time out detection of SCI port Factory default:

H0-03 Range: 0.0s~1000.0s
communication 0.0s

This parameter sets communication error detection time. When it's set to 0, no communication
error will be reported.

Time delay of SCI port Factory default:

H0-04 Range: 0ms~1000ms
communication 0ms

Sets time delay of this drive response to the master.

H0-05 Master/Slave option Range: 0~2 Factory default: 0

0: PC controls this drive

PC as master controls this drive. This supports all communication protocols.

- 235 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

1: As master
According to the selection of H0-06, the drive sends current b0-02 (digital setting of master
frequency) or F0-01 (PID digital setting) through communication. As master, this drive can
only send the data and cannot receive the data.
2: As slave
Put the received data into b0-02 (digital setting of master frequency) or F0-01 (PID digital
setting) through communication. b0-02/F0-01 is selected by parameter H0-06. Other
communication data addresses are not supported. As slave, this drive can only receive the
data.

Frequency setting address

H0-06 Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
when master controlling slave

0: b0-02
1: F0-01
This parameter takes effect when H0-05 is set to 1. This parameter sets the slave drive
frequency setting address when this drive is working as the master drive.

Proportional factor of received Factory default:

H0-07 Range: 0.0~1000.0%
frequency 100.0%

This parameter takes effect when H0-05 is set to 2. Data sent by master is multiplied by H0-07
and then put the result into b0-02 or F0-01 (set by H0-06 of master).
This parameter setting is very useful when a master drive controls a number of slave drives and
needs to allocate the frequency.

Group H1 Profibus-DP communication parameters

Refer to EPC-CM2 Instruction Manual for details

Group L Keys and Display of Control Panel

Group L0 Keys of Control Panel

L0-00 MF key setting Range: 0~6 Factory default: 0

0: No function
1: Forward jog
2: Reverse jog
3: Forward/reverse switchover
4: Emergency stop 1 (set Decel time by b2-09)
5: Emergency stop 2 (coast to stop)
6: Run command sources shifted (control panel/terminal/communication)

- 236 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

L0-01 Keys locked option Range: 0~4 Factory default: 0

0: Not locked
1: All locked
2: Keys locked except RUN, STOP/RESET
3: Keys locked except STOP/RESET
4: Keys locked except >>
Please refer to Chapter 4 for locking operation of keys.

L0-02 Function of STOP key Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0

0: STOP key active only at control panel control

1: STOP key deactivated under any command source

Frequency adjustment through Factory default:

L0-03 Range: 0000~1111
keys ∧/∨ 0100

 Ones place: option at stop

0: Clear at stop
Keys ∧/∨frequency adjustment step size is cleared at the stop of drive.
1: Holding at stop
Keys ∧/∨frequency adjustment step size is held at the stop of drive.
 Tens place: option at power loss
0: Clear at power loss
Keys ∧/∨ frequency adjustment step size is cleared at power loss.
1: Holding at power loss
Keys ∧/∨frequency adjustment step size is saved at power loss.
 Hundreds place: integrating option
0: Integrating disabled
Adjustment step size is kept constant when frequency is adjusted by keys ∧/∨, and the
adjustment will be performed always with the step size set by L0-04.
1: Integrating enabled
When frequency is adjusted by keys ∧/∨, the initial step size is the set value of L0-04. With
the press increase of ∧/∨, adjustment step size shows cumulative integrating effect and
will increase gradually.
 Thousands place: run direction
0: Direction changing prohibited
When the frequency is decreased to 0Hz by terminal UP/DOWN, the drive will run at 0Hz and
cannot be able to change the rotary direction.
1: Direction changing permitted
When the frequency is decreased to 0Hz by terminal UP/DOWN, the drive continues to
decrease its out frequency and change the motor rotary direction.

- 237 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Step size of frequency Range: Factory default:

L0-04
adjustment through keys ∧/∨ 0.00Hz/s~10.00Hz/s 0.03 Hz/s

When frequency setting is "digital setting + control panel ∧/∨ adjustment", progressive
increase and decrease of frequency setting is realized through ∧ or ∨ on control panel. This
parameter is used to set the step size of frequency adjustment through ∧/∨. The step size is
defined as frequency variation per second, and the smallest step size is 0.01 Hz/s.

Group L1 Control Panel Display Setting

Display parameter setting 1 on Factory default:

L1-00 Range: 0000~3FFF
run status 080F

Sets LED displayed parameters on run status. When a number of parameters are selected to be
displayed, skim-through could be performed using key >> on control panel.
0: No display
1: Display
 Ones place
BIT0: Run frequency (Hz)
BIT1: Set frequency (Hz)
BIT2: Bus voltage (V)
BIT3: Output current (A)
 Tens place
BIT0: Output torque (%)
BIT1: Output power (kW)
BIT2: Output voltage (V)
BIT3: Motor speed (r/min)
 Hundreds place
BIT0: AI1 (V)
BIT1: AI2 (V)
BIT2: EAI (V)
BIT3: Output sync frequency (Hz)
 Thousands place
BIT0: DI
BIT1: External count value
BIT2: Reserved
BIT3: Reserved

 ATTENTION:
When this parameter value is set to 0000, run frequency (Hz) would be displayed as default.

- 238 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Example:
To display run frequency, output current, motor speed and AI1 sampled value, L1-00 should be:
0000 0001 1000 1001, i.e. set L1-00 to 0189.

Display parameter setting Factory default:

L1-01 Range: 0000~00FF
2 on run status 0000

0: No display
1: Display
 Ones place
BIT0: Run linear speed (m/s)
BIT1: Set linear speed (m/s)
BIT2: Input terminal status
BIT3: Output terminal status
 Tens place
BIT0: PID setting (%)
BIT1: PID feedback (%)
BIT2: Set length (m)
BIT3: Actual length (m)
 Hundreds place: Reserved
 Thousands place: Reserved

Display parameter setting Factory default:

L1-02 Range: 0000~FF7F
on stop status 0003

Sets LED displayed parameters on stop status. When a number of parameters are selected,
skim-through could be realized via key >> on control panel.
0: No display
1: Display
 Ones place
BIT0: Frequency setting (Hz)
BIT1: Bus voltage (V)
BIT2: Input terminal status
BIT3: Output terminal status
 Tens place
BIT0: AI1 (V)
BIT1: AI2 (V)
BIT2: EAI (V)
BIT3: Reserved

 Hundreds place
BIT0: PID setting (%)
BIT1: PID feedback (%)

- 239 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

BIT2: Set length (m)

BIT3: Actual length (m)
 Thousands place
BIT0: Run linear speed (m/s)
BIT1: Set linear speed (m/s)
BIT2: External count value
BIT3: DI
Note: when this parameter is set to 0000, the set frequency would be displayed as default (Hz).

Example:
To display frequency setting, bus voltage, AI1 sampled value, set length and external count value,
L1-02 should be: 0100 0100 0001 0011, i.e. set L1-02 to 4413.

Factory default:
L1-03 Linear speed coeff Range: 0.1%~999.9%
100.0%

This coefficient is used for calculation of linear speed.

Run linear speed = motor run speed x L1-03
Set linear speed = motor speed setting x L1-03
Both run linear speed and set linear speed can be viewed during the run and stop.

Group U Monitoring

Group U0 Status Monitoring

All parameters of Group U0 are for display purpose only and can’t be programmed.

Factory default:
U0-00 Run frequency Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
Factory default:
U0-01 Set frequency Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
Factory default:
U0-02 Bus voltage Range: 0V~65535V
0V
Factory default:
U0-03 Output voltage Range: 0V~65535V
0V
Factory default:
U0-04 Output current Range: 0.0A~6553.5A
0.0A
Factory default:
U0-05 Output torque Range: -300.0%~300.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
U0-06 Output power Range: 0.0%~300.0%
0.0%
U0-07 Master FREQ set source Range: 0~9 Factory default: 0

- 240 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

U0-08 Auxiliary FREQ set source Range: 0~10 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
U0-09 Master frequency setting Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
Factory default:
U0-10 Auxiliary frequency setting Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz

Factory default:
U0-11 Drive status Range: 0~22
00

 Ones place: Running status

0: Accelerating
1: Decelerating
2: Constant speed running
 Tens place: drive status
0: Stop
1: Running status
2: Motor parameters are being identified

Factory default:
U0-12 AI1 input voltage Range: 0.00V~10.00V
0.00V
Factory default:
U0-13 AI2 input voltage Range: -10.00V~10.00V
0.00V
Factory default:
U0-14 EAI input voltage Range: 0.00V~10.00V
0.00V
Factory default:
U0-15 AO1 output Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
U0-16 EAO output Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
U0-17 X6/DI HF pulse frequency Range: 0.0kHz~50.0kHz
0.0kHz

Factory default:
U0-18 Digital input terminal status Range: 00~7F
00

Digital input terminals that correspond to the bits of U0-18 are as shown in Table 6-19:

Table 6-19
Tens place Ones place
bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
EX X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

0 means terminal input status is OFF, while 1 means terminal input status is ON.

- 241 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

For example:
If 23 (i.e. 0010 0011) is displayed at U0-18, it means the input status of terminals X1, X2 and X6
is ON and that of the other terminals is OFF.
If 05 (i.e. 0000 0101) is displayed at U0-18, it means the input status of terminals X1 and X3 is
ON while that of the other terminals is OFF.

Digital output terminal

U0-19 Range: 0~7 Factory default: 0
status

Corresponding relationship between digital output terminals and the bits of U0-19 is shown in Table
6-20:

Table 6-20
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Option board relay Control board relay Y2 Y1

0 means terminal output status is OFF, while 1 means terminal output status is ON.

For example:
If 6 (i.e. 0110) is displayed at U0-19, it means the output status of terminals Y2 and control
board relay is ON while that of the other terminals is OFF.

Factory default:
U0-20 PID set Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
U0-21 PID feedback Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
Factory default:
U0-22 PID input offset Range: -100.0%~100.0%
0.0%

U0-23 PLC step Range: 0~15 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
U0-24 V/f separated target voltage Range: 0.0%~100.0%
0.0%
V/f separated actual output Factory default:
U0-25 Range: 0.0%~100.0%
voltage 0.0%
Factory default:
U0-30 Cumulative power-up time Range: 0h~65535h
0h
Factory default:
U0-31 Cumulative run time Range: 0h~65535h
0h
Factory default:
U0-32 Heat sink temperature 1 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃
0.0℃

- 242 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

Factory default:
U0-33 Heat sink temperature 2 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃
0.0℃

U0-34 U0-34 Range: 0~6 Factory default: 0

When the drive reports fault "FAL", the fault source can be known by U0-34.
0: No fault source
1: IGBT overcurrent
2: Reserved
3: Output grounding fault
4: Output overcurrent
5: DC bus overvoltage
6: Other sources

U0-35 Terminal count value Range: 0~65535 Factory default: 0

U0-36 Run command log at LoU Range: 0~1 Factory default: 0
U0-37 Fault code log at LoU Range: 0~100 Factory default: 0
U0-38 Reserved Reserved Reserved
U0-39 CtC fault source Range: 0~3 Factory default: 0

0: No fault
1: U-phase current detection circuit fault
2: V-phase current detection circuit fault
3: W-phase current detection circuit fault

Higher-bit numbers of
U0-40 Range: 0~65 Factory default: 0
actual length
Lower-bit numbers of
U0-41 Range: 0~65535 Factory default: 0
actual length
Higher-bit numbers of
U0-42 control panel ∧/∨ stored Range: -1~1 Factory default: 0
value
Lower-bit numbers of
Factory default:
U0-43 control panel ∧/∨ stored Range: 0.00~655.35Hz
0.00Hz
value
Higher-bit numbers of
U0-44 terminal UP/DOWN stored Range: -1~1 Factory default: 0
value
Lower-bit numbers of
Factory default:
U0-45 terminal UP/DOWN stored Range: 0.00~655.35 Hz
0.00Hz
value

- 243 -
Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK620 User Manual

Center FREQ of wobble Factory default:

U0-52 Range: 0~600.00 Hz
FREQ 0.00 Hz
U0-53 Initial position angle Range: 0.0~6000.0 Factory default: 0.0

Group U1 History Fault

U1-00 History fault 1 (latest) Range: 0~47 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
U1-01 Run frequency at fault 1 Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
U1-02 Output current at fault 1 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A Factory default: 0.0A
U1-03 Bus voltage at fault 1 Range: 0V~1000V Factory default: 0V
Temperature 1 of heat sink at
U1-04 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 1
Temperature 2 of heat sink at
U1-05 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 1
Input terminal status at fault
U1-06 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
1
Output terminal status at
U1-07 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
fault 1
U1-08 Cumulative run time at fault 1 Range: 0h~65535h Factory default: 0h

Check the information of the latest fault. See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes.

U1-09 Code of fault 2 Range: 0~47 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
U1-10 Run frequency at fault 2 Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
U1-11 Output current at fault 2 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A Factory default: 0.0A
U1-12 Bus voltage at fault 2 Range: 0V~1000V Factory default: 0V
Temperature 1 of heat sink at
U1-13 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 2
Temperature 2 of heat sink at
U1-14 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 2
Input terminal status at fault
U1-15 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
2
Output terminal status at
U1-16 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
fault 2
U1-17 Cumulative run time at fault 2 Range: 0h~65535h Factory default: 0h

Check the information of previous fault 1. See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes.

- 244 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters

U1-18 Code of fault 3 Range: 0~47 Factory default: 0

Factory default:
U1-19 Run frequency at fault 3 Range: 0.00Hz~600.00Hz
0.00Hz
U1-20 Output current at fault 3 Range: 0.0A~6553.5A Factory default: 0.0A
U1-21 Bus voltage at fault 3 Range: 0V~1000V Factory default: 0V
Temperature 1 of heat sink at
U1-22 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 3
Temperature 2 of heat sink at
U1-23 Range: -40.0℃~100.0℃ Factory default: 0.0℃
fault 3
Input terminal status at fault
U1-24 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
3
Output terminal status at
U1-25 Range: 0000~FFFF Factory default: 0000
fault 3
U1-26 Cumulative run time at fault 3 Range: 0h~65535h Factory default: 0h

The recorded fault sequence: fault 3, fault 2, fault 1. See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes.

- 245 -
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK620 User Manual

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7.1 Fault Causes and Troubleshooting

Once drive fault occurs, please identify the causes of fault carefully and make a detailed record
of fault symptom. To seek services, please contact the dealer. Parameters U1-00, U1-09 and
U1-18 are used to view the records of fault 1, fault 2 and fault 3. Faults are recorded with
numeric codes (1~46), while the fault information that corresponds to each numeric fault code
is specified in the table below.

Table of Fault Codes

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost
under V/f control value
Start frequency is too
Drop start frequency
high
Accel time is too short Prolong the Accel time
Set the parameters
Motor parameters are
correctly according to
improperly set
motor nameplate
Accel
1 oC1 Output short circuit
overcurrent Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
short circuit)
Overload is too heavy Reduce the load
Inappropriate V/f curve
Set V/f curve correctly
under V/f control
Restart the rotating Reduce current limited
motor value or flying start
Output short circuit
Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
short circuit)
Canst-speed
2 oC2 Overload is too heavy Reduce the load
overcurrent
Power rating of the Select appropriate drive
drive is relatively small power rating
Input voltage is too low Check power grid voltage

- 246 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Output short circuit
Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
Decel short circuit)
3 oC3
overcurrent Load inertia is too big Use dynamic brake
Decel time is too short Prolong the Decel time
Input voltage is too low Check power grid voltage
Load inertia is too big Use dynamic brake
Abnormal input
Check power grid voltage
voltage
Accel
4 ov1 Output short circuit
overvoltage Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
short circuit)
Load variation is too
Check the load
big

Abnormal input
Check power grid voltage
voltage

Constant-spee Output short circuit

5 ov2 Check motor connection
d overvoltage (phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
short circuit)
Improper parameter
Properly set regulator
setting of regulator
parameters
under SVC control
Load inertia is too big Use dynamic braking
Abnormal input
Check power grid voltage
voltage
Output short circuit
Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
Decel and output ground
6 ov3 circuit or output ground
overvoltage impedance
short circuit)
Improper parameter
Properly set regulator
setting of regulator
parameters
under SVC control
Decel time is too short Prolong the Decel time

- 247 -
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK620 User Manual

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Overvoltage or Refer to the solutions of
overcurrent overvoltage or overcurrent
Output short circuit
Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit or output ground
impedance
short circuit)
Module Loose connection of Pull out and reinsert the
7 FAL control board cables of control board
protection
Direct connection of
Seek services
inverter module
Control board
Seek services
abnormal
Switching power
Seek services
supply failed
Bad motor connection Check motor connection
Autotuning during Autotuning in stationary
Autotuning rotation of the motor status of the motor
8 tUN
failed Big error between real Set the parameters
motor parameters and correctly according to
the setting motor nameplate
Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost
under V/f control value
Start FREQ is too high Drop start frequency
Accel/Decel time is too Prolong the Accel/Decel
short time
Set the parameters
Motor parameters are
correctly according to
improperly set
motor nameplate
Drive
9 oL1 Output short circuit
overloaded Check motor connection
(phase-to-phase short
and output ground
circuit and output
impedance
ground short circuit)
Load is too heavy Reduce the load
Inappropriate V/f curve
Set V/f curve correctly
under V/f control
Restart the rotary Reduce current limited
motor value or flying start

- 248 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost
under V/f control value
Inappropriate V/f curve
Set V/f curve correctly
under V/f control
Set the parameters
Motor parameters are
correctly according to
improperly set
motor nameplate

Motor Improper setting of

10 oL2 Properly set the motor
overloaded motor overloaded
overloaded protection time
protection time
Identify the causes of
Motor stalled or sharp
motor stalling or check the
variation of load
load condition
Long-time running of
ordinary motor at low Select variable frequency
speed with heavy load motor

Abnormal connection
between control board Check and re-connection
and drive board
Abnormal current
detection circuit of Seek services
Current
control board
11 CtC detection
abnormal Abnormal current
detection circuit of Seek services
drive board
Current sensor failed Seek services
SMPS failed Seek services
Check motor connection
Output connection
and output ground
ground short circuit
impedance
Output ground Motor insulation
Check the motor
12 GdP short-circuit abnormal
protection Inverter module
Seek services
abnormal
Output ground leakage
Seek services
current is too big

- 249 -
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK620 User Manual

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Severe voltage
imbalance among Check power grid voltage
Input power power supply phases
13 ISF supply Abnormal input wiring Check power supply input
abnormal of power supply wiring
Abnormal bus
Seek services
capacitance
Motor cable
Check motor connection
connection abnormal
Imbalance among Check or replace the
Output phase
14 oPL motor three phases motor
loss
Incorrect setting of
Correctly set vector control
vector control
parameters
parameters
Handle it with the methods
Overcurrent
for overcurrent
Input power supply Check input power grid
Inverter module abnormal voltage
15 oL3 overload
protection Check the motor or motor
Motor output abnormal
connection
Inverter module
Seek services
abnormal
Ambient temperature
Drop ambient temperature
is too high
Fan failed Replace the fan
Module (IGBT)
Air duct blocked Clear air duct
16 oH1 thermal
protection Temperature sensor
Seek services
abnormal
Inverter module
Seek services
mounting abnormal
Ambient temperature
Drop ambient temperature
is too high
Motor (PTC) Improper setting of
Correctly set motor
17 oH2 thermal motor thermal
thermal protection point
protection protection point
Thermal detection
Seek services
circuit failed

- 250 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Temperature sensor
not well connected Pull out and re-insert
with socket
Module
temperature Ambient temperature Raise ambient
18 oH3 detection is too low temperature
disconnected Module detection
Seek services
circuit failed

Thermistor failed Seek services

Loose or poor option

Pull out and reinsert
board connection
Option board
Option board
20 EC1 connection Seek services
abnormal
abnormal
Control board
Seek services
abnormal
Loose or poor drive Pull out and re-insert after
Abnormal flat line connection complete power off
cable
22 dLC Drive board abnormal Seek services
connection of
control board Control board
Seek services
abnormal
Function
conflict Analog input terminals
Do not set analog inputs to
23 TEr between are set to the same
the same function
analog function
terminals
External fault terminal Check the status of
External is enabled external fault terminal
24 PEr equipment
error Stall condition lasts too Check if the load is
long abnormal
Consecutive
"Consecutive run time See specification of Group
26 to2 run time
attained" enabled E0
attained
Cumulative run "Cumulative run time See specification of Group
27 to3
time attained attained" enabled E0
DC bus voltage
Power supply Check input power grid
28 SUE fluctuation is too big or
abnormal at run voltage and load
the power is lost

- 251 -
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK620 User Manual

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Parameter read/write
EEPROM
29 EPr abnormal at control Seek services
read/write fault
board
Power supply voltage Check grid power supply
abnormal voltage
Abnormal contactor
Contactor close feedback circuit at Seek services
30 CCL drive board
fault
Contactor failed Seek services
Buffer resistance failed Seek services
Abnormal SMPS Seek services
Improper setting of
Set properly
baud rate
Communication port
Reconnected
Port disconnected
31 TrC communication Upper
abnormal Make upper
computer/device does
computer/device work
not work
Drive communication
Set properly
parameter error
Control panel
Reconnected
Control panel disconnected
32 PdC communication Check peripheral
abnormal Severe EMI equipment or seek
services
Parameter uploading
or downloading Seek services
Parameter abnormal
33 CPy
copy failure
No parameters stored
Seek services
at control panel
Software Version of control
version panel is not consistent
35 SFt Seek services
compatibility with that of control
failure board
Abnormal power loss
Abnormal RESET the fault
36 CPU in last operation
power loss
Faulty control board Seek services

- 252 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Fault Fault
Fault description Causes Solutions
code display
Overcurrent SMPS failed Seek services
37 oCr benchmark
error Control board failed Seek services

5V supply SMPS failed Seek services

38 SP1
out-of-limit Control board failed Seek services
10V supply SMPS failed Seek services
39 SP2
out-of-limit Control board failed Seek services
Control board failed Seek services
AI input
40 AIP AI input is too high or Set AI input within correct
out-of-limit
low range
Check input voltage if it is
Undervoltage DC bus voltage is too
41 LoU too low or the drive is the
protection low
process of power loss
Abnormal PID
Check the feedback
feedback channel
PID feedback channel
45 Plo abnormal
lost
Inappropriate setting Set properly
of PID parameters
Communication wiring
Rewiring
Abnormal problem
46 PFS Profibus Check peripheral
communication Severe ambient EMI equipment or seek
services
Controlled motor is not
Confirm motor type
Abnormal back PMSM
47 bEF
EMF PM demagnetization
Replace motor
of PMSM

 ATTENTION:
When a fault occurs, please identify the causes and seek solutions according the guidance
in the table. If the fault fails to be solved, do not apply power to the drive again. Contact the
supplier for service in time.

- 253 -
Chapter 8 Maintenance GK620 User Manual

Chapter 8 Maintenance
Ambient temperature, humidity, salt mist, dust, vibration, aging and wear of internal
components may result in drive faults. Routine maintenance shall be performed during the use
and storage.

 ATTENTION:
Please make sure the power supply of the drive has been cut off, and DC bus voltage has
discharged to 0V before the maintenance.

8.1 Routine Inspection

Please use the drive in the environment recommended by this manual, and perform routine
inspection in accordance with the table below.

Inspection Inspection
Inspection aspects Criteria
items methods
Temperature Thermometer -10℃~50℃
5%~95%, condensation not
Humidity Hygrometer
allowed
Dust, oil stains,
Visual No filthy mud, oil stains and water
Operating moisture and
inspection drop
environment water-drop
Smooth running. No abnormal
Vibration Observation
vibration
Smell, visual No peculiar smell and abnormal
Gas
inspection smoke
Noise Listen No abnormal noise
Smell, visual No peculiar smell and abnormal
Gas
inspection smoke
Visual
Appearance No defect and deformation
Drive inspection
No dust and/or fiber particles in
Heat dissipation and Visual air duct, normal working of fans,
temperature rise inspection normal air speed and volume, no
abnormal temperature rise

- 254 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 8 Maintenance

Inspection Inspection
Inspection aspects Criteria
items methods
No abnormal heating and
Thermal status Smell
scorching smell

Motor Noise Listen No abnormal noise

Observe,
Vibration No abnormal vibration and sound
listen
Power supply input
Ammeter In the range of requirement
current
Power supply input
Voltmeter In the range of requirement
voltage
Running
Drive output current Ammeter In the range of requirement
status
parameters Drive output voltage Voltmeter In the range of requirement
The difference between U0-33
displayed temperature and
Temperature Thermometer
ambient temperature does not
exceed 40℃

8.2 Regular Maintenance

Users should perform regular inspection of the drive every 3~6 months, so as to eliminate the
potential faults.

 ATTENTION:
Please make sure power supply of the drive has been cut off, and DC bus voltage has been
discharged to 0V prior to maintenance.Never leave screws, gaskets, conductors, tools and
other metal articles inside the drive. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
Never modify the interior components of the drive in any condition. Failure to comply may
result in equipment damage.

Inspection items Measures

Check if control terminal screws are loose Tighten

Check if main circuit terminal screws are loose Tighten

Check if ground terminal screws are loose Tighten

Check if copper bar screws are loose Tighten

- 255 -
Chapter 8 Maintenance GK620 User Manual

Inspection items Measures

Check if drive mounting screws are loose Tighten

Check if there are defect on power cables and control

Replace the cables
cables
Check if there is dust on circuit board Clear it up
Check if air duct is blocked Clear it up
Test the ground terminal with
500V megameter after all input
and output terminals are
short-circuited via conductors.
Check if drive insulation is failed
Ground test on individual
terminals is strictly prohibited
since this may cause damage to
inverter.
Remove input terminals U/V/W of
motor from drive and test the
Check if motor insulation is failed motor alone with 500V
megameter. Failure to comply
may result in drive failure.
Carry out power-on test, during
which, the voltage should be
Check if the storage period of the drive is over two boosted to rated value gradually
years using a voltage regulator; be
sure to run at no load for more
than 5 hours.

- 256 -
GK620 User Manual Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Parts

Vulnerable parts of drive include cooling fan, electrolytic capacitor, relay or contactor etc. The
service lives of these parts are subject to environment and working conditions. To maintain a
favorable operating environment is conducive to improving the service life of parts and
components; routine inspection and maintenance also contributes to effective improvement of
parts' service life. To prolong the service life of entire drive, the cooling fan, electrolytic
capacitor, relay or contactor and other vulnerable parts should be subjected to routine
inspection according to the table below. Please replace the abnormal parts (if any) in time.

Vulnerable
Service life Cause of damage Criteria
parts
Check if fan blades have
Wear of bearing and cracks
Fan 30,000~40,000h
aging of blade Check if there is abnormal
vibration and noise on working
Excessively high
Check if there is liquid leakage
ambient temperature
Check if safety valve projects
and excessively low
Electrolytic Check if capacitance value is
40,000~50,000h air pressure result in
capacitor out of allowable range
electrolyte
Check if insulation resistance
volatilization; aging of
is abnormal
electrolyte capacitor
Corrosion and dust
impairs the contacting
Relay/cont 50,000~100,000 Open/close failure
effect of contact;
actor times False alarm of CCL fault
excessively frequent
contact action

- 257 -
Chapter 8 Maintenance GK620 User Manual

8.4 Storage

Storage environment should meet the requirements as set forth in the table below.

Recommended storage method and

Items Requirements
environment
In case of long-term storage, areas with an
ambient temperature of less than 30℃ are
Storage recommended
-40~+70℃
temperature Avoid the storage in areas where
temperature shock may result in
condensation and freezing
Storage Product could be sealed with plastic film and
5~95%
humidity desiccant
A space with low vibration and
low content of salt where there
Storage is no direct exposure to Product could be sealed with plastic film and
environment sunlight, dust, no corrosive or desiccant
flammable gas, oil stain, vapor
and water drop

 ATTENTION:
Since long-term storage may lead to the deterioration of electrolytic capacitor, the inverter
must be powered up once in case storage period exceeds 2 years. After applying the power,
input voltage must be boosted to rated value gradually using a voltage regulator, and be
sure to have the inverter operated at no load for more than 5 hours.

- 258 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Appendix Communication Protocol

1. Networking Mode

The drives have two networking modes, single master/multiple slaves networking and single
master/single slave networking.

The master The master

is PC is PC

CNV- module

Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive n Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive n

Single master/multiple slaves networking diagram

The master The master

is PC is PC

CNV- module

Drive Drive

Single master/single slave networking diagram

2. Interface Mode

RS485 or RS232 interface: asynchronous, half-duplex. Default data format: 8-N-2 (8 data bits,
no check, two stop bits), 9600 bps. See parameters of Group H0 for parameter setting.

3. Communication Mode

1） Drive is used as a slave for master-slave station-to-station communication. When master

sends commands using broadcast address, the slave does not respond;

- 259 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

2） Native address, baud rate and data format of inverter are set through slave operating
panel or serial communication;
3） Slave reports the current fault information in the latest response frame for master polling;
4） Drive employs RS-485 interface or extended RS-232 interface.

4. Protocol Format

Modbus protocol supports both RTU and ASCII mode.

RTU data frame format is shown as the figure below:

RTU data frame format

Modbus message

Start: at End: at least

least 3.5 idle Slave Parameter Data Check 3.5 idle
characters address characters

RTU:
In RTU mode, idle time between frames can be set through function code or comply with
Modbus internal convention, for which the minimum interframe idle is as follows:
1） Frame header and end define the frame by making bus idle time equal to or longer
than 3.5-byte time;
2） After the start of frame, the clearance between characters must be less than
1.5-character communication time, or the newly received characters will be treated
as the header of the new frame;
3） Data check employs CRC-16 and the whole information participates in the check;
the high and low bytes of check sum shall be sent after exchange. Please refer to
examples at the end of protocol for details of CRC check;
4） The bus idle time of at least 3.5 characters (or set minimum bus idle time) shall be
maintained between frames and needs not to accumulate the starting and ending
idle time.
The data frame of which the request frame is "reading parameter value of b0-02 from slave
0x01" is as below:

Appendix Table 1
Register
Address Function code Read words Check sum
address
01 03 02 02 00 01 24 72

Response frame of slave 0x01 is as below:

- 260 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Appendix Table 2
Register
Address Function code Read words Check sum
address
01 03 02 13 88 B5 12

ASCII:
1） Frame header is "0x3A" while the default frame end is "0x0D" "0x0A"; also, frame
end can be configured and defined by user;
2） In ASCII mode, all data bytes other than frame header and end are sent in the form
of ASCII code; high-4-bit byte and low-4-bit byte are sent successively;
3） In ASCII mode, the data is 7-bit long. For 'A'~'F', their uppercase ASCII codes are
used;
4） Data is subjected to LRC check which covers the information portion from slave
address to data;
5） Check sum is equal to the complement of sum of characters that participate in data
check (abort the feed bit).
In ASCII mode, data frame format is as follows:
ASCII data frame format
Modbus message

Start: "0 x Slave Parameter End: 0xD,

3A address Data Check 0xA

Examples of Modbus data frame in ASCII mode are as follows.

The writing of 4000 (0xFA0) into internal register 02 02 of slave 0x01 is shown in the table
below.
LRC check = complement of (01+06+02+02+0x0F+0xA0) = 0x46

Appendix Table 3
Header Address Parameter Register address Write-in content LRC check End

Character : 0 1 0 6 0 2 0 2 0 F A 0 4 6 CR LF

ASCII 3A 30 31 30 36 30 32 30 32 30 46 41 30 34 36 0D 0A

Different response delays can be set for drive through parameters so as to adapt to specific
application requirements of various master stations; in RTU mode, the actual response delay is
not less than 3.5 characters, while in ASCII mode, the actual response delay shall not be less
than 1ms.

- 261 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

5. Protocol Function

The uppermost function of Modbus is to read and write parameters, and different parameters
determine different operation requests. Parameters operations supported by inverter Modbus
protocol are as shown in the table below:

Appendix Table 4 Parameters

Parameter Meaning of parameter
0x03 Read drive functional parameters and run status parameters
Over-write individual drive functional parameters or control
0x06
parameters, which are not saved on power loss
0x08 Line diagnosis
Over-write multiple drive functional parameters or control parameters,
0x10
which are not saved on power loss
Write individual drive functional parameters or control parameters,
0x41
and save them to non-volatile storage unit
0x42 Parameter management

Functional parameters, control parameters and status parameters of the drive are all mapped
to read-write register of Modbus. Read-write characteristics and range of parameters comply
with the instructions of user manual of the drive. Group numbers of drive parameters are
mapped as high byte of register address, while in-group indexes are mapped as low byte of
register address. Drive control parameters and status parameters are all virtualized as drive
parameter groups. The corresponding relations between parameter group numbers and their
high bytes of register address are as shown in table below:

Appendix Table 5 High-byte register addresses mapped from

parameter group numbers
Parameter Mapping register Mapping register
Parameter group
group address, high byte address, high byte
A0 0x00 E1 0x12
A1 0x01 F0 0x13
b0 0x02 F1 0x14
b1 0x03 F2 0x15
b2 0x04 F3 0x16
C0 0x05 F4 0x17
C1 0x06 F5 0x18
C2 0x07 F6 0x19

- 262 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Parameter Mapping register Mapping register

Parameter group
group address, high byte address, high byte
C3 0x08 H0 0x1A
C4 0x09 H1 0x1B
d0 0x0A H2 0x1C
d1 0x0B L0 0x1D
d2 0x0C L1 0x1E
d3 0x0D U0 0x1F
d4 0x0E U1 0x20
d5 0x0F U2 0x21
d6 0x10 Drive control parameter group 0x62
E0 0x11 Drive status parameter group 0x63

For example, the register address of drive parameter b0-02 is 0x0202 while that of E0-07 is
0x1107.

In the following paragraphs, we present the formats and meanings of Modbus protocol
parameters and data portion hereafter, i.e. to introduce the "parameter" and "data" related
contents in above-noted data frame format. These two parts constitute the application layer
protocol data unit of Modbus. The application layer protocol data unit mentioned below refers to
these two parts. We take RTU mode for example to describe frame format below. The length of
application layer protocol data unit should be doubled in ACSII mode.

Application layer protocol data units of various parameters are as follows:

Parameter 03: read register content
Request format is shown in appendix table 6.

Appendix Table 6
Application layer protocol Data length (number of Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x03
Register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Number of registers 12 0x0001~0x000C
Check LRC or CRC

Response format is shown in appendix table 7.

- 263 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 7
Application layer protocol Data length (number of Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x03
Number of read bytes 1 2* number of registers
Register content 2* number of registers
Check LRC or CRC

Parameter 0x06（0x41）: write register content (0x41 saved at power loss)

Request format is shown in appendix table 8.

Appendix Table 8
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x06
Register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Register content 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Check LRC or CRC

Response format is shown in appendix table 9.

Appendix Table 9

Application layer protocol Data length (number of

Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x06
Register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Register content 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Check LRC or CRC

Some parameters of the drive are reserved and cannot be modified by communication setting.
The list of these parameters is shown in appendix table 10.

- 264 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Appendix Table 10

Parameters Remarks
(Parameter identification) d0-22 d3-22 Communication not operable
(Parameter passing) A0-05 Communication not operable
User password can not be set by
communication, but the user
password set by control panel
can be unlocked by writing the
(User password) A0-00
same password from upper
computer/device communication.
Upper computer/device can view
and modify parameters.

Parameter 0x08: communication line diagnosis.

Request format is shown in appendix table 11.

Appendix Table 11
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x08
Sub-parameter 2 0x0000~0x0030
Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Check LRC or CRC

Response format is shown in appendix table 12.

Appendix Table 12
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x08
Sub-parameter 2 0x0000~0x0030
Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Check LRC or CRC

Sub-parameters supported by line diagnosis are as set forth in the table below.

- 265 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 13 Line diagnosis sub-parameter

Data Data
Sub-PARA Meaning of subfunction
(request) (response)
Reinitialize communication: make
0x0000 0x0000
no-response mode disable.
0x0001
Reinitialize communication: make
0xFF00 0xFF00
no-response mode disable.
Set the frame end of ASCII mode and this
"new frame end" will replace the original
“New frame “New frame
0x0003 line feed symbol.(Note: new frame end
end” 00 end” 00
shall not be greater than 0x7F and shall not
be equal to 0x3A)
Set no-response mode. Only response to
reinitialization communication request. This
0x0004 0x0000 No response
is mainly used for isolating faulty
equipment.
Make slave no-response to invalid
0x0000 0x0000
command and error command
0x0030
Make slave response to invalid command
0x0001 0x0001
and error command

Parameter 0x10: write parameters continuously

Request format is shown in appendix table 14.

Appendix Table 14
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x10
Register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Number of registers 2 0x0001~0x0004
Number of bytes of register 2* number of operation
1
content registers
2* number of operation
Register content
registers
Check LRC or CRC

Response format is shown in appendix table 15.

- 266 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Appendix Table 15
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x10
Register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Number of registers 2 0x0001~0x0004
Check LRC or CRC

Parameter 0x42: parameter management

Request format is shown in appendix table 16.

Appendix Table 16
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x42
Sub-parameter 2 0x0000~0x0007
2 (high byte is parameter
group number, while low
Data
byte is parameter in-group
index)
Check LRC or CRC

Response format is shown in appendix table 17.

Appendix Table 17
Application layer protocol Data length (number of
Range
data unit bytes)
Parameter 1 0x42
Sub-parameter 2 0x0000~0x0007
Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Check LRC or CRC

Sub-parameters supported by parameter management are set forth in the table 18.

- 267 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 18 Parameter management sub-parameters

Meaning of
Sub-PARA Data (request) Data (response)
subfunction
Parameter group number
and in-group index Read the upper limit of
0x0000 Upper limit of parameter
respectively possess high parameter
and low bytes
Parameter group number
and in-group index Read the lower limit of
0x0001 Lower limit of parameter
respectively possess high parameter
and low bytes
Parameter group number
See specification below for Read the
and in-group index
0x0002 details of parameter characteristics of
respectively possess high
characteristics parameter
and low bytes
Parameter group number Read the maximum
Maximum value of in-group
0x0003 possesses high byte, while value of in-group
index
the lower byte is 0. index
The next parameter group
Parameter group number Read the next
number possesses high
0x0004 possesses high byte, while parameter group
byte, while the lower byte is
the lower byte is 0. number
0.
The previous parameter
Parameter group number Read the previous
group number possesses
0x0005 possesses high byte, while parameter group
high byte, while the lower
the lower byte is 0. number
byte is 0.

Status parameter group should not be modified and does not support the reading of upper and
lower limits. Parameter characteristic is 2-byte long, and the bit definition is shown in the table
below:

Appendix Table 19 Parameter characteristics

Characteristic
Value Meaning
parameter (BIT)
00B Changeable in run
Not changeable in run, but
01B
BIT1~BIT0 changeable in stop
10B Read only
11B Factory parameters

- 268 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Characteristic
Value Meaning
parameter (BIT)
000B Accuracy: 1
001B Accuracy: 0.1
010B Accuracy: 0.01
BIT4~BIT2
011B Accuracy: 0.001
100B Accuracy: 0.0001
Others Reserved
000B The unit is A
001B The unit is Hz
010B The unit is Ω
011B The unit is r/min
BIT7~BIT5
100B The unit is S
101B The unit is V
110B The unit is %
111B No unit
BIT8 0: decimal; 1: hexadecimal Display format
BIT9 0: non-quick menu; 1: quick menu Quick menu or not
BIT10 0: not uploaded; 1: uploaded Uploaded to control panel or not
001B Data width: 1
010B Data width: 2
011B Data width: 3
BIT13~BIT11 100B Data width: 4
101B Data width: 5
110B Data width: 6
111B Data width: 7
Number of symbols available/not 0: unsigned number; 1: directed
BIT14
available number
BIT15 Reserved Reserved

The response format is shown as table 20 when an error occurs.

- 269 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 20
Application layer
Data length (number of bytes) Range
protocol data unit
Parameter 1 0x80 + parameter
Error code 1
Check LRC or CRC

Error codes supported by Modbus protocol are listed in the table below:

Appendix Table 21 Error codes

Error codes Meanings of error codes
0x01 Illegal parameter
0x02 Illegal register address
0x03 Data error, i.e. data are out of upper limit or lower limit
0x04 Slave operation failed, including errors caused by invalid data
although there are in the range
0x05 Command is valid and being processed, mainly used for storing data
to non-volatile storage
0x06 Slave is busy, please try again later; mainly used for storing data into
non-volatile storage
0x18 Message frame error: including message length error and check error
0x20 Parameter is not changeable
0x21 Parameter is not changeable during the running
0x22 Parameter is under password protection

Drive control parameters are used for start, stop and run frequency setting. By detecting drive
status parameters, run status and run mode can be obtained. Drive control parameters and
status parameters are shown in appendix table 22.

Appendix Table 22 Control parameters

Save at power
Register address Parameter name
loss

0x6200 Control command word No

0x6201 Master frequency setting Yes

0x6202 Auxiliary frequency setting Yes

0x6203 Master frequency setting No

0x6204 Auxiliary frequency setting No

- 270 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Save at power
Register address Parameter name
loss

0x6205 Multi-step frequency setting No

0x6206 Simple PLC frequency setting No

0x6207 PID digital setting percentage (0~100.0%) No

0x6208 PID feedback percentage (0~100.0%) No

0x6209 Electric driven torque limit (0~200.0%) No

0x620A Brake torque limit (0~200.0%) No

0x620B Reserved No

0x620C Reserved No

0x620D Reserved No

0x620E Analog AO1 source setting No

0x620F Analog EAO source setting No

0x6210 Digital DO output source setting No

Setting of slave frequency setting proportion

0x6211 No
(0~100.0%)

0x6212 Virtual terminal communication setting No

0x6213 Accel time 1 Yes

0x6214 Decel time 1 Yes

Appendix Table 23 Status parameters

Register address Parameter name
0x6300 Run status word 1
0x6301 Current run frequency
0x6302 Output current
0x6303 Output voltage
0x6304 Output power
0x6305 Rotary speed
0x6306 Bus voltage
0x6307 Output torque
0x6308 External counter
0x6309 High-bit words of actual length

- 271 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Register address Parameter name

0x630A Low-bit words of actual length
0x630B Status of digital input terminal
0x630C Status of digital output terminal
0x630D Setting of run frequency
0x630E PID setting
0x630F PID feedback
0x6310 Set length
0x6311 Set Accel time 1
0x6312 Set Decel time 1
0x6313 AI1 (unit: V)
AI2 (unit: V) (Negative value indicates the corresponding digital
0x6314
complement)
0x6315 EAI (unit: V)
0x6316 DI (unit: kHz)
0x6317 Fault 1
0x6318 Fault 2
0x6319 Fault 3 (the latest)
0x631A Run display parameter
0x631B Stop display parameter
0x631C Setting of drive control mode
0x631D Frequency setting mode
0x631E Master frequency setting
0x631F Digital setting of master frequency
0x6320 Auxiliary frequency setting
0x6321 Digital setting of auxiliary frequency
0x6322 Drive status word 2
0x6323 Current fault of the drive

Drive control bits are defined as below table 24.

Appendix Table 24 Control bits

Control bit Value Meaning Function description

0 Run command disabled Stop the drive
BIT0
1 Run command enabled Start the drive

- 272 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

Control bit Value Meaning Function description

1 Reverse Set the run direction
BIT1 when run command
0 Forward
enabled
1 Jog
BIT2
0 Jog disabled
1 Reset command enabled
BIT3
0 Reset command disabled
1 Coast to stop enabled
BIT4
0 Coast to stop disabled
BIT15~BIT5 000000B Reserved

 ATTENTION:
When BIT0 and BIT2 coexist, jog takes precedence.

Drive status bits are shown in appendix table 25.

Appendix Table 25 Status word 1 bits

Status bit Value Meaning Remarks
1 Run
BIT0
0 Stop
1 Reverse
BIT1
0 Forward
00B Constant speed
BIT3~BIT2 01B Accel
10B Decel
Main setting not
0
BIT4 attained
1 Main setting attained
BIT7~BIT5 Reserved
0: drive normal.
Non-0: drive at fault;
Refer to relative
BIT15~BIT8 0x00~0xFF Fault code
specification of the fault
codes in Chapter 7 in this
user manual

- 273 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 26 Status word 2 bits

Status bit Value Meaning Remarks

1 Jog
BIT0
0 Non-jog
1 PID run
BIT1
0 Non-PID run
1 PLC run
BIT2
0 Non-PLC run
Run at multi-step
1
frequency
BIT3
Run at non-multi step
0
frequency
1 Ordinary run
BIT4
0 Non-ordinary run
1 Wobble frequency
BIT5
0 Non-wobble frequency
1 Undervoltage
BIT6
0 Normal voltage
Sensor-less vector
1
control
BIT7
Non-sensor-less vector
0
control
BIT8 0 Reserved
BIT9 0 Reserved
1 Autotuning
BIT10
0 Non-autotuning
Others 0 Reserved

- 274 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

6. Operation Instructions

0x03 reads multiple (including one) registers (default address is 0x01). Master enquiry:

Appendix Table 27
Address Parameter Register Number of Check code
address registers
01 03 XX XX 000X XX XX
Slave response:

Appendix Table 28
Address Parameter Total number of Data Check code
bytes
01 03 2* number of Bn~B0 XX XX
registers

Register address: 0x00 00~0x63 22;

Number of registers: 0x00 01~0x00 0C;
Data: n is equal to (2 x the number of registers -1).
Application example:
Note: before using communication controlling drive, please check if hardware is properly
connected; in addition, be sure to properly set the communication data format, baud rate and
address.
Parameter 0x03 is used here to read values of 0x01 slave's control parameters b0-00, b0-01,
b0-02 and b0-03. At this moment, b0-00 = 0, b0-01 = 0, b0-02 = 50.00, b0-03 = 0.

Appendix Table 29
Register Number of Number of Check
Address PARAM Data
address registers data bytes sum
Request 01 03 02 00 00 04 None None 44 B1
0000,0000,
Response 01 03 None None 08 11 79
1388, 0000

Management of parameter 42H

Master enquiry:

Appendix Table 30
Address Parameter Sub-parameter Data Check code
01 42 XX XX XX XX XX XX

Slave response:

- 275 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 31

Address Parameter Sub-parameter Data Check code

01 42 XX XX B1~B0 XX XX

Register address: 0x00 00~0x21 06 and 0x62 00~0x63 22.

Sub-parameter: refer to the table of parameter managing sub-parameter.
Data: refer to the values of data as set forth in the table of parameter managing sub-parameter.
Example:
Parameter 0x42 is used here to read the upper limit value of 0x01 slave's control parameter
b0-02 which is 600.00:

Appendix Table 32
Address Parameter Sub-PARA Data Check sum
Request 01 42 00 00 02 02 F9 64
Response 01 42 00 00 EA 60 36 8D

0x06 (0x41 data storage) writes that individual parameter data is not saved.
Master enquiry:

Appendix Table 33
Register
Address Parameter Data Check code
address
01 06 62 00 B1 B0 XX XX

Slave response:

Appendix Table 34
Register
Address Parameter Data Check code
address
01 06 62 00 B1 B0 XX XX

Example:
Parameter 0x06 is used here to write 0x01 slave's control command (forward), i.e. to write 1 to
register address 0x6200:

Appendix Table 35
Register Number of Number of Check
Address Parameter Data
address registers data bytes sum
Request 01 06 62 00 None None 00 01 57 B2
Response 01 06 62 00 None None 00 01 57 B2

- 276 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

10H writes that the data of multiple registers are not saved.
Master enquiry:

Appendix Table 36
Register Number of Number of Check
Address Parameter Data
address registers data bytes code
Number of
01 10 XX XX 0001~0004 XX XX XX XX
2* registers

Slave response:

Appendix Table 37
Number of
Address Parameter Register address Check code
registers
Number of 2*
01 10 XX XX XX XX
registers

Register address: 0x00 00~0x1E 04, 0x62 00~0x62 14

Number of registers: 0x00 01~0x00 04
Number of data bytes: 0x02~0x08
Data: n is equal to (2 x the number of registers -1).

Example:
Parameter 0x10 is used here to write the corresponding write data 1, 6 and 0 in control
registers 0x6200, 0x6201 and 0x6202 of slave 0x01:

Appendix Table 38
Register Number of Number of Check
Address Parameter Data
address registers data bytes sum
Request 01 10 62 00 00 03 06 0001,0006,0000 CE F8
Response 01 10 62 00 00 03 None None 9F B0

08H: communication line diagnosis

Master enquiry:

Appendix Table 39
Address Parameter Sub-parameter Data Check code
01 08 XX XX XX XX XX XX

Slave response:

- 277 -
Appendix Communication Protocol GK620 User Manual

Appendix Table 40
Address Function code Subfunction code Data Check code
01 08 XX XX Bn~B0 XX XX

Sub-parameter: table of line diagnosis sub-parameter.

Example:
Parameter 0x08 is used here to set the communication no-response mode of 0x01 slave:

Appendix Table 41
Address Parameter Sub-PARA Data Check sum
Request 01 08 00 04 00 00 A1 CA
Response 01 08 00 04 00 00 A1 CA

Read error or warning

In case illegal parameter, illegal register address, data errors and other anomalies are detected
during communication, slave response communication anomaly will occur. In such a case, the
slave response will be in the following formats:
Slave response:

Appendix Table 42
Address Parameter Data Check code
01 0x80+parameter Error code XX XX

Example:
Parameter 0x10 is used here to write the corresponding write data 1, 11, 4 and 100.00 in
control registers 0x6200, 0x6201, 0x6202 and 0x6203 of 0x01 slave:

Appendix Table 43
Register Number of Number of Check
Address Parameter Data
address registers data bytes sum
0001,000B DE 64
Request 01 10 62 00 00 04 08
0004 2710
Response 01 90 None None None 20 0C 01

- 278 -
GK620 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol

7. LRC/CRC Generation

In consideration of the demand for speed improvement, CRC-16 is usually realized in form
mode. C-language source codes for realization of CRC-16 are given below. Please note that
the high and low bytes have been exchanged in final result, that is to say, the result is the CRC
check sum to be sent:

/* The function of CRC16*/

Uint16 CRC16(const Uint16 *data, Uint16 len)
{
Uint16 crcValue = 0xffff;
Uint16 i;
while (len--)
{
crcValue ^= *data++;
for (i = 0; i <= 7; i++)
{
if (crcValue & 0x0001)
{
crcValue = (crcValue >> 1) ^ 0xa001;
}
else
{
crcValue = crcValue >> 1;
}
}
}
return (crcValue);
}

- 279 -